REPORTS FROM OFFICERS IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

Appendix to the Journals of the House of Representatives, 1869 Session I, A-10

A.—No. 10.

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

PBESENTED TO BOTH HOUSES OF THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY, BY COMMAND OP HIS EXCELLENCY.

WELLINGTON.

18G9.

A.—No. 10.

BAT OF ISLANDS. No. 1. Copy of a Letter from Mr. G. S. Coopee to Mr. E. M. Williams. (No. 359-2.) Sib,— Native Office, Wellington, 12th October, 1868. I have the honor to enclose a Resolution of the House of Representatives upon the subject of a Petition from some Chiefs of the Ng&puhi Tribe, and to request that you will make any suggestions that may occur to you as to how the wishes of the petitioners, or any part of such wishes, may be carried into effect by the Government in accordance with the opinion of the House of Representatives. I have, &c, The Resident Magistrate, Waimate, G. S. Coopee, Bay of Islands. Under Secretary. [Similar letter to Resident Magistrate, Russell, and to F. E. Maning, Esq., Hokianga.]

No. 2. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. M. "Williams to Mr. G-. S. Coopee. (No. SO.) Resident Magistrate's Office, Sir,— Waimate, 16th November, 1868. In reply to your letters dated the 12th and 20th of October last, requesting ine to offer any suggestions I may be able to give as to the best mode of carrying into eifect the wishes of the Ngapuhi Chiefs as expressed in their petition laid before the House of Representatives, I have the honor to offer the following remarks : — The meeting which took place at Herd's Point on the 29th July last, convened by Moses Tawhai, the chief who took so active a part in bringing about the surrender of Te Wake to justice, evincing as it did, on the part of himself and other chiefs assembled, a strong desire to introduce into the district a better state of discipline than at present exists amongst the Natives, calls for a careful consideration of the subject on the part of the Government, and the petition, if judiciously acted upon, cannot fail to be productive of good. As the meeting from whence this petition emanated was held at Hokianga ; in compliance with the wishes of the petitioners, 1 would suggest that a gaol be first erected at Herd's Point, where a lock-up is sometimes required in connection with the European population. This would convince the Natives of the favourable reception of their petition ; afford the Government an opportunity of watching the sincerity of their professions; and give to the Natives in connection with AVaimate a longer time to consider the question of erecting one in their district, where the immediate necessity for a building of the kind does not exist, this settlement being within an easy day's journey of the gaol at Russell. It must, however, be remembered that the establishment of a gaol will necessitate the appointment of an English constable who should act as bailiff. A Maori constable would also be required. This man's salary could be provided by dismissing the kareres in the outstations, where they are of little or no service, and giving the pay to one who should reside at or near the gaol. I would avail myself of this opportunity of calling the attention of the Government to the want of a Court House at Herd's Point, which need not bo either large or expensive, but, for the credit of the Government, should be a respectable building. The one at present in use is a disgrace to the place. The appointment of a Resident Magistrate for Hokianga is perhaps, under present circumstances, a question better left by me to the consideration of the Government. Being myself officially connected with that district, I feel diffident in offering any remarks beyond observing that, as long as it may please the Government to continue my connection with llokianga, 1 shall endeavour to discharge my duties to the best of my ability. But, unquestionably, a Magistrate residing on the spot could visit the Natives oftener than one living at a distance, whose time is divided over a large district; yet Ido not see how Mr. Von Sturmer, the gentleman named in the petition, could well discharge the duties of Magistrate in connection with those of the Customs and Post Office, which require his daily attendance at office, unless he be released from visiting the Natives at their villages. I do not consider it necessary, as suggested by the petitioners, that a number of policemen should be appointed ; there would not be employment for all. Four men located in such manner as to be of real assistance to the Magistrate, one at Herd's Point, one at Whangaroa, one at Waimate, and one at Puketorea, would be sufficient; special constables being employed when required. In proposing that soldiers be enrolled to support the law, the petitioners do not desire that troops should be introduced into the district, but that a Native force be raised amongst themselves. In noticing this request, an idea suggests itself whether, under sanction of the chiefs, it might not be advantageous to embody out of each hapu a number of young men who should take the oath of allegiance and pledge themselves to act as special constables whenever called upon. JSuch a step might tend to encourage unanimity, acting at the same time as a check upon the more turbulent characters among them.

REPORTS EROM OFFICERS IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

4

REPORTS EROM OFFICERS

The request made in the 9th clause of the petition, that other Assessors be appointed, might bo advantageously acted upon in the selection of two or three active and intelligent young men, if funds were available. Some of the Assessors, though useful men, are advancing in years, cannot travel much, and seldom assist in the adjudication of cases. With regard to the question of education, I place more reliance upon the success of central than of village schools. But in the absence of the former, rather than nothing should be attempted, I would suggest that a village school bo set on foot at Waima, tlie Government to provide the teacher, the Natives to find him a residence, also a school-room, and to exert their influence in keeping up a regular attendance on the part of the scholars ; the school to be established for twelve months, and if at the end of that period it fail in producing satisfactory results, the teacher to be removed to another village. The statement made in the petition, that the resolutions were agreed to by the chiefs of Ngapuhi and the whole people represented by the signatures, if unexplained, might lead to the supposition that representatives of the whole district were present, which was not the case, but few were there who were not residents of Hokianga. Those who were present did certainly approve of and sign the petition. But I doubt if the majority of those designated as "Ngapuhi ki Tokerau" (Bay of Islands), would acknowledge this petition as the unanimous voice of the people, or agree to its being acted upon generally without first holding a meeting of their own upon the subject. Even if prepared to indorse every word therein contained, their pride would forbid their doing so until the question had been freely and publicly discussed amongst themselves. I mention this, not with any desire to cast the slightest discredit upon the meeting in question, but to show that it was more particularly a Hokianga movement, and that even there prudence will be required in carrying out some of the suggestions embodied in the petition. The Natives are an impulsive race, actuated by the feeling of the moment. Many would acquiesce in proposals or resolutions advanced in general terms, without taking into consideration the possibility of their being personally applied, and when this was found neccssarv, might possibly oppose proceedings as taking a course which they never contemplated. Their professions require bringing into practice before they can themselves realize their full ineauing, and wo must wait until the question comes before them in a practical form, giving what information and instruction can be imparted in preparing them for the reality, that, when required to meet it, their course of action may then prove the sincerity of the desire they now manifest for the full establishment of law and order in this district. Having carefully considered the subject to which my attention has been called, as a first step towards meeting the wishes of the petitioners, I would recommend the erection of a gaol and Court House at Herd's Point, with constables, English and Maori, placed in charge of the same ; the establishment of a village school at AVaima; and, if in accordance with the views of the Government, the appointment of a Resident Magistrate for Hokianga. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Office, Wellington. Ed. M. Williajis, R.M.

No. 3. Copy of a letter from Mr. F. E. Manixg to Mr. G. S. Cooi'i;]:. Sir,— Hokianga, 31st October, 1868. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 12th instant (to hand this flay), together with a copy of a Resolution of the House of Representatives upon the subject of a Petition from some of the Ngapuhi Chiefs, and requesting that I may give any suggestions which may occur to me as to how the wishes of the petitioners may be carried into effect. The most important part of the Ngapuhi petition is, the request for the more effective maintenance of the law in this part of the country, and particularly that henceforth the law for the European and Maori may be the same. I think this is the first occasion on which a request of this nature by the Natives here has been made with sufficient sincerity and by sufficient numbers to make it worth while to endeavour to initiate the system they have indicated, and the iirst step in my opinion should be the appointment of a Resident Magistrate here ; the person appointed, however, would have a delicate and rather critical task to perform, and, to succeed, should be possessed of prudence and resolution, have a knowledge of the Native language and tone of thought, and be, in fact, as an honorable Member of the House of Representatives remarked, most wisely, on a late occasion, "a lay missionary" as much as a magistrate. As the Ngapuhi promise to support the Magistrate if called upon to do so, I do not think that any constabulary force, except one or two Native police, need be attached to the Kesident Magistrate's establishment. I believe the Magistrate should be stationed at Herd's Point in Hokianga, as the most central and convenient place. 1 think it would be advisable to appoint a few Native Assessors to assist the Resident Magistrate, but that none of the Assessors to the Native Lands Court should be appointed to that duty. A small gaol or lock-up should be built at Herd's Point; 1 think one gaol in that place would, for the present, be sufficient. I have never seen much success attend the establishment of schools for Native children in country ■districts, and I believe that for the present one school would be sufficient as a response to the petition; it might be established at Waima in this district, without anv very considerable expense, ;:* 1 believe there is a schoolhouse at that place, and it might be stipulated that the parents of children sent to the school should either pay a certain sum per annum, or supply them with clothes and food. Ido not think the Natives would object to some arrangement of this kind. The Ngapuhi petition should be considered as coining from one-half of the Ngapuhi Tribe, and I think it gives a most valuable opportunity of attempting some progress in giving stability and authority to the law and the success of this attempt would soon cause the adherence of the remainder of the !Ngapuhi people, and the adherence of the whole tribe to an improved state of things would be very

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

5

likely to lead all the other Natives in the North to join in the same measures. I would however remark that, when the Ngapuhi petition states that the law for the European and Maori be henceforth the same, they must be taken to mean that they wish it to be the same as far as their knowledge ofthe law goes; they are however sufficiently informed to allow of the petition being made tho foundation of a progressive movement. Anel in conclusion, I beg to state that, as lam much interested and somewhat hopeful as to the measures proposed to be initiated by the Government, I shall be always most willing to give any information or assistance that my long residence here may enable me to do, to the Magistrate who may be appointed to carry those measures out. I have, &c, G. S. Cooper, Esq., Under Secretary, Native Department. P. E. Maxixg.

No. 4. Copy of a Letter from Mr. P. E. Maxing to Mr. 11. Halse. Native Lands Court Office, Sin, — Hokianga, i)th November, 1888. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter 524-1, of* the 20th ultimo, together with a copy of the Petition of several Ngapuhi Chiefs to the House of Representatives. On the 31st ultimo I had the honor to transmit some remarks on the Ngapuhi petition, as far as I understood its purport from reading the Resolution of the House of Representatives thereon. Having now the petition before me, I have nothing to add to those remarks, except in reference to the seventh paragraph of the petition, which asks for the enrolment of soldiers to support the law. On this point I would most seriously advise the Government to make no display whatever of military force, but to fairly test the sincerity of the Ngapuhi chiefs by leaving it to themselves to support the law and the magistrates, a thing most desirable, and which I think by good management they may be brought to <lo to a valuable extent, though perhaps not perfectly at first. In asking that soldiers may be enrolled, I do not think the petitioners mean anything more than that a certain number of men shall be named in each of their sections or hapu as the persons to be in the first instance called upon in case of need to support the Magistrate ; and that in case of that force being found insufficient they promise (paragraph 8) to support the Magistrate with their whole remaining power, if called upon to do so. I notice that the promise made in the eighth paragraph of the petition is made in case a murder should be committed, and suppose the reason of this implied condition, as it might appear to be, is merely that the petitioners did not contemplate any very serious resistance being made by any offenders, except where the criminal might be subject to the punishment of death. I have, &c, H. Halse, Esq., Assistant Under Secretary, F, E. Making. Native Department.

No. 5. Copy of a Letter from Mr. R. C. Bahstow to the Hon. .T. C. Richmond. (No. 140.) Resident Magistrate's Court, .Sir,— Russell, 13th November, 1868. I have the honour to acknowledge receipt of your letter, as per margin, forwarding copy of a Petition from some Ngapuhi Chiefs assembled at Rawene, Hokianga. and accompanying forward a report thereupon. I have, <&c. The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. R. C. B.utsxow, R.M.

No. 378-2, Katirc Secretary's Office, Wellington, 20th October, 1868.

Petition of Hokianr/a Natives. 1. Maoris by no means object to pass resolutions declaring that laws should bind all alike, but they make a tacit reservation, each in his own individual favour. 2. Doubtless, when English law adjudges imprisonment as punishment for an offence, such punishment should, when practicable, be enforced also in a Native case ; hitherto at any rate, in many instances, a fine may be levied when imprisonment could not be attempted. The question has hence arisen, whether the alternative of a line was to be preferred to leaving an offence altogether unpunished ? 3. A. lock-up and district constable in charge are much required at Rawene, Hokianga ; the distance thence to Russell, the nearest place provided with a place of confinement is about fifty miles. Waimate, being only sixteen miles from Russell, could do without. On an emergency, a room of the Native Hostelry might be used. 4-5. The Government have apparently decided that two Magistrates shall do the work of the three (old) Hundreds of Hokianga, Waimate, and Kororareka; but Petty Sessions might easily be held at Rawene. Five Justices of the Peace reside at Hokianga, three of whom are iu receipt of pay or pension from the Government. Mr Williams. E.M., holds four Courts annually at Rawene ; these supplemented by eight sittings of Petty Sessions, would give a monthly Court. (>. Frivolous eases often arise amongst Natives, which a few words spoken in time usually settle, but I cannot indorse the memorialists' statement, that the crimes committed are very great in these districts —though within the last two years there has been an unusual amount of intertribal fighting on the subject of the disputed ownership of lands. 7. Natives always fancy that the law should be maintained by a resort io force ; they cannot comprehend the universal obligation under which all are placed, of each several individual being bound to assist in maintaining peace, or the orderly submission of each person to the judgments or decisions of 2

A.—No. 10.

6

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

law as affecting himself. A Native usually regards an adverse decision as an hostile measure, the execution of which he may ward off by force, if he is sufficiently strong to do so. Thus any offender deems that he has a right to secure himself from the punishment of his crime by the assistance of his friends or partisans ; hence the supposed necessity of arming the law to overcome such resistance. 8. I have doubts as to the readiness here expressed of assisting the law when one of their own relations or hapu happens to be the offender. 9. Purely a matter of consideration to the Government on the score of expense. 10-11. Very desirable, but by no means easy to accomplish—divorce laws, registration of births, deaths, and marriages, and many similar laws, could never be executed. 12. Entirely a matter for the Government. 13. A school at Waiina is much needed ; I. believe that a schoolhouse already exists there. To summarize, I recommend — 1. The erection of a lock-up and appointment of a district constable, to act also as bailiff of the Court at Eawene, Hokianga. 2. An arrangement, by Petty Sessions or otherwise, for holding Courts at Eawene, at not longer intervals than one month. 3. The establishment of a Native school at or near Waima. E, C. Baustow, E.M. Eussell, 13th November, 1868.

No. G. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. M. Williams to the Hon. J. C. Eiciimond. (No. 93.) Eesident Magistrate's Office, Sir,— Waimate, 28th December, 1868. I have the honor to acknowledge your letter No. 558, 28th November, IS6B, enclosing copy of a letter from Mr. Mailing on the subject of the Ngapuhi Petition, and authorizing me to act on the conjecture in the 3rd paragraph, should it meet the object of the petitioners. As the views expressed by Mr. Maning so nearly coincide with the suggestions given in my letter No. 80, 16th November, 1868, I presume the Government will sanction the enrolment of special constables if agreed to by the petitioners. But before proceeding to discuss the question with them, I should wish to be iu a position to guarantee a certain rate of pay when called upon for actual service, and also to be informed in what manner such pay would be drawn ; I have therefore to request that I may be instructed how far to pledge myself in arranging this question with the Natives. I have, &c, Ed. M. Williams, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Eesident Magistrate.

No. 7. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. M. Williams to the Hon. Dr. Pollen: (No. 28.) Eesident Magistrate's Office, Sin,— Waimate, 22nd February, 1869. I have the honor to enclose two letters, number and date as per margin, addressed to the TJnder Secretary, Native Department, the one being a report of a Native meeting at Whangape, and the other transmitting copy of a letter from chiefs at Whangape, and to request that the same may be forwarded to their destination. I have, &c, Ed. M. Williams, The Hon. the Eesident Minister, Auckland. Eesident Magistrate.

No. 25, Feb. 22, 1869; No. 26, Feb. 22, 18G9.

Enclosure 1 No. 7. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. M. "Williams to Mr. G-. S. Coopee. (No. 25.) Besident Magistrate's Office, Sir, —■ Waimate, 22nd February, 18G9. I have the honor to report, for the information of the Government, the following particulars relative to a meeting of the Earawa, held at Whangape on the 18th instant, at which I was present. Arriving early on the morning of the 17th, I visited the chiefs assembled, who, with their people, numbered about 300, my object being to gain some insight into the nature of the business to be transacted. In this, however. I was disappointed, each one questioned informing me that he had not been admitted into the confidence of those who had called them together. A degree of secrecy appeared to attend the proceedings ; and it was not until the meeting assembled on the morning of the 18th that, to the surprise of all, Winiata Tomairangi, of Kaipara, announced the object to be the election of a Maori Superintendent for the Earawa. This announcement was received by the Earawa north of Whangape with marked distrust; hints were thrown out as to its savouring of a King movement, and Winiata was upbraided for his uncourteous behaviour in keeping the subject a secret from them, instead of consulting with them how best to deal with the question; and being taken by surprise, they asked for time to consider the subject. I would here remark that Winiata, although residing at Kaipara, is himself a Earawa, related to some of the principal chiefs of the tribe ; hence the annoyance felt at his conduct. After some discussion an adjournment was agreed upon until the afternoon, when, on resuming business at 2 p.m., the Northern portion of the Earawa gave their opinion that it would be better to remain as they were; but, inasmuch as some members of the tribe appeared anxious for a change, they

A.— No. 10.

would propose Tamaho Te Anga as Head Chief over that portion of the tribe residing between "Whangape and tho Heads of Hokianga. This was opposed by Winiata, supported by the Hokianga Rarawa, who in their turn proposed Poihipi as Superintendent of the whole tribe, which led to a desultory discussion on both sides. Observing that some of the speakers were becoming confused in their ideas, and fearing an unfavourable effect upon the minds of others, I addressed the meeting, expressing a hope that no course would be adopted which might in any way bear the construction of opposition to the Government; but that whatever they decided would bo in support of the Government, and for the benefit of the people, guarding them against the introduction of any new system which could not be clearly defined, or which they might not thoroughly understand, reminding them that the Government had never interfered with their chiefs, and if now, instead of having a number of chiefs in power, it was their desire to name one man who should be considered head of the tribe, I did not suppose the Government would decline to acknowledge him; but by all means to discard the name of Superintendent, and content themselves with the more familiar term of " Eangatira." Winiata, in reply, stated he had always been a supporter of the Government —was at the present time a Government man—and did not wish the proposal he had made to be considered in any way opposed to the Government, his object being to bring the people more under subjection to the law. The meeting continued until evening without any further decision being arrived at than that the title of Superintendent should be rejected. During the night, however, it was agreed that "Wiremu Tana Papahia should be Head Chief over the Hokianga Earawa, and Poihipi over the Kaitaia Rarawa ; both in the exercise of their duties to act in support of the Government. Winiata and Paora Tuhaero have tho credit of originating this meeting, the real purport of which is not clearly known, supposition leading to the belief that the object was to gain an ascendency over the tribe, and work themselves into power. Paora, although expected, was not present. "Winiata could ill conceal the disappointment he felt at not being nominated Superintendent, after offering himself to the meeting as a candidate for the office. Te Tai also manifested much disappointment, but from a different cause. Having prepared himself for a lengthened discussion upon Te AVake's case, finding the subject was not brought forward, withdrew from the meeting without taking any part therein, the chiefs manifesting their good sense by carefully avoiding any mention of Te Wake's name. Although the Natives were in possession of spirituous liquors, no instance of intoxication occurred, no violent speeches were delivered, nor did anything transpire to warrant a supposition that the Earawa, as a body, were actuated by feelings of disaffection or disloyalty; on the contrary, many of their remarks evinced a decitled attachment to the Government, and repugnance to receive anything of a doubtful character, whilst, to tho credit of all, it should be added that the meeting throughout was ucted iu a most respectable and orderly manner, ponrl I have, &c., The Under Secretary, Native Department. Edwd. M. Williams, R.M.

Enclosure 2 in No. 7. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. M. Williams to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. (No. 20.) Eesident Magistrate's Office, Sir,— Waimate, 22nd February, 1869. I have the honor to transmit herewith, for the information of the Government, the copy of a letter addressed to me by Wmiata and other Earawa chiefs during my late visit to Whangape, together with translation of the same. It is perhaps necessary to explain that this letter was the result of certain remarks which passed between Winiata and myself during the meeting of the previous day. When addressing them on that occasion, in noticing the reasons assigned by Winiata for requiring a Superintendent, viz., to teach them the laws, to guard their lands, and instruct them in civilized habits, I remarked that they already had Judges of Land Courts, Magistrates, and Teachers amongst them, who were ready at all times to impart instruction. To this he replied, If we cannot have a Superintendent we must have a European to instruct us, and request you to apply to the Governor for a Eesident Magistrate to be appointed for Whangape. I stated that I could not myself make such a request, but would forward any letter they might wish to address to His Excellency on the subject; and the following morning, just as I was leaving, a letter, of which the enclosed is a copy, was placed in my hands. In conversation with Tamaho, the Chief of Whangape, an Assessor whose name appears on the letter, I expressed my doubts as to the success of their application, the number of inhabitants in his place not warranting such an appointment, but assured him that, as long as I was officially connected with them, I should always feel a pleasure in visiting and instructing them. Tamaho is an influential chief, much respected by his people, and I believe sincere in his professions of friendship. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Department, Edwd. M. Williams, E.M.

Sub-Enclosure to Enclosure 2 in No. 7. Ehoa E te Wiremu, — Whangape, Peptiere 19, 1869. Tena koe, tenei ano ta inatou kupu ki a koc, emea ana ta matou runanga kia tukua atu ta matou reta e koe ki a te Kawana, kia tukua niai he kai whakawa mo matou mo tenei takiwa mo Whangape. Te take i tuhituhi atu ai matou ki a koe, he whakaaro ki o matou raruraru, e kore hoki e taea mai nau te whakaaro e koe i ou raruraru, koia matou i tuku atu ai i ta matou kupu ki a koe inau e tuku atu tena kupu ki aia. Aua ia e whakahe mai ita matou kupu pai, ki te kore ia e whakaae

7

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

8

EEEOETS EEOM OEEICEES

mai ki ta matou kupu tono mo tetahi hoa Pakeha mo matou, ka matau matou kua kino ia ki a matou. E hoa e te Wiremu tena koe, haere atu ki tou wahi mauria atu nga korero o tenei hui kia rongo Ngapuhi me ou hoa pakeha. Heoi ano ta matou kupu ki a koe na ou hoa pono. Na Tamaho Te Tluhii, Wiremu Tana Papaiiia, Te Puru, Rtkihana, wlniata tomairangi, Otira na te runanga o Te Rarawa.

[translation.] Friend Williams,— Whangape, 19th Februry, ISG9. Salutations to you. Here is our word to you : our meeting requests you to forward our letter to the Governor, that a Magistrate be sent to us for this district for Whangape. The reason for our writing to you is in consequence of our troubles, for youcannot be expected to think of them amidst your own engagements ; therefore we give our word to you, for you to pass on that word to him (the Governor). Let him not ignore our good word ;if he does not agree to our word asking for some European friend for us, we shall know that he is displeased with us. Friend Williams, salutations to you. Go to your home, and take with you the words of this meeting, that Ngapuhi and your European friends may hear them. This is all our word to you, from your true friends. Tamaho te Huiiu, Wieemu Tana Papaiiia, Te Puiiu, RIKIHANA, Win tata Tomairangi, That is to say from the meeting of the Rarawa.

WAIKATO. No. 8. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. N. Searancke to tlie Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sie,— Hamilton, Waikato, 10th October, 1868. I have the honor to hand to you herewith a copy of my Report for the quarter ending the 30th September, on state of the Waikato District. I have, &c, William jST. Searancke, R.M., The Hon. Mr. Richmond, Native Department. Waikato and Raglan Districts.

Report on the State of the Waikato District for the Quarter ending 30th September, 1868. The Waikato District has been remarkable during the last three months for the perfect state of quietude amongst the Natives living both within and without the confiscation boundary. Amongst the latter more particularly I note it, on account of the many circumstances of late calculated to excite them. Preparation of land and planting has largely occupied their attention, anil a greater extent of land is now under cultivation amongst the King's Natives than ever was known before. The rules of the Aukati are also now greatly relaxed, and Natives from Tokangamutu and its neighbourhood are constantly visiting their friends amongst the kupapas ; they appear to be friendly, but very reticent. They still appear anxious to maintain peace between themselves and the Europeans in the Waikato, but I regret to say that I fear this friendship to us is not very much to be depended upon ; there is a want of confidence on tho part of the Natives —a suspicion and an anxiety lor news of late, which, together with the numerous parties of visitors of late from Tokangamutu amongst the- Kupapas, with no distinct object, leads me to suspect that something more than usual is stirring. Native messengers are also constantly passing to and fro between Tokangamutu and Hauraki; and from reports, I have reason to believe that if the gold fields at Ohinemuri and Te Aroha are thrown open to Europeans by the friendly Natives residing there, that serious disturbances, if not war, will be the result. The opening of a gold field there will, lam informed, be accepted as a casus belli by Tawhiao. anil the Natives living with him. That any disturbance could be confined to Hauraki is impossible; Waikato will be the sufferer, and its present advanced state of improvement and prospects stopped, and most probably ruined. Planting now is nearly over, and the Natives beyond the confiscation boundary settling down in. idleness, and consequently ready and eager for some excitement, their present supplies of food abundant, and their prospects for next year's supplies also very good. Under these circumstances, combined with the bombastic reports of successes brought by messengers from the South, I can hardly believe it possible, without the exercise of very great influences amongst themselves, that they can remain quiet long. Many of the King's Natives who proposed proceeding to join Titokowaru have been stopped, and suggestions made that they might be wanted here. As regards the European population ofthe district, I regret to say that the major part succumbed to tho temptations ofthe Thames Gold Fields, left the Waikato, and thereby reduced its male population to a now most insignificant number. A few practical and wealthy settlers have lately located themselves in the district on large purchased blocks of land, aud evince their intention to remain by their extensive cultivations and improvements.

IX NATIVE DISTUICTS.

9

A.—No. 10.

There has not been of late any dearth of employment for those willing to work, and but little distress; and I am also glad to be able to state that several of our Waikato working settlers have lately returned from the Thames diggings, and many more are, I hear, anxious to do so, but unable from want of means. Referring again to the Natives, I regret to say that (without being able to give any facts) I am not satisfied with their present attitude ; but at the same time, while taking every possible precaution, I would most carefully abstain from uttering a word that would tend in any way to a feeling of fear or panic in the minds of my fellow-settlers in this district. "William N. Searaxcke, R.M., Waikato and Raglan Districts.

No. 9. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. N. Seaeancke to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. (No. 234.) Sie, — Hamilton, 16th November, 186S. By the arrival of a Native on the evening of the 14th instant, at Kaipiha, where a halfcaste family named Turner reside, about two miles above Alexandra, from Hangatiki, I am in possession of the following" information : —On Thursday evening, the 12th instant, a party of Ngatimaniapotos, about fifty in number, headed by a chief named Eeihana, of the extreme war party, arrived at Otarahanga, where Mr. Lewis Hettit resides, and has resided now for many years, and ordered him at once to leave and join the Europeans; this Hettit curtly refused to do. Reihana then, in a violent manner, again ordered him off, threatening him in case of refusal. Hettit again refused to go, stating that he had the King's auchority for remaining there; that ho would not move ; that they might kill him if they pleased, but go away he would not. Eeihana then said, "In a fortnight I will return here ; do not let me find you here." Eeihana then marched his men away. I am also informed that Reihana expressed his intention to Tawhiao and the Natives at Tokangamutu, while passing through, to drive away Hettit, and to visit the Waikato. To this Tawhiao expressed great displeasure, and desired him not to interfere with Hettit; and Tamati Manuwhiri, at Tawhiao's request, at once sent a note to Hettit, desiring him not to go away, but if made a prisoner by them to go quietly. There is a peculiar significance in this interference by Reihaua and the war party, as opposed to Tawhiao and the leading chiefs of the Waikatos, who are advocates for peace ; and I am led to believe from it that Tawhiao and his party are getting weaker, whilst the war party are getting stronger and more numerous. The unfortunate reverses the Europeans have had South in their encounters with the Natives have caused of late great excitement amongst the Ngatimaniapoto and the young men of the Waikato, so much so that Tawhiao has been called a " kupapa," and even his life threatened ; he is, I believe, in great terror, and constantly moving about from place to place. Reihana's threat to return in a fortnight is also significant; if he thinks he is strong enough to successfully oppose Tawhiao's views, he will, I have no doubt, do so; and if he does, and Hettit is either killed or taken prisoner, I fear for the peaceable state of the Waikato. Great jealousy has always existed between the Ngatimaniapotos and the leading men of the Waikato ; and the step now taken by the former, aided by a great number of the latter, if carried out, will lead to war under another dynasty. I am glad to say that I have been able to reassure the settlers in and about Alexandra, to which place I propose returning on Thursday next, having engagements in the meantime. I have, &c., The Hon. Mr. Richmond, Wellington. W. N. Seakaxcke, R.M.

No. 10. Memoeaitdum of an Inteeyiew with the Rev. Heta Taeawhiti (Mr. Rogan interpreting). 18th March, 1869. The Rev. Heta Tarawhiti has just returned from Tokangamutu. He went thither of his own accord, and had an interview with Tarnati Ngapora* at Orahiri, a small out-settlement at a little distance from that place. Heta thinks that Tamati was more friendly and quieter than when he last saw him. Tamati said that heretofore he was full of and at the point of choking with indignation, but that now lie felt easier, and could see a little light rising. The King had talked of calling a meeting of the Kupapas, and of inviting Europeans to attend, for the purpose of considering the present state of the Maori people, and of determining what was to be done in the future, but that he (Tamati) had not yet agreed to that proposal, because he feared that the recent murders at the White Cliffs might bring on war, and that the Europeans would attack the Maniapoto from Waikato. He desired to know if the Government would allow the Kupapas to attend such a meeting ; and secondly, if an officer of the Government would be sent to the meeting, that he might hear what was said, and see what was done there. He did not favour the idea of having many Europeans, lest discord should arise. I replied to Heta that Aihipene Kaihau, Wi Te Wheoro, and many of our friends, had already asked whether I would allow them to go to the meeting, and that I said to them that if they felt that it was safe and proper for them to go, the Government would not object. 1 said, also, that if it was desired that an officer of the Government should attend, and that if Tamati named the person whose presence would be most agreeable, he would be sent. * Also called Tamati Mauuwliiri. 3

A.—No. 10.

10

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

Heta said that he would make that answer. He said also that if the Kupapas were invited, they might attend without fear, and that the officer was to go with and in the care of him (Heta). If the meeting could be managed, he believed that great good might come of it; but there were diliiculties in the way, and if the invitation to attend be not soon given to the Kupapas, it will be a sign that great trouble is at hand. Heta left Auckland yesterday (March 19th) on his return to Tokangamutu. D. Pollen.

No. 11. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. X. Seauaxcke to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. (No. 75.) Sib,— Alexandra, 27th April, 1869. I have the honor to report for your information, that in consequence of the letter received by" me on Monday night, the 19th instant, informing me that Tamati Manuwhiri had consented to my attending the meeting at Hangatiki, I left Hamilton on Tuesday, arriving at Otorohanga (Lewis Hettit's place), about eighteen miles beyond Alexandra, on Wednesday at mid-day, where Tamati's letter respecting my visit was placed in my hands. On Friday, the 23rd, Te "Wlieoro, accompanied by about 180 friendly Natives and two Europeans, arrived at Orahiri. a Native settlement where the " Aukati" line is maintained, about four miles distant from Hangatiki. The Rev. Heta Tarawhiti and about sixty friendly Natives had arrived on the previous Tuesday. William Te AVheoro was received here by about 400 of the Waikatos, King's men, all armed with double-barrelled guns or rifles, and dressed only with Whakaiwa round their waists. The "Tangi" having taken place, the usual welcome-speeches were made and responded to by the friendlier. The Hauhau prayers were then chanted, and large supplies of food being given for the use of the Kupnpas, the rest of the day was spent by them in renewals of friendship with their relatives. On Saturday, the 24th instant, the friendlies started for Hangatiki. On nearing the settlement they formed in double file, and when about 200 yards distant were met by the Waikatos, who formed in two bodies on either flank of them ; the women formed a third party, and the Ngatimaniapotos, headed bv Bewi Manga (and in the midst of whom was King Tawhiao) formed a fourth body, and marched past the Kupapas in military order. The Waikatos were computed at about 1,206 men, and the Ngatimaniapotos at about 500, the whole armed with double or single barrelled guns or rifles, and all in fighting costume, with the Whakniwa only round the waist. A general discharge of their guns by the King's party took place on the approach of the friendlies, but not responded to by them. The "Tangi'' was then commenced by the women, about 800 strong, and after continuing for a short time was stopped by the Hauhaus going to prayers. The Ngatimaniapotos and King Tawhiao had previously retired. The food, consisting of pigs and potatoes, was then put down for the friendlies, who were actively engaged the rest of the day inputting up their tents, &C. This arrival and meeting between the King Natives and the friendlies I was not allowed to attend, in consequence of jealousies amongst the Waikatos themselves at Tamati giving me leave to attend without consulting them, and also to the attempts by other Europeans, one particularly who is connected with the half-caste family of Turners of Kaipiha, to be allowed to attend in spite of the general prohibition ; they did not obtain leave to go up, but were the means of preventing my doing soon that day (Saturday, the 21th). On the afternoon of that day a messenger arrived at Otorohanga, informing me that I could go up to Hangatiki, and on Sunday morning I did so, and then ascertained that I had to thank Manga (Eewi) for his interference in my favour. I found the settlement in the most quiet and orderly state, notwithstanding the vast numbers present. The Hauhaus had proposed in thcinorning to hold the meeting, but on being informed it was Sunday at once withdrew. The Hauhau Sunday is every tenth day only. Both on the road and at Hangatiki I met with the utmost civility from all the King Natives. On Sunday eveuing 1 returned to Otorohanga, and on Monday morning again went to Hangatiki. Immediately after my arrival the " Wero" (challenge) was sent by the friendlies to the King's party; the friendlies, in number about 100, then commenced dancing the " Whaka kite" (war dance). The King's men about 400 in number, all armed with double-barrelled guns, responded to the challenge ; they were led by Manga (Eewi). After the war dance was over the speeches commenced. The speakers on the King's side were Te Whiti of the Ngatiteata Tribe, Hone Pumipi of Hari Hari, near Kawhia, Te Tapihana of Kawhia, Hone Tangataiti, and Manga (Eewi). On the part of the Kupapas the speakers were Hetaraka Nero of Eaglan, Hemi Matene, Mohi Te Eangomau, and William Te Wheoro. With the exception of Manga's speech, they were all to the same effect; in the first place the usual welcome, then a waiata or song, and followed up by invitations to the Kupapas to join them, coupled with expressions of admiration at their not joining the Government as soldiers as other tribes have done; and I particularly noticed the general pacific tone and desire for peace throughout. Manga's speech particularly was distinct, peaceable, and straightforward ; he commenced by acknowledging how much he had. contributed to the war, had caused the death of many, and to the expatriation of Waikato from their own lands. He denied any knowledge of the late killing of Europeans (alluding, I believe, to the White Cliffs); stated that whatever fighting might be going on, either to the eastward or westward, that they were unconnected with it; expressed his pleasure at seeing his son (Te Wheoro) ; that he hoped he would on his return to Waikato continue in the same course that he had hitherto pursued —that he would not listen to any persuasions from any one to leave the Waikato, but remain there for ever and ever. Te Wheoro's answer followed Manga's speech, and was listened to with breathless attention. Addressing Manga, he said:—My father, this is the second time 1 have come to see you ; the first time you ran away to Mokau, and my words then were, Haere ki te kawhaki ia koe (Go and save yourself) ; and I now repeat it, Wakatika haere e rere e rere e rere haere ki te kawhaki ia koe (Arise and go ;

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

11

depart quickly ;go and save yourself). (This is supposed to be in allusion to the White Cliff murders committed by Ngatimaniapoto, of which tribe Manga is one of the principal chiefs.) Some of you ask me to come inland; this is inland, and lam here, but not to join you, but to visit and see my relations (Waikatos). I will return to my place and my treasures (the homes of his ancestors), and never will I leave Waikato, the land of my ancestors and my treasures; no never, never, never. For several minutes after Te AVheoro had ceased speaking there was not a whisper to be heard. He made a profound impression on all present, he being very much respected by all the King party, from Tawhiao downwards. Wiremu Hunia, one of Tawhiao's secretaries and special messenger, then stepped forward and said : —Listen, white men and Natives. Listen to the Panui (Proclamation) of To Ariki (Lord and Master). Listen to the words of Tawhaio (copy herewith, as taken from original). As a Proclamation from Tawhiao read to a meeting of King Natives always terminates all business, the meeting broke up at once. I remained at Hangatiki until late in the afternoon, but nothing further of general interest took place. I saw both Tamati Manuwhiri and Manga (Rewi), and spoke to them, though but for a moment, no conversation with them being possible, from the extreme jealousy existing amongst the Natives themselves, but their manner was kind and civil; I believe that both of them were anxious to have spoken more with me, the former particularly, but there was no possibility of an opportunity of doing so. I being the object of curiosity to all the Natives present at the meeting, and being also most carefully watched, I need hardly say that I did not see Tawhiao, ho not being allowed to see any European on any account (Lewis Hettit excepted). The utmost order was preserved at Hangatiki. I did not hear any bad language of any sort made use of when speaking of Europeans. I believe the great object of the King's party now to be, to try and detach our Native allies from fighting on our side ; that in no case we should be aided by Native allies, but left to fight our own battles with Natives. The King's party will not, I believe, interfere in the Aroha land dispute. I met Te Heuheu at Hangatiki ;he arrived there on the 24th instant, with five followers only. He informed me that Te Kooti had, he thought, returned to Te Wairoa, that he was not in the Taupo district. One thing I saw clearly, that the most intense jealousy exists between the Waikatos and the Ngatimaniapotos, which must in time lead to a division. The Waikatos are also very much divided amongst themselves, and nothing but the fear of Te Pakeha preserves them in their cohesiveness. Te Aukati, always a source of jealousy and ill-feeling between the tribes, is now becoming more so than ever, and must ifleft alone be, I think, soon done away with. I observed also at the meeting a very large number of halfcastes, at least sixty, of whom about forty-five were living with the King's party. The only Europeans allowed to be present at the meeting were Lewis Hettit and myself, and Manga informed the former that any Europeans intruding into their district, knowing as all must do of the rules of the Aukati, would be stripped and detained until their curiosity was amply satisfied. I was glad to observe that nearly all, both women and children, were dressed in more or loss of European clothing, and looked clean and healthy; immense numbers of children I could not but remark, they amounted to at least 500, between four and fourteen years of age, but the number of male children in proportion to female appeared to me to be fully two to one. As I was the first European allowed to go into the King's district, I most carefully abstained from intruding in any way, or entering into any general conversation to which exception might be taken by any of the King's party ; but I look forward to the time when I may again meet with some of the leading men of that party. The expected arrival of His Royal Highness the Duke of Edinburgh was mentioned to Tamati Manuwhiri, but no remark in answer was elicited from him. I was informed at Hangatiki that the Arawas were to be invited next month to visit Tawhiao at Tokangamutu, and that in the following month Tamihana Te Eauparaha, Ngatitoa and Ngatiraukawa Tribes from Kapiti, were to be invited to visit him. I observed one remarkable thing, that all the Natives have, either during or since the war in Waikato, changed their names ; all baptized names are strictly set aside, and old Maori family names taken in their place. Not one of the Natives connected with the murders at the White Cliffs wore present at the meeting at Hangatiki, nor could I ascertain more than they were believed to be at Mokau Heads ; they are said to be under Tawhiao's displeasure, and were not invited, and would not have been allowed to bo present at Hangatiki. Eeinana was invited to attend, but instead of doing so he went to join his friends at Mokou. Te Wheoro and his party were to have left Hangatiki to-morrow morning, but will, I fear, be now detained by the rain and floods. There was considerable excitement amongst the King party at Hangatiki a short time ago, on hearing that troops were to be stationed at Taupo; but I was unable, up to the time of my leaving, to ascertain their real feelings on the subject. I was particularly struck with the large body of men, over 1,500, present at Hangatiki, capable of bearing arms, and all well armed, but I have every reason also to believe and to know that ammunition is exceedingly scarce ; also at the present modification and improvement in the Hauhau prayers, now quietly conducted within a house, and not, as formerly, by Natives in a half-crazy state, screaming and howling unintelligible gibberish. The friendly Natives were very much pleased at the manner in which they were received and treated by the King Natives generally, though disappointed at not seeing Tawhiao ; in fact, Manga (liewi) excepted, the leading men did not take any active part beyond the reception of the friendlies. On the whole, though no admissions were made by the King's party at this meeting, I cannot but look upon it as a probable precursor of better feelings. The fact of my being allowed to attend the meeting is a small point gained ; and the total absence of any bad language of any sort, either to me personally or the Europeans generally, was remarkable, and the quiet and orderly conduct of so large a body of

A.—No. 10,

12

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

Natives, men, women, and children, not less than 3,500 in all, I could not but admire; the general tone not only of the public speeches but also of private conversations essentially peaceful, and the desire expressed only to be left alone—in fact to preserve and maintain their present state of isolation from Europeans. All the leading Natives see clearly that to keep up the King movement, and thereby hold a certain amount of authority over the rising generation, the system of isolation from Europeans must be strictly maintained. I have, etc., The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. William N. Searancke, K.M.

No. 12. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. X. Seaeancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Sie,— Alexandra, 27th February, 18C9. I have the honor to inform you that I have succeeded in obtaining the following information respecting the murders at the White Cliffs: —A short time ago Mr. Parris, of Taranaki, sent to the Natives residing at Mokau Heads to bring some pigs and cattle for sale, which they at once prepared to do, notwithstanding the aulcati there. When Tikaokao (Tawhana) and Wetere, chiefs of the Ngatimaniapoto tribe, heard of this they were very angry, and, mustering a party of about eighteen men, started in pursuit from their settlement inland, and coming up with the Natives driving the cattle, about fifteen miles from Mokau Heads, sent them back at once. They then went on to Pukcaruhe (the White Cliffs), and there killed a woman and three children ; and while there the four Natives who had driven the pigs to Taranaki arrived on their way back, and informed Tikaokao that the Eev. Mr. Whiteley was close behind them. Tikaokao and some of his men went forward and met him, and told him to go back to Taranaki. I am informed that Mr. Whitcley refused to do so, and made some unpleasant remarks, and insisted on going on to the redoubt. On his arrival, before he could get off his horse, he was shot by Tahana, a brother-in-law of lieihana's, and subsequently the horse was shot. Two or three Europeans then came up and were at once killed. Tikaokao and party originally purposed going on to Urenui and killing any other Europeans there, but feeling satisfied with having shot Mr. Whiteley, they immediately returned to Mokau, and on to their settlements inland, and two days after, the murderers were at Hangatiki. Tawhiao has expressed great sorrow and also anger at these murders, they being committed in direct defiance of his wishes and authority, and has again expressed his intention of retiring with the Waikatos either to Kawhia or to Taupo, and thereby leave the country open for the Ngatimaniapoto to do as they plea&e in the Waikato District. From what I can gather from the Natives I have met here, I believe they intend these murders to be a challenge to the Europeans, and I very much fear will be followed up by others in this district. The subject of an attack on settlers in this district has lately, I am told, been spoken of more than once, and Eeihana and an armed party came to Hangatiki a few days ago, but were met by Tawhiao and 200 Natives from Kawhia and. sent back. Te Tapihana and his party have also, notwithstanding the order of Tawhiao to remain at Kawhia, been at Te Kopua this week, and 1 believe him now to be not very far off. At present there is a meeting of the Natives at Tokangamutu, but what the object is I have not been able to ascertain, or in fact to obtain any material information. Several of the Kopua Natives are very much frightened, coming in to Alexandra to sleep, and almost afraid to go to their settlements in day time. They speak confidently that an immediate attack is to be made on Alexandra, Kihikihi, Orakau, and Te Awamutu, by the Ngatimaniapotos, and in that opinion, I regret to say that, looking at the notice given by Tapihana in his letter to the Governor and the settlers residing in the Waikato, 1 coincide, and I also very much fear that the attack will not be long deferred. I have, &c., Hon. D. Pollen, Resident Minister, Auckland. AVji. N. Seaeancke, R.M.

No. 13. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. N. Seaeancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollex. (No. 45.) Sir,— Hamilton, 4th March, 1869. I have this morning returned from Alexandra, and having succeeded in reopening my communications, and also seen Mr. Hettit, who had only the day previous come from Tokangamutu, 1 am now able to give correct information not only respecting the murders at Pukearuhc, but also of the intended but happily frustrated raid on Waikato. About the middle of February Tawhiao invited the whole of the Waikatos residing inland, also the Ngatimaniapoto tribe, to a feast at Kawhia. This invitation was, however, declined by Eeihana and his parly, who reside at Pukearuhc, a settlement near the head of the Mokau River; also by the Mokau Natives. On the 15th ultimo Tamati ]N Tgapora Manuwhiri, Rewi, and a large number of Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos, started for the feast at Kawhia, and had arrived, on the following day, within a mile or two of it, when they were overtaken by a messenger, who informed Tamati that immediately after they had left Tokangamutu, lieihana and his friends had had a meeting, and had decided to make an attack on the Europeans, one party, headed by Wetere and subsequently joined by Tikaokao, to attack the Europeans at the White Cliffs, and the other party, headed by lieihana himself, to attack Alexandra. On hearing this, Tamati, Eewi, and party hurried on to the feast. What took place there I camiot say: the food was given them at once, but instead of remaining there a week or two they only stopped about forty-eight hours, and returning, divided into three parties of about 200 men in each party, by different routes, to intercept Eeihana, and, if possible, stop Wetere and the party going to the White Cliffs. Unfortunately they were too late to do so. The party under Eewi found Reihana and thirty armed men at Te Uira, on their way to Alexandra. Te Uira is a large settlement situated between Tokangamutu and Hangatiki, and about twenty-live miles from Alexandra, and the

A.—No. 10.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

13

converging point of the roads thereabouts. The Waikatos drove Reibana and party before them to Tokangamutu, and ordered them to return home at once. Two or three days afterwards they received the news of the murders at the White Cliffs, which information was forwarded by Tamati. on the 21st, to Mr. Hettit, to send to me, and forwarded by me to you on the 24th ultimo. Tamati's letter, I regret to say, was misinterpreted by me in the hurry of forwarding. It should have been "by Wetere," (murders committed). The actual murderers at the White Cliffs were a half-caste lad, a son of an European named Frank Philips, residing at Mokau Heads ; Wetere, a son of the late Takerei, of Te Awakino, near Mokau ; Herewini, a son of the late Peketai, formerly residing at Waitara, subsequently of Mokau ; and Te Tana, of Mokau Heads. These four actually committed the murders. Mr. Whiteley was shot by Wetere, and not by Tahana, as stated in my letter No. 39. He was told to go back, and refused: his horse was then shot. Mr. Whiteley then sank on his knees and commenced praying. While so doing he was shot at twice by Wetere with a revolver, and missed. Wetere then went up close, and shot the unfortunate gentleman dead These murders, and more particularly Mr. Whiteley's, have caused a most profound sensation and feeling of regret throughout the district occupied by Tawhiao and the Waikatos. Neither Tawhiao, Tamati, nor Rewi left their houses for twenty-four hours after the news arrived. At the present, another meeting has been called at Tokangamutu, to which all the Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos, including Reihana, Tikaokao, and Wetere, are bidden to attend ; at least, messengers are sent after them, but it is not known at Tokangamutu where they are. The subject to be discussed is peace or war. The whole of the AVaikatos are, I firmly believe, strongly inclined for peace ; but it is utterly impossible to say what may be the effect on their minds, of Reihana and party's warlike views. This openly declared war party does not at present exceed sixty men. The whole of the Natives, both Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos, are now in an exceedingly excited state, and I look forward to the results of the meeting of the Natives at Tokangamutu with considerable anxiety. I have, so far as lies in my power, made use of all my friends to keep me informed of what takes place at Tokangamutu. I have also established a means of communication by messengers to Alexandra, and can now only trust that Tawhiao, Tamati, and the Waikatos will be firm in maintaining peace in this district. I have made every inquiry about Rewi's views, and am glad to be able to do him justice. He was reported to me to be the prime mover of the intended disturbance: lam now in a position to know that there was no truth in it. Rewi is a firm supporter of Tawhiao and his views, and one of the principal advocates for peace. I have not been able to obtain any news from Patetere respecting Hakaraia and Kereopa Kai Karu's intended movements. I have caused every inquiry to be made amongst the King's Natives, but cannot hear nor do I think that there is any communication between Tokangamutu and Patetere, or even between Reihana and Kereopa ; but I can very well suppose that if the former had been successful in his attack on Alexandra, that he would have been at once backed by the latter, as also by many others. I have, &c, Hon. Dr. Pollen, William N. Searancke, R.M., Resident Minister, Auckland. Waikato and Raglan. P.S.—I forgot to mention that Tawhiao has sent messengers to all the settlements between Te Kopua and Tokangamutu, to be on the alert, and not to allow any armed party to pass. W. N. Seaeascke.

BAT OF PLENTY. No. 14. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. A. Wilson to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. (D. 214.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sib,— Tauranga, 10th March, 1869. I have the honor to state that I returned from Taupo on the 7th instant, having seen all the principal loyal chiefs of the district, excepting such as occupy the southern shores of the lake. I also had an interview with Ilitiri, the Hauhau chief who disputes Te Tatua block, and I had a conversation with Hera, the wife of Manuera, of Rotoaira, who had been sent by her husband to visit Te Pohipi Tukairangi, for the purpose probably of obtaining information. I found on my arrival at Oruanui that Te Poihipi and others had " katied " all intercourse between the loyal Natives and the Hauhaus at Taupo. I immediately removed the kati, reminding them of the frequently expressed wish of the Government that Taupo should remain undisturbed, and showing how a kati would operate against their own interests in and out of the Native Land Court. In excuse for their proceedings they produced a letter written by Mr. McLean, dated 7th January, 1809; but on perusing it I found they had misapprehended that gentleman's meaning, and I pointed out their mistake. The loyal Natives admitted the force of all I said, and promised to observe the wish of the Government in future. But the secret of our allies' restlessness, in my opinion, is, that they are tired of the state of uncertainty they are in. The same may be said of the Arawa, who chafe and wish to terminate the suspense they feel. The Ngatikahununu had been invited by our Taupo friends to come and assist in conquering their Hauhau neighbours—a project which lof course vetoed —and yet I forbode a general war will be thrust upon us in these parts. I found Hitiri and the woman Hera very uncommunicative. The former said he should stop the main road from Ohinemutu to Taupo at Te Niho-o-te-kiori. I warned him not to do so, and he then appeared to hesitate : "At least," he said, " after the Court is over you will know what I intend to do." I could not obtain any Hauhau news from him. I saw the fires of the great Hauhau meeting at Moerangi on the 2nd instant, about fifteen miles off, as I stood on the North Shore of Lake Taupo, 4

A.—No. JO.

14

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

and I asked Hera what the Hauhaus had to discuss. She replied that they had their meetings as we had ; that Eewi had been to Taupo lately, and had ordered them to hold this meeting. She evidently looked upon Eewi as the influential manager of their party. She said she had been to Tokangamutu lately ; that the King was for peace, but she did not pretend to know Eewi's intentions. When I left Oruanui on the sth instant, a large number of Natives had collected there to attend the Native Land Court. I have, &c, J. A. Wilson, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Acting Civil Commissioner.

No. 15. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. A. AVilson to the Hon. J. C. Bichmond. (D. 213.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sin,— Tauranga, 10th March, 1869. I have the honor to forward for your information the enclosed copies of letters enumerated in the margin which I have lately received from Major Mair and Dr. Nesbitt. They contain detailed intelligence of the arrival of Te Kooti at Ohiwa, his occupation of Eakuraku's pa by arrangement with that chief, of the murder of Mr. Pitcairn on the evening of the 2nd instant on an island in Ohiwa Harbour, and of the horrible treachery of Eakuraku's people towards that unfortunate gentlemen. In fact, the conduct of the woman Euta, a near relative to Eakuraku, is scarcely surpassed in the annals of Maori crime. Te Kooti's force is said to consist of ten Chatham Islanders and upwards of 200 TJrewera, the latter being mostly boys or old men. He has proclaimed that his Atua has given him the shores of that part of the Bay of Plenty to sweep as far as the East Cape. I fear he is intriguing with the surrendered AVhakatohea at Opape, who number 187 men, who may probably join him. Eakuraku's pa, AVhakarae, where Te Kooti is now, is situated on a commanding hill, about a mile and a half from the head-waters of Ohiwa. The pa is visible from all parts of Ohiwa, and is about five miles from the sea. It is more than a quarter of a mile from the forest, which is reached by descending a deep ravine, but the approaches for several miles are such as to render it very doubtful whether an adequate force could surround the pa by surprise. There were about forty Arawa at Ohiwa at the time of Te Kooti's arrival. They have, however, been reinforced by ten Ngatipukeko Natives from AVhakatane, who volunteered to assist them, and ten Arawas left Maketu yesterday to join them. They have also strengthened their pa. The conduct of the Ngatipukeko, on this as on previous occasions, is very commendable. As under present circumstances the Government may desire to be informed of the military strength of the Arawa Tribe, I forward the enclosed return, showing the fighting men of the tribe and the Government arms in their possession. Taupo Natives are not included in this return. The return is the result of an inspection made by Mr. Mair in the early part of February. He was a fortnight occupied on this duty, during which time he visited all the Arawas' pas and kaingas. Their arms were inspected, the names of all the men were taken, and notes were made of armed and unarmed men, and of men too aged to take part in actual warfare. It will be seen by the return, which is reliable, that 314 rifles are necessary to complete the armament of the tribe. The Arawas dislike the old smooth-bore muskets they have. They complain they are too heavy and not like the other arms we issue, and they ask for double-barrel guns if they can't have rifles. I have to report that the Arawas, as a tribe, are displeased at their arms, and certainly they are insufficiently equipped, nor are their weapons a match for Te Kooti's rifles. And, considering the tribe forms the bulwark of our strength in this part of the Island, I think it would be but wise to satisfy their reasonable wish, and to increase our own power by arming them efficiently. I have, &c, J. A. Wilson, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Acting Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure 1 in No. 15. Copy of a Letter from Major Maih to Mr. .T. A. AVilsox. (No. 9.) Sir, — Opotiki, Ist March, 18G9. I have the honor to forward copies and translations of letters from Hira Te Popo and Bakuraku relative to the movements of Te Kooti. The first letter was brought by a woman, who stated that, in addition to his own party, some of the Wnakatohea had accompanied Te Kooti. Eakuraku's letter is very unsatisfactory ; it is evident that he has as usual kept back part. That Te Kooti intends to attack Ohiwa is, I think, quite probable; his union with Tc Maikowha will make it easy enough. I have instructed the Arawa to remove all Baburaku's people from "Whakarae and Te Punawai to the Arawa pa. I have &c, W. G. Mair, .T. A. AVilson, Esq.. Tauranga. Resident Magistrate.

Sub-Enclosures. Tawhitinui, AVaioeka, 22nd February, 18G9. Go this my letter to Wepiiia. 0 son, salutations; great is my love towards you. 0 son, be cautious about your word that

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

15

you said, that you would make Waioeka sacred. You will come to trouble through that speech of yours, because it is not for you to control the sword of the Pakeha. Enough of that. 0 son, Te Kooti has gone to Maungapowhatu ; he went on the twentieth day. That is all. From your loving friend, Hiea. To AVepiha,— Whakarae, 2Gth February, 18G9. Friend, salutations : Listen to me. Friend, Ohiwa will bo broken (invaded) by Te Kooti, it cannot be prevented. Friend, this placo has become troubled at this time ;we have been trying to prevent it but cannot stop it. If you can discover any idea, however small, bad or good, send Te AVhanoke to bring it to me this very day. Friend, this is the day on which the start will be made. Friend, salutations : it ends. From your humble friend, Eakttraku.

Enclosure 2 in No. 15. Copy of a Letter from Major Mate to Mr. J. A. Wilso>*. (No. 10.) Sie,— Opotiki, 3rd March, 1869. I have the honor to inform you that I went to Ohiwa yesterday for the purpose of obtaining information, and, at the same time, ascertaining how far my instructions relative to the removal of Eakuraku's people, alluded to in my letter of the Ist instant, had been acted upon. Marsh and Hoani inform me that they wrote to Eakuraku at once upon receiving my letter, and he came with some of his people to their pa, where a korero was held; and it was decided that the women and children should all leave Whakarae, but the men, strengthened by a small party of Arawa, should remain to protect the crops for this reason, that when Eakuraku's people were removed by Mr. Clarke's orders last summer, their food was destroyed by the various expeditions which marched to and from the AVaimana, as well as by marauding parties of Hauhaus. Eakuraku then promised to meet me at Ohiwa on the 2nd, and yesterday I went to the Arawa pa accordingly, but nothing further had been heard from Eakuraku. Iliriui, Hemi, Koka, and others of the Upokorehe were there, and I urged them to unite with the Arawa in completing the fortification of their position, telling them that they might have the use of the absentee Arawas' guns so long as they remained ; they expressed themselves satisfied with this arrangement, which emanated in the first instance from Marsh and Hoani. Whether Eakuraku intended to carry out the plan to which he agreed or not remains to be proved. I think it very necessary that he should bo removed, but I cannot compel him unless I place the Arawa on pay, and use force. The s.s. " St. Kilda " anchored off hero this morning, bringing letters from Mr. Atkinson, E.M. of Turanga, Mr. Campbell, E.M., AVaiapu, and from Ngatiporou chiefs, warning me that Te Kooti intended to attack this place as soon as he can get enough men. The " St. Kilda " returns to Turanga to-night, calling at Torero for AVi Pere and others. In accordance with instructions received from the Hon. Dr. Pollen, the force on pay has been reduced to fifty men, and both block-houses abandoned. That at AVaioeka has, however, been occupied by AVepiha and a few of his people, and will be of service as a post of observation, if not of defence. I have, &c, J. A. Wilson, Esq., Tauranga. AV. Gr. Mair, Eesident Magistrate.

Enclosure 3 in No. 15. Copy of a Letter from Major Mair to Mr. J. A. Wilsox. Sin,— Opotiki, sth March, 18G9. I have the honor to inform you that on the night of the 3rd instant it was reported that Mr. Eobert Pitcairn, surveyor, had been lulled by the Hauhaus at Oliiwa. Trusting to the Arawa to furnish me with fuller news, and not liking to weaken the small force here by sending a party, I waited till this morning, and then sent Captain Mair with a party of fifty men, who were placed on pay for the purpose, to Ohiwa. Upon arriving at the Arawa pa, Captain Mair learned that Mr. Pitcairn had been murdered on the evening of the 2nd, at Te Uretara, by a detachment of Te Kooti's band led by Hemi Kakitu and Eangiaho, and that all Eakuraku's people with the Upokorehe, had been made prisoners by Te Kooti. AVepiha, who went to Whakatane yesterday, returned to-day, and gives the following particulars : — On the 2nd instant, Miria Te Mautaranui, wife of Apanui of Ohope, with another woman called AVeriwcri, went to AVhakarae; early in the evening the place was invested by Hauhaus, and all the people made prisoners without any show of resistance ; indeed, on the contrary, the affair bore the appearance of having been all arranged by Eakuraku, care being taken not to make fires or permit any demonstration that might attract the attention of the Arawa, their position being in full view though several miles distant. During the next day the Hauhaus and the people of the place fraternized, and in the evening a party of Chatham Islanders paraded like soldiers, and Te Kooti, carrying four revolvers, a sword, and a telescope, inspected them, and gave them their orders. Hemi Kakitu and Eangiaho joined them, and they started for the purpose of killing Mr. Pitcairn. At Te Punawai, they took a canoe and soon reached the island, where they found a Native woman, an old man, and a boy. Mr. Pitcairn was away shooting, and on his return, as his canoe neared the beach, the woman having been ordered to ■do so, stepped into the water and asked him for his gun. He declined to give it up, aud rising from his

A.—No. 10.

16

REPORTS PROM OPPICERS

seat stepped on shore, the woman still urging him to give her the gun, and at last taking hold of it. At this moment Hemi stepped forward and snatched the gun away, and Eangiaho sprang forward and struck Mr. Pitcairn on the left side of the head, driving the tomahawk into his brain. One or two more blows were given, and then the body was dragged into the hut, everything worth removing packed up, and the party returned to A\ rhakarae, taking the woman and the others with them. During the same night the TJpokoreho were surprised at Hokianga and made prisoners and taken before Te Kooti. The next day, the 3rd, Miria and her companions were taken before Te Kooti, who told them that he did not intend to interfere with "Whakatane, the centre of the waters of Ohiwa being the boundary ; but he would set his face eastward, and take each place in detail as far as the East Cape —and that they might return to their people, as he would not harm those who did not oppose him. They left at once, nnd reached Ohope in the evening. Miria estimates To Kooti's force at 200 strong, and thinks that he would retire for a short distance to place his prisoners in safety ; she states that she heard Te Kooti say that he had come by Eakuraku's invitation. Xo fires have been seen since yesterday, and whether the enemy are in the Waimana or whether they are advancing on this place or Whakatane bv a circuitous route, I cannot tell. Mr. Pitcairn's body has been brought to the Arawa pa, and will be brought here to-morrow for the purpose of inquest and proper burial. I have, &c, W. G. Maib, J. A. Wilson, Esq., Tauranga. Eesident Magistrate.

Enclosure 4 in No. 15. Copy of a Letter from Dr. jSTesbitt to Mr. J. A. Wilson. Sib,— Whakatane, sth March, 18G9. 1 have the honor to inform you that the report of the murder of Mr. Pitcairn is too true. I got the following statement from Mr. Simpkins, who had it from Miria, the wife of Apanui; she was in Bakuraku'a pa when Te Kooti took it, and heard all that passed:— On Monday, Ist, Mr. Pitcairn called on Mr. Simpkins for goods for his men; he had been working at Te Waimana, but had received a letter from Mr. Mair saying that Te Kooti had left the Opotiki district, and it was not known where he had gone to. Mr. Pitcairn took up his quarters on Monday on an island in the harbour of Ohiwa, and went out to shoot on Tuesday. Te Kooti's party had arrived at Eakuraku's pa on Sunday night, took it without opposition, and made prisoners of every one on it. He then asked if there were any Europeans about there, and Eakuraku's party answered there was one, a surveyor. Ho then told off a party of twenty men, ten of Eakuraku's (amongst whom were some of Mr. Pitcairn's own men), and ten of his own people. These men pulled to the island and laid in ambush till evening, previously having sent a man named Nathan to the house to reconnoitre. This Nathan was one of Mr. Pitcairn's own men, and had got goods on Monday for Mr. Pitcairn at Mr. Simpkins' store; he asked Mr. Pitcairn's housekeeper where he was ; she said he was out shooting. Mr. Pitcairn returned about dusk, and as he landed from the canoe the woman asked him for his gun, which ho refused to give up, and went towards his house. On his way to the house he was seized by a man named Hemi Kakitu, who took the gun from him and threw him down ; he was then struck on the left side of the head by Eangiaho. Mr. Simpkins thinks, from the nature of the wound, it must have been inflicted with a mere or some blunt instrument; he also has a very deep wound in the face, apparently inflicted with a very sharp instrument. Those were the only wounds, and he was dressed as he came out of the canoe; he was not mutilated. Mr. Simpkins went yesterday, at considerable risk, and induced the Arawas to bring over the body, and he had it buried near the pa. His arms, ammunition, gold watch, and goods that he had taken from Whakatane the day previous, were taken, also his instruments. Te Kooti is still at Eakuraku's pa, with 200 men; there are said to be 100 more further back in the bush. He said it was his intention to attack the Arawa pa last night: his party are quite visible from the pa of the latter. Te Kooti has completely recovered from his wounds, if he ever had any ; he has taken fifty stand of arms from Eakuraku's party, and a large quantity of ammunition. The woman says 1110 entire party were well armed. It is probable Major Mair has communication with the Arawas by this time. I purpose going to Ohiwa to-morrow, and shall report further to you. I send this to-morrow, in order that some arrangement may be made to send assistance to the Arawa at Ohiwa. I have, &c, W. K. Nesbht. The Civil Commissioner, Tauranga.

Enclosure 5 in No. 15. Copy of a Letter from Dr. Nesbitt to Mr. J. A. Wilsox. Sib,— Maketu, Bth March, 1869. I have the honor to inform you that I went to Ohiwa on Saturday, and saw the woman Miria on my way ; she confirmed in all substantial particulars the report I sent you from Whakatane of Mr. Pitcairn's murder. The body was removed on Saturday evening to Opotiki. There were then sixty men in the pa at Ohiwa, and they considered themselves quite able to protect themselves from an attack by Te Kooti, but not strong enough to attack him ; he was supposed still to occupy Eakuraku's pa, although I could not see any indications of a large body of men in the pa, which is visible from and within five miles of the pa of the Arawa. They think Te Kooti has about 300 men with him, including Eakuraku's party.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

17

As long as Te Kooti occupies his present position, Whakatane and the road thence to Ohiwa will he very unsafe, as he can send a party at any time to any portion of it. The two or three Europeans living at Whakatane are in imminent danger, the Natives having all left the place. The Arawa at Ohiwa are anxious that reinforcements should be sent to them, and that they should be permitted to attack Te Kooti in his present position. He has expressed his intention of remaining there as long as the food lasts ; of attacking the Arawa pa, then Opotiki, and, having finished them, of sweeping the Ngatiporou —men, women and children —from the face of the earth. The Pakeha, the Arawa, and Ngatiporou, have been specially devoted to destruction by his god. 1 have, <fcc, Tlie Civil Commissioner, Tauranga. W. K. Nesbitt.

ABSTRACT RETURN of MEN of the ARAWA TRIBE with and without GOVERNMENT GUNS.

No. 16. Copy of a Letter from Captain St. Geoege to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. (No. 27.) Sir,— Taupo, ICth February, 1869. I have the honor to send the following report: —Eewi has returned to "Waikato after staying at Pukawa some time, his mission being to ask the friendlies not to interfere with any Hauhau passing through Taupo. He states that the King is for peace ;on his way down Waikato he wrote a letter to Poihipi and Hohepa, requesting them and the friendlies on the northern and eastern shores not to molest any of Te Kooti's men or other Llauhau, but to keep quiet, and there would be no disturbance; also informing Hohepa that the firing on him (Hohepa) was only a " inahi tamariki" and not to be taken as coming from the Hauhau and King's Natives. After the receipt of this letter a small meeting was held at Te Honeti, when it was decided not to agree to Rewi's request with regard to Hauhaus passing through the district. The Queenites have therefore drawn a kati from Rotoaira to Horohoro passing on the western shores of the lake, and crossing the Waikato above Waimahana. Of course, if this line is kept, no llauhau can pass between Urewera and Waikato. The Hauhaus a few miles down the Waikato have also established a kati at Te Niho o te Kiore. They say that there will be a general rising in March, and that this is the King's word. Ido not, however, put much faith in this, as the Hauhaus always bring the King's name in whenever thev can. The few rebel Ngatiporou that were at the upper end of the lake have left; I believe returned to Waikato. They did not get any one to join them. Wirihana Te Kockoe, with some of his people, are still at Frewera. Te Kooti is reported to bo at the Opotiki side of the Maungapowhatu. The Natives are anxiously looking forward to the Land Court; some few have written to have it put off, but it is not the general wish. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. J. C. St. Geoege.

No. 17. Copy of a Letter from Mr. 11. T. Clarke to Mr. Coopee. (D. 222.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir,— Tauranga, 30th March, 1869. In continuation of my last report, of date and number quoted in the margin, I have the honor to acquaint you that further information has been received of Te Kooti's present position and probable movements. It appears that three young men who had been detained by To Kooti succeeded in eluding his surveillance, and escaped to Motumako, where they found Captain St. George, with a force of Arawas. Paui, one of the young men, made his statement to Captain St. George, which is shortly given in a report from that gentleman, a copy of which is herewith enclosed. Tamati, another of the young men who escaped, arrived at Te Awa-o-te-Atua on the night of the 2Gth instant. Mr. Gilbert Mair took his statement down in writing, which I also enclose. In the main, the two statements agree with regard to Te Kooti's present position and his probable future movements. It is clear that he is short of atnmuition, and it is very likely he will make sudden attacks in small detached parties. His having so many mounted men will enable him to do this with rapidity. As I stated in my last report, he has a choice of movements: he can fall upon the coast settlements; 5

Rifles. Smooth-bore. Number of Men With Guns. Number of Men without Guns. Total number of Men. Men with guns (inspected) Men without guns (inspected) Men wilh guns (estimated) Men without guns (estimated) 136 260 396 25 25 53 261 735 This return does not include the Constabulary. .rawa (abo ;t 70) who joined Ca] itain Ghmdry's Armed

A.—No. 10.

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

18

if in force he can attack Taupo with advantage; or he can act offensively on the rear of the Arawa settlements in the Lake District. Having been informed that it was the intention of the Arawas stationed at Ohiwa to abandon that post, and being impressed with the necessity of holding it if possible, in order to support as well as keep open our communication by land with Opotiki, I visited them on the 28th instant, in the steamer " Clyde." In my conference with them they represented to me, that with a force of forty men (the minimum according to their engagement with the Government), in these disturbed times, it was impossible for them to undertake to hold Ohiwa, especially as Kakuraku, with the Upokorehe, had gone over to the enemy. I asked how it happened that the whole force of seventy men was not there. They replied that many of the force at first raised had left the place in disgust. That in their position they were isolated from trade, and that it was unreasonable to expect that men, women, and children could live for two years without clothes. That it was this state of things that had caused many to leave; and the present disturbed state of the country, superadded to their other difficulties, had made it a matter of necessity for them to abandon the place. From my own personal knowledge, I can state that the complaint made by these people is well founded; and after consultation with Major Mair, who was present at the latter part of the conference, I decided and promised to keep them on full pay for two weeks, on condition that they thoroughly destroyed or brought away all Kakuraku's kaingas and stores of food, which latter, I understand, are great—and that after that they would receive 2s. per diem, subject to the approval of the Government. On these terms they engaged to stop, to raise their force to seventy men, and to put the place in a thorough state of defence. Acting on the belief that in the occupation of Ohiwa in a great measure depends the safety of Opotiki, I desire the concurrence of the Government in this matter. I left Ohiwa last evening (20th), arriving here at 8 o'clock a.m. On the eve of my leaving for Ohiwa a messenger was sent to me from Maungatapu (in Tauranga), to inform me that Maihi Pohepohe, Hakaraia's nephew, had again made his appearance. The Maungatapu Natives, wishing to act rightly, desired my advice. I told them to " return and request Maihi to leave ; that with our knowledge of his proceedings, the active part he had taken in connection with his uncle Hakaraia in creating disturbances, not only in this, but in other districts, I could not but viewr with suspicion and distrust his present assurances of peace and good will. That when the country was comparatively quiet, he declined to come in ; and that after his communication with Ngaiterangi, wherein he said ' that with separation from the pakeha alone was life,' I could not look upon him as a friend; I therefore desired that he should go away in peace." On Sunday, the 2Sth instant, the Venerable Archdeacon Brown visited Maungatapu, in his capacity as missionary ; and it was reported to me that he had an interview with Maihi. I called upon the Archdeacon this morning, with the view of obtaining a correct account of what passed between them. The Archdeacon obligingly furnished me with the following account: —That on Sunday ho went to hold service with the Maungatapu Natives. That hearing that Maihi was in the settlement he entered several of the Native whores in search of him, and that he was told, in every instance, that Maihi had gone away that morning. The Native deacon, however, who accompanied the Archdeacon, found means of discovering his whereabouts, and induced him to meet him. Maihi gave the Archdeacon to believe that I had written him a letter which was " a slap in the face ;" that the letter to the Ngaiterangi attributed to him, in which the sentence I had quoted was contained, was a forgery, and that it had been written by Hohepa Hikutaia. That as to information we could get plenty, if the " friendly Natives " would only divulge it. And, as a proof of his good intention, he stated that Waikato was to be attacked on Friday (26th), by Ihaka and Te Tapihana (there was another chief named, which the Archdeacon could not recollect). Alexandra was the point to be attacked. The Natives at Taupo had risen. That Tauranga would not be attacked for the present; that that would depend upon the contingency of Hakaraia and Te Kooti " making peace " (really, I imagine, coming to terms). This is the substance of what passed. To show what dependence can be placed on this man's statements, I would remark that I havo never written him a letter. That lam quite satisfied that the letter to the Ngaiterangi is no forgery, but is in Maihi's handwriting, having carefully compared it with other letters of his —records of this office. It is rather remarkable that he should havo volunteered the statement of the attack upon Waikato. It does seem that the Hauhaus are doing all they can to puzzle and mystify us in every possible way. Finding that the steamer "Clyde" is no longer needed, it is my intention to send her back to Auckland immediately. I have, &c, 11. T. Clarke, To the Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner. P.S.—I also enclose my reply to Captain St. George's communication of 26th instant.

Enclosure 1 in No. 17. Copy of a Letter from Captain St. George to Mr. H. T. Clarke. Srn, — Kaiteriria (Kotokakahi), 26th March, 1869. I have the honor to send you the following report. I arrived at Motumako on the 24th instant, and found that I had been wrongly informed by Keepa and Rewi as to Te Kooti being there. I stayed there on the 25th, as I thought it probable that you would send a letter on. On the evening of the 25th, three men—Paui, of Ngatimanawa, Tamati Ngatiporou, and Penetito Ngatiawa —arrived at Motumako from Ahikereru ; they represent that they were taken prisoners at different times by Te Kooti, and escaped yesterday while on a cattle-hunting expedition. They brought the following news : — Te Kooti is at Ahikereru with only 100 men; the other 200 have returned with the women and children to Ruatahuna. Kooti is very short of ammunition, having only two or three caps a man.

A.—No. 10.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

19

Poihipi Tukairangi wrote a letter to Te Kooti, which was sent by Ihaia Te Waru, saying that the reason he did not join him was that he was waiting to get as much ammunition as he could from Government. Arapeta Hapi (a relative of Paora Hapi) also either wrote or sent to Te Kooti to the same effect. Te Kooti is in constaut communication with Taupo; he communicates through Ihaia and Maniapoto, a Native of Eunanga. Te Who started yesterday, 25th, with a letter from Te Kooti to the King party. Te Kooti says that his resting-place will be Taupo ;he also says that Taupo will join him witli the exception of Hohopa, P. Hapi, Ecweti, and their people. This is the sum of what Paui and the others told me; you will be able to form an opinion as to the truth of it, a good deal agrees with what I have heard from different sources. I think it doubtful that Poihipi has written this letter to Te Kooti. If he has, I fancy it is only to delude him, and probably it is in answer to some threat of Kooti's. If Poihipi did write the letter, it must have been before the Land Court broke up. However Peraniko (who was taken prisoner by Kooti) thinks differently, and says that Poihipi will join ; before the arrival of Paui, he (Peraniko) tried to impress upon me that Poihipi was a Hauhau at heart. With regard to Upper Taupo Natives, I think that it is quite possible that they may join for reasons which I mentioned before. Te Whe, that Paui mentions, is a brother of Ihaia, and one of the ex-herehere. I expect that the letter mentioned as having been sent to the King, will be taken on by Ihaia, or one of his brothers. This man Ihaia ought to bo stopped. I can easily do it; but what is to be done with him when he is stopped ? Of course if I find letters on him it will be very simple, but he may have given them to some one else, and it is not likely that he would put himself in my way with them on him, although I do not believe that he suspects anything at preseut. On the receipt of Paui's news, I proposed to Te Keepa and Bewi to make a night march, and arrive at Ahikereru by daylight; but although they said they would go, still they wished to halt on the road, which of course would have run us into daylight, and any advantage we might have gained by coming on them unawares would have been lost, as if the enemy was not strong enough to stand, he could get away without our having a shot at him. Of course under these circumstances it was no use our staying at Motumako, although Keepa and Eewi wanted to remain, and send for more men ; before they could have arrived, Kooti might have been at lluatahuna, Waikato, or anywhere else. Kooti sending the greater part of his force with the women and children, does not look like going to Waikato at once ; but of course one cannot believe all that Paui says. This morning I started back ; most of the men will not get further than Eerewhakaaitu ; I rode on ahead of them. I enclose a list of the men that went with me ; I told them I believed that 4s. per day was the pay during the time they were away. Of Ngatiwhakaue you will see that very few over the number that you put on pay went. On the extra list are the names of men that I found at Motumako on my arrival. These of course I had nothing to do with. The Taupos send me a letter that they could not come. I enclose letter. You will see that they make a request for guns. I think that any guns given to them ought to be under the distinct understanding that they are under my orders, and all ammunition ought to be brought to me, and I will store it, and serve it out when I think right. This is of course in the event of your giving arms and ammunition. I have not received any letter from you since I wrote on the 23rd; I shall stay here this evening and return to Taupo to-morrow if I receive no letter before. Maunsell, who brings this, I kept on pay to carry any despatches from here to Motumako, in case one arrived. I shall be glad to keep him on at Taupo, together with one or two Natives. If you think this necessary, will you inform me what pay I am authorized to offer ? I have, &c, Jno. C. St. George. Tamati and Penetito have gone to Matata from Motumako.

Enclosure 2 in No. 17. Memorandum for Mr. Civil Commissioner Clakke, Tauranga. Te Awa-o-te-Atua, Friday night, II o'clock, March 26th, 18G9. Tamati Ngatipoeotj has just come in from Motumako. He makes the following statements : —■ I was taken prisoner at Tauaroa in February last by a party of Ngatiporou from M.ataora and Whangamata, under Te Kewene and Te Munu. They were on their way to join Te Kooti, and I "was forced to go on with them. I remained with Te Kooti and his people all the time till the attack was made upon the Ngatipukeko. I was made to fight with the others. Only one of the ex-prisoners was killed. The loss was principally on the part of the Urewera, and Ngatihaka natives from Te AVhaiti and Tauaroa. There were twelve killed in front of the pa by Hohaia's house when the first rush was made to get into the pa. Te Wirihana of Taupo was killed by the Frenchman at the mill. There was part of a case of breech-loader ammunition, one cask of smooth-bore musket, and some loose powder, found buried under the floor of the Frenchman's house; had it not been for this supply, Te Kooti could not have kept up the attack upon the Ngatipukeko pa for more than a day. He expected to get a great deal of powder from them, after he made truce with them, in which case he would have gone right on to Te Awa-o-te-Atua. After leaving Whakatane, we went by the Baungaehe road through the ranges, and then struck the Eangitaiki Eiver at a place called Otipa. Here Te Kooti sent a party down to Paharakeke and brought away the natives from that place (about forty in number). We then went on towards the Whaiti. When we got to Horomanga, Mohi sent for us to go on to Tauaroa, where we remained till the pa was attacked in the night by the Arawas. Te Tohea was killed by Te Kooti's orders, by

A.—No. 10.

20

REPORTS EROM OEEICERS

Ngatihineuru, because he was an Arawa. After we all reached Ahikcreru, Te Kooti gave orders that all the powder in possession of the natives there was to be made up into cartridges and given to him, as he was about to start in pursuit of the Arawas. All the ammunition that could be collected only enabled him to give his men two or three rounds per man. He told his people to look to the clouds and they would see signs in the Heavens. If they saw a rainbow and heard thunder, he would march at once on Rangitaiki. That he held Kokohinau in his hand, as well as Opotiki, Whakatane, and Te Awa-o-te-Atua. He said that the Kokohinau Natives could be forced to join him without fighting ; and after he had got all their guns and ammunition, he would attack all the places in detail along the coast as far as Tauranga, and he intended to force his way through to Waikato. He said also that he must have powder at once, and would endeavour to obtain it by sending out small marauding parties to attack the small friendly settlements at Taupo, and also the Wairoa at Hawke's Bay. I think a large party will start for this latter purpose, but Te Kooti will not go with them himself, he will remain at Ahikereru, which he will make his head-quarters, and will make attacks in different directions from that place. He says he cannot make any attacks on a large scale until lie has accumulated more powder.* On Thursday morning the young Ngatimanawa chief Paui came to me and proposed that Penetito and myself should accompany him in making our escape from Ahikereru ; we agreed, so Paui went to Te Kooti and obtained his permission to go out and kill some cattle for his soldiers. Te Kooti agreed, and about thirty of us started. After some time we induced our companions to allow us to get up on a hill for the purpose (we said) of keeping a look-out on the roads from the Arawa country, in case they should want to pursue Te Kooti. As soon as we saw the coast was clear, we ran for it, and by night reached Motumako, where we found a party of the Arawa from Rotorua under Captain St. George. We wanted to lead them to attack Te Kooti at once, but they would not consent to go on unless they received more pay. Penetito and myself came on this morning. He went to Kokohinau to inform Tukehu that it was likely Te Kooti would attack him in a few days, and I came round by Parawai to warn the Taweras. I think Te Kooti has about 300 men with him, but some of them are prisoners from different places, and he cannot depend upon them yet. He has about 200 good fighting men. Most of them are armed with Enfield rifles, and a good number with breech-loaders. He is better off for smooth-bore ammunition than for rifle. He may have as much of the latter as five rounds per man, but he certainly has not more than three caps per man ; this is his greatest want. I am sure if he was attacked and forced to fight, his people would fire all their ammunition away in a few minutes. But he doesn't ■want to fight at present, and if attacked, ho w-ould endeavour to escape into the bush, and fall back into the TJrew Tera country. Most of the Ruatahuna people, under Te Wheuuanui oppose Te Kooti, and I think they will not give him any assistance if he goes through their country. Ahikereru is a vry good place to attack Te Kooti in. He is living in the Harema pa, which can easily be surrounded. Te Kooti is very suspicious, and always keeps a guard of eight or ten men with him, except when he gets drunk; then he quite forgets himself, and rolls about all over the place. A large quantity of the spirits taken at Whakatane is kept for his special use. I think perhaps the fact of our having escaped and made some of his plans known, may induce him to change his mind about attacking Kokohinau for the present. However, he can move about very rapidly, as most of his men arc mounted. Paui, Penetito, and myself each brought away a good rifle which To Kooti had lent us. As we were escaping from Ahikereru we overtook Te Whe going to Taupo with letters from Te Kooti to the Natives there, asking them to send him ammunition. This is all I know. This statement was made to me by Tamati Ngatiporou at Te Awa-o-te-Atua, on Friday night, immediately upon his arriving there. Gilbert Mair.

Enclosure 3 in No. 17. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Clarke to Captain St. George. (G. 287.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sie— Tauranga, 27th March, T869. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your report of 26th March, 18C9. The information given by Paui is in some points correct, and corroborates what Peraniko had previously stated to Major Mair. The defection of Poihipi Tukairangi I cannot credit. It is very probable that Ihaia Te Waru may have made use of his name, but you will be able yourself to judge when you get to Taupo. Ihaia ought to be narrowly watched, and, if practicable, the letters of which he is said to be the bearer ought to be taken from him. Much certain information might in this way be gathered as to Te Kooti's intentions, as well as the complicity or otherwise of the " King party" at Waikato with his present movements. The Hon. Dr. Pollen was here yesterday, and it is his wish that we should remain on the defensive until further orders unless a very favourable opportunity occurs of striking a telling blow. Dr. Pollen states that from information received from Waikato, it is probable Hakaraia and Kereopa may try to join Te Kooti. Kemp and Rewi's party ought to be disbanded at once. I have spoken to Colonel Harington respecting Maunsel!, and he thinks he had better appear on his books as a trooper unattached, and draw his pay here with the other men. You are authorized to employ one of the most active of the Taupo kareres to act as special messenger: extra pay will be given him. I herewith enclose a letter to Ihakara Te Kaliuao. I hesitate to supply the arms to the Taupo Natives at present. I quite agree with you that auy arms or ammunition which may be sent ought to be under your own control. I have, &c., H. T. Clarke, Captain St. George, Taupo. Civil Commissioner. *A large party had started, or were about to start, for Te Wairoa, for the purpose of making an attempt to obtain powder, &c. The women and children were to leave Ahikcreru and go to Ruatalmna, to be out of the way. —G\ Blaie.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS

21

A.—No. 10.

Xo. 18. . Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Claeke to Mr. Coopee. (D. 223.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sie, — Tauranga, 30th March, 1869. 8 p.m. I have the honor to report that information has just been received from the Lake District, to the effect that Te Kooti has attacked Kaiteriria, an Arawa settlement on the borders of the Rotokakahi Lake, about six miles from Eotorua. I herewith enclose a letter from the Native Assessor, Te "Waata, announcing the fact; also a copy of a private letter from Dr. Nesbitt. I shall detain the " Clyde," at present under orders for Auckland, until to-morrow morning, with the hope of getting more certain information. I have, &c, Henet T. Claeke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure in Xo. 18. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. K. Nesbitt to Mr. H. T. Claeke. My deae Claeke, — Maketu, 30th March, 1869. The enclosed came in from Wata this morning. I can hardly believe that Te Kooti is there in force, but he may have sent a party to look for ammunition. Henare Pukuatua has started for the purpose of ascertaining the truth. All the men here with arms are about starting for Rotorua. In the meanwhile, would it not be advisable to send the steamer with what arms you have, in case they might be required ? Should I have left for llotorua, I shall leave some one to take charge of them. Fox desires me to say he would be glad to see you; he wiil remain here to-day on the chance of your coming. Ido not know what he wants ; I have requested him to send on all his men. Tours, &c, H. T. Clarke, Esq. W. K. Nesbitt.

Sub-Enclosure to Enclosure in Xo. 18. Ki A te Nihipeta,— Te Taheke, Maehe 29 o nga ra 1869. E hoa kua huki aTe Kooti ki nga wahi ote Arawa ki Kaiteriria; kua puhi taua ope me te tangata whenua, kua riri. No te 28 o nga ra ka timata te pupuhi. He ki atu tena ki a koe kia tere to tuku ki Tauranga ki a Henare Karaka. Ko te tangata i tae mai ki te ltotoiti ko te Hira Taiwhanga. Kia tere te haere kai heino. No te 12 o nga haora otepo ka tae mai te mera o Kaiteriria ki te Taheke nei. Heoi ano. Na Te Wata Taeaxui.

[translation.] To Dr. Nesbitt, — Te Taheke, 29th March, 1869. Friend. Te Kooti has appeared within the boundaries of the Arawa ; fighting has commenced between him arid the people at Kaiteriria. The firing began on the 28th (?) This is a word of mine to you. Make haste to send this letter on to Mr. Clai-ke, lest he (Te Kooti) escapes. This news was brought from Kaiteriria by Te Hira Taiwhanga; he arrived here at 12 o'clock in the night. This is all. From Te Wata Taeanui.

No. 19. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Clabke to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sib,— Tauranga, 11th April, 1869. In continuation of my communication of date and number quoted in the margin, I have the honor to report that the information conveyed in my letter of the 30th March, D. 223, proved a false alarm. The information given by the three young men who made their escape from Ahikereru, as to the D. movements and intentions of Te Kooti, have been confirmed. On the 26th ult. two Natives —Taimona, a,n Urcwera, and Kawhena, a Ngaiterangi, for a long time resident with the Warahoe hapu on the Kangitaiki, both nearly related to some of Tukehu's people —were discovered by some of Tukehu's scouts on the eastern bank of the llangitaiki. They expressed a desire to be allowed to cross the river and visit Tukehu and Tiopira, as they had important information to communicate. They were allowed to cross the river. They stated that Te Kooti was not aware that they had come away, but that their love for the Kokohinau people was so great that they could not rest satisfied until they had been made aware of the intention of Te Kooti to attack them shortly. They stated that Te Kooti had been strongly reinforced by ex-prisoners from the Chatham Islands and a large body of Urewera (WaikareMoana) and Turanga Natives, on the same day that Pani and his companions made their escape ; that Te Kooti had twice met all the Urewera, and that on both occasions he had told them that it was his intention to attack Kokohinau, but that he hoped to gain the Kokohinau people without resistance ; that if they resisted he would destroy them ; that the Arawa settlements were all in his hands ; that he would, after establishing himself on the Kangitaiki, attack Te Awa-o-te-Atua, and all other Arawa settlements in detail, and last of all Tauranga; that the Euatahuna Ureweras had supplied a considerable quantity of ammunition, and had promised assistance. The two men —Taimona and Kawhena —expressed their intention of returning immediately to Tc Kooti, but some of the Arawa who were assisting Tukehu did not think it right that they should. They were detained and handed over to the Native police, who conveyed them to Tauranga. Colonel Harington and myself have carefully examined these men separately, and the above is the substance of what they stated. I have since ascertained that they made precisely the same statement to Tukehu and people. I have handed them over to the keeping of the military for the 6

222, Mar. 30.

A.—No. 10.

present, as Tiopira and Tukehu have urgently requested that they be not allowed to return to Kokohinau, aa they would make their escape on the first convenient opportunity. On Sunday, the 4th instant, I received an urgent letter from the Arawa, requesting that men should be sent to Te Awa-o-te-Atua at once, to await Te Kooti's threatened attack. After due consideration I felt it to be my duty to go to Te Awa-o-te-Atua myself, and from personal observation to decide what was best to be done. This was the only course I could adopt, as no dependence could be placed on the exaggerated rumours continually coming in —fcr the most part dictated, I have no doubt, by the intense alarm felt by the Natives residing at the Arawa out-settlements. On Monday, the sth, I left for Matata and Kokohinau, accompanied by Colonel Harington, who kindly offered to render me all the assistance in his power. We arrived at Matata on the 6th. but I was unable from indisposition to proceed any further. Colonel Harington went on to Kokohinau the same day to inspect the position, and to encourage in every way the .Natives who were determined to make a stand. I ascertained that the information respecting To Kooti's actual movements was very imperfect from the fact that the Natives would not go any distance from their pas. After consulting with the chiefs Arama Karaka and Wiremu Kepa I resolved upou sending out a scouting party of four picked men of well-known courage and endurance, under Mr. Gilbert Mair, to ascertain whether Tauaroa was again occupied by the enemy. On the evening of the 6th, Mr. G-. Mair, with his men, left Te Awa-o-te-Atua, their only provision two pounds of biscuit each per man, without blankets or any other encumbrance to quick marching. I remained at Te Awa-o-te-Atua till the party returned. On the evening of the 10th Mr. Gilbert Mair returned to Te Matata, leaving his companions at Kokohinau completely tired out. Mr. Mair reported that after leaving the Matata they crossed the Tarawera Biver at a point to the westward of Mount Edgecumbe, proceeding along the broken country towards the foot of the Tarawera Mountain, from thence along the forest ranges at the back of Mount Edgecumbe towards the Eangitaiki Eiver, striking the "Waioue at 1 o'clock p.m. on the Bth. At "VVaioue they came on the tracks of a single man, who had been posted on a high hill, which commanded an extensive view of the Lower Eangitaiki. They followed these tracks through a wood, on the further side of which a horse had been tied. The horse tracks were followed up for some distance, when they came upon a place where several horses had been stationed, all of which had gone off at a gallop. Mr. Mair and party proceeded towards Te Taupaki, breaking their way through scrub and fern, so as to avoid discovery; they arrived at Te Taupaki at about sundown; the traces of a large body of horse were plainly visible. Mr. Mair states that they retired to a distance from the road to take a brief rest —food they had not partaken of since the morning—when he decided that it would in their then state be impossible for them to proceed further. They returned on their homeward track at 1 o'clock a.m. on the 9th, and by a forced march reached Kokohinau at 11 o'clock a.m. on the same day, in a state of great exhaustion. Mr. Gilbert Mair is deserving of great praise for his courage and perseverance in carrying out this enterprise, especially when it is remembered that the whole distance to Te Taupaki, about sixtyfive miles, was traversed through forest and high fern over a very broken country, without any sort of track to guide them. From the nature of the service, they could not light a fire to cook food or obtain warmth during the frosty nights they were out. From the observations made, there is little doubt that Te Kooti is again either at Tauaroa or Motumako, where large supplies of potatoes are obtainable from the deserted settlements of the unfortunate Ngatimanawa hapu, who have a second time been driven from their patrimony. Colonel Harington, on his return from Kokohinau, represented to me in an official form that the twenty Europeans stationed by Major Mair at Kokohinau, to assist the loyal chief Tukehu to defend himself against Te Kooti's threatened attack, were in a critical position, and ought either to be reinforced or withdrawn altogether. I, after carefully considering the matter, thought it right to support Tukehu as far as we were able, and have therefore requested Te Pohika to reinforce that post with forty of his men. I herewith enclose copies of correspondence on the subject. I also transmit report from Captain St. George. In a private letter written on the 2nd instant, the rumour that a large body of Ngatikahununu were coming up to take part against Te Kooti was contradicted. I have furnished a copy of the postscript to his private note, as the information conveyed may be of use. I returned to Tauranga yesterdav. Certain overtures of peace have been made by the Ngatiraukawa to the branch of the Arawa residing at Ohinemutu ; but as I, from other sources, am led to believe that some treachery may be meditated, I have suggested to the Ohinemutu chiefs to accept the proposal for peace, but to defer the meeting till the Arawa are a little more at liberty. I have every reason to believe that the Ngatiraukawa and Hakaraia's followers are in full communication with Te Kooti, and that in twentyfour hours a junction of their forces could be accomplished. The Ngaiterangi are still urgent in their request to be furnished with arms. I have steadily opposed it, as, however peaceable they may appear at present, I do not lose sight of the fact that they have been heavy sufferers at our hands, and if they follow out the known instinct of their race, they will not lose a favourable opportunity of requiring '' utu " at our hands, The communications of Maihi Pohepohe to his people, reported iu my last, hare been confirmed, and the authorship of the letter to the Ngaiterangi has been well established by his own friends and relatives. In conclusion, I would beg to remind the Government that up to the present time I hold no instructions how far I may ac-t in the event of an emergency arising. It is very possible that I mav have to incur heavy responsibility ; for in the event of Te Kooti placing himself in a position favourable for an attack, I may raise every available Arawa to assist, without being able to obtain the previous approval of His Excellency's Government. I would therefore beg respectfully to request that I may, as early as convenient, be instructed on this point. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Department, H. T. Claeke, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

22

REPORTS PROM OPPICEES

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS

23

A.—No. 10.

a. 284, Mar. 25, 18G9. a. 267, Mar. 27, 1869.

Enclosure 1 in No. 19. Copy of a Letter from Lieut-Colonel Haringtojt to Mr. H. T. Clakke. Sir,— Matata, Bay of Plenty, 7th April, 1869. Having heard that Major Mair had sent twenty Europeans, under command of Lieutenant White, from Opotiki, to assist in garrisoning the pa at the extreme outpost on the Eangitaiki Eiver (Kokohinau), I have the honor to inform you that I went there yesterday for the purpose of inspecting the position, the arms, ammunition, &c, which were in the possession of "the friendlv chief of that place (Tukehu). I found that in addition to the above-mentioned European garrison there were thirty Natives armed with eight rifles and eighteen flint-lock muskets, besides twenty old guns, for which they had neither ammunition nor caps. The pa itself is very large, and would require 100 or 150 men to hold it against anything like a strong force. I need scarcely remind you that Te Kooti has already captured the people of the neighbouring settlement, Paharakeke, situate two miles distant from Kokohinau, and has also expressed his determination to attack the latter place. I therefore deem it my duty to tell you that I consider the position of the twenty Europeans to be critical, and recommend either that Kokohinau be reinforced or the European garrison be withdrawn. I am inclined to recommend this measure because I have carefully reconnoitred the position, and see nothing to prevent Te Kooti from surrounding the pa so as cut off all communication, in which case its small garrison would be sacrificed without our being able to render them any timely assistance. As Lieutenant White's detachment have no more ammunition than what is in their pouches, I have sent orders to Captain Tunks, at Tauranga, to forward two boxes at once on a pack-horse. I have, &c, Piiilip Harikgtox, Lieut.-Colonel, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner. Commanding Tauranga District.

Enclosure 2 in No. 19. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Clarke to Lieut.-Colonel Harington. (G. 291.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sie,— Tauranga, 7th April, 18G9 (Matata). In reply to your letter of this day's date, in which amongst other things you inform me that you consider the position of the twenty Europeans at present stationed at Kokohinau to be critical, and recommend either that the outpost should be reinforced or that the European garrison be withdrawn, I have the honor to inform you that I deem it a matter of importance, and of good policy, that every help should be given to those friendly Natives who have rendered us valuable assistance in our time of need; and I further consider that to abandon Kokohinau would be a fatal mistake. I have therefore requested Te Pokiha, with forty of his men, to proceed to Kokohinau immediately. I have, &c, Lieut.-Colonel Harington, Commanding, H. T. Clarke, Tauranga. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure 3 in No. 19. Copy of a Letter from Captain St. George to Mr. H. T. Clarke. (No. 45.) Tapuaeharuru, Taupo, Sib,— March 31st, ISG9. I have the honor to acknowledge your letters of date and number as per margin. They arrived this morning. Yesterday I arrived here, and found that Poihipi and Hohepa were away at Te Hatepe —Mr. Hamlin (interpreter to General Government Agent, Hawke's Bay) having written for them to come. Yesterday evening they returned and gave me the following news : about 200 of the Ngatikahungunu are or will be at Bunanga to-day; they have come up to assist in blocking in Te Kooti. There are a few troopers stationed at Eunanga, to apprehend any of Te Kooti's letter-carriers. Two have been apprehended already with letters for the Upper Taupo Natives. From what is in these letters. Te Kooti seems decided to make Taupo his head-quarters. One lettercarrier got through here to "Waikato within the last few days. Ihaia was the man who brought the letter; he has returned to Te Kooti. I shall certainly take him next time I have a chance, as he is doing a great deal of harm, and trying to make some of the Taupo Natives join Te Kooti; however, I do not think that there is the slightest chance to be apprehended of their doing so. The Ngatitahu are very much dispirited at not getting guns and ammunition. I have told them that it serves them right, allowing such a man as Ihaia to be in constant communication with Te Kooti ; any one of them will take him now, as they are greatly enraged against him. I send Beweti Te Kume to-day to Orakeikorako to tell the Ngatitahu to muster in one place, and show that they intend to be loyal; this, I have no doubt they will do, and I think that they might be armed. There are about forty good able-bodied men, certainly some of the best of Taupo. Ido not believe what Pani said about Poihipi. I expect, as you say. Ihaia has been using his name, but one cannot be too cautious in these times. Te Heuheu with his men (about forty) is at Te Hatepe. Paora Hapi is also there. My people here are in great spirits, and, as you will see, have written you a letter asking you to send men at once. They have also written to the Arawa to come. In their letters to you there are exaggerations. No Europeans have arrived at Eunanga yet, although lam informed that a force is being raised in Napier for that purpose. I expect that before you receive this you will have heard from Auckland or Napier of this expedition. You tell me in your letter of the 27th instant to strike To Kepa and Eewi and their people off pay. They understood distinctly that they were only on pay so long as the expedition lasted, which was five days.

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

A.—No. 10.

24

In your letter of the 25th, you say that I ought not to have started when I heard of Major Mair's return. My subsequent letter will have explained that I did not hear of it in time. I have, Ac, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, John C. St. Geoege. Tauranga.

Enclosure 4 in Ko. 19. Extract of Private Letter to Mr. Clarke. Tapuaeharuru, 2nd April, 1869. ******* News has just come in that the meeting at Moerangi is ended. Taupo Hauhaus not to rise if Te Kooti is not molested in passing through Taupo. The King's Natives will not rise if no action is taken against Ngatimaniapoto for the murders at White Cliffs. This is the sum of what I have just heard, and is a report that came through Te Heuheu. It must be taken for what it is worth. I shall probably hear more in a few days. J. C. St. Geoege.

POVERTY BAT AND HAWKE'S BAT. No. 20. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. D. Oemond to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sie,— Napier, 7th October, 1868. As Mr. McLean may possibly have left Wellington for this place before the arrival of the " Ahuriri," I beg to enclose, for your information, duplicates of certain letters I am forwarding to him by this opportunity. I regret that I have been unable to obtain the letter I referred to the other day in a telegram, and which I advised you the Rev. S. Williams had seen; I mean the letter or proclamation from Matutaera which named October as the proposed time for a movement, and referred to the Thames Gold Fields as one of the objects of that movement. The enclosed letter or paper from Matutaera is a different document, and I don't myself understand its meaning. The letter from Mr. Deighton is a copy of a private note written to Mr. Rhodes, the Deputy Superintendent here, but I think it right to send it to you. There is no other information of very great importance to send you from here; and until we hear the result of the meeting now taking place at the Ahikereru, there will probably be nothing important to communicate. I have, &c, J. D. Oemond.

Enclosure 1 in No. 20. Copy of a Letter from Mr. S. Deightojt to Mr. J. Rhodes. Mt deae Sie,— 2nd October, 18G8. I am sorry to say things are looking very gloomy up here now, I really do not know who to trust. The proclamation has not yet reached here, but, if it is true, we shall have all the late Hauhaus up against us again. "VVorgan tells me he has written to you about Raharuhi coming over from Taupo and joining Te Kooti. Tamihana Huata told me that he wanted to give in his allegiance, but I won't believe it. I think it is only a sham to enable him to get over to Puketapu, and gain over what people he can from Te Waru. I begin reluctantly to distrust Te Waru again ; I can't get him down here, which looks bad, and I know he hates the Wairoa Natives. Ihaka being at Te Mahia, there is no dependence to be placed on our friendly Natives here; they appear to be demoralized to a certain extent since poor old Kopu's death ; they are certainly not the men they were, and we are most awkwardly situated with regard to the Kurupakiakas and Whakaki Natives. There is one thing very certain, and that is, if there is a rising among the tribes in obedience to the proclamation, and there is no more protection here than we are likely to get from Major Lambert's forty men, every European will be sacrificed, because, of course, we shall have no warning. I am not in the habit of giving false alarms, but I must say that, since the news of the proclamation, I look upon the state of this place as very precarious. I cannot write officially to Government upon the subject, as I have heard nothing to warrant me in doing so, no certain facts to go upon ; but I must tell you that I have everything to fear, owing to the totally unprotected state of this place and Poverty Bay. I trust and hope I may be wrong, but I fear not. I shall write by every opportunity, and will hunt up every reliable information. I have, &c., S. Deigiiton. P.S. —I forgot to say I had a letter from Preece. I have enclosed it, at least the part respecting Paora Toki, coupling that with Worgan's news. Paora is simply bound on the same errand.

Enclosure 2 in No. 20. Hepetema 12, 1868. Ko te Reme te tuturu ote tau alia koa pango ahakoa whero ma ranei: e kore enei e pai kia whakatoi i taua tangata: kia tupato koe ete tangata ki te taukawe ke ite tau Maehe 18, 1868. Ka Kokiritia mai te punga whakawhenua a Ihoa atua ora o nga mano i te rangi ite whenua. Nona nci uga takaretanga i te ao ko nga kai whakawheru tenei i te patu. Ki te rapu matauranga koe o te tangata ki te matauranga i te Eangi, i te whenua ki te Atua ki te Rangi ranei kua ute punga whakawhenua a Ihoa ite ao. Ko te kupu tuturu tenei ko te pua karetu te raihere i nga hihi ote ra. He raiti kei te rangi he raiti kei te whenua —ko te temepara i te ao — kua ara tetahi temepara o Ihoa e toru nga ra i hanga ai a ka oti. Kia ata taka nga iwi i waho me nga iwi o roto no Ihoa nga takaretanga ite tau. Ekore e mau te rongo ake tonu atu heoi ano. Na Matutaeea.

A—No. 10.

[translation.] 12th September, 1868. The Lamb is the sole lord of the year ; whether red, black, or white, it will not be well that any of these try to vex him. Be careful, O man, how you try to change the course of things ordered for this present year, March 18th, 1868, the world-holding anchor of Jehovah, the living God of hosts in heaven and earth (the universal decree of God), will be launched forth. His are the motions of thought in the universal world, which show their power by restraining the sword. If you seek wisdom, 0 man, of the wisdom in heaven, in earth, or of God in heaven, the decree of God has gone forth. (The world-holding anchor of God is firmly fixed in the world.) This is the fixed word. The flower of the karetu is it which has power to withstand the rays of the sun. There is a light in heaven and a light upon earth. The temple is on earth. A temple of the Lord has been built: it took three days in building, and was finished. Let the nations beware how they rage, those that are without as well as those within; every thought during the year is of the Lord. Peace will not be made, from henceforth and for ever. That is all. Matutaera.

Enclosure 3 in No. 20. Te Mahanga, 19th Akuhata, 1868. Kia to Teira, Ida Wi, kia te Harawira, Ida Paora Whatiura, Ida Hemi Tiora, Ida koutou katoa. E hika ma, e koro ma, e kui ma, tena koutou. Kanui to matou aroha atu kia koutou. E hika, Te Teira. Tenakoe i o tatou nohoanga i o tatou haerenga. E hika ma, e koro ma, kia rongo mai koutou ka kino te ao, e hika ma kia ohiti. E hold mai ana te mata o ta tatou kopere kia tatou. He kupu whakatupato tena naku kia koutou, ma koutou e pupuri e pai ana, ma koutou e maka atu e pai ana. E hika ma ka hinga te Pakeha me to Kawanatanga ia Te Koofci kaore he whakaparau he tika. E hika ma ka tat a nga ra ote whakangaromanga. E hika ma kaore he mahanga atu mo aku korero, e tae atu ranei au kaore ranei. E hika ma tena koutou, ka nui to matou aroha kia koutou ko a tatou tamariki e noho mai na i te kainga. E hoa ma, kaore he mahanga mo te korero ko te rite ano tena o te kupu i runga na, heoi ano te kupu tangi atu, ka huri, ka tu ki toku taina kia Henare e hoa tena koe te noho mai na me o taua manaki ka nui to maua aroha atu ki a koe, e hika tenei taku kupu atu kia koe me hara mai koe i tenei taima. Ho taima tenei no te whakangaromanga kia puta te ihu ka mahara atu ai ki o taua nohanga. Ehoa ki te whakaae mai koe, haramai, ki te kore e pai ana, kei a koe tena taha, engari ki te roa te taima o te whakangaromanga ka puta atu ano he reta maku, ki te poto ka mutu, heoi ano taku kupu ka huri. He kupu ke teuei. E hoa ma, ki te tae atu taku reta tuhia mai. He kupu ke tenei kei kawea te tangata ote rekareka ote pihikete, ka hara mai kite whawhai, kaore, kauaka hei whaia te riri, e ngari ma te riri e whai atu ki kona heoi ano, ka huri aku korero i konei. Na Teiea Maetjttt.

[translation.] Te Mahanga, 19th August, 186S. To Te Teira, to Wi, Harawira, Paora Whatiura, Herni Tiora. To you all. Friends, old men and women, salutations to you. Great is our love for you all. Friend Te Teira, salutations to you, living in our residences and traversing our paths. Friends, old men, listen to what I have to say: the world will be engulfed in strife. Friends, be on your guard, the strength of our bow is returning to us. This is a word of warning to you ;if you receive it, it is good ;if you cast it from you, it is good also. Friends, the Europeans and friendly Natives will fall before Te Kooti; this is undeniable, it is true. Friends, the days of extermination are close at hand. Friends, my words of affection to you are not many more. I may or may not come to you. Friends, salutations to you all, our love for you is very great, and for our children now living at the settlement. I have not much more to say, it is similar ito what is written above. This is all the word of affection. This is to my younger brother, to Henry. Friend, salutations to you dwelling in that place with those whom we love. Our love to you is great. Friend, this is my word to you, that you come to us at once ; this is the period for the extermination ; should we pull through, then we shall turn our attention to our dwelling-places. Friend, if you are agreeable, come; if not:, it is good, —that question is for you to decide. If the period of extermination is delayed I will write another letter to you ; but if it is close at hand I will not. This is another word. Friends, on receipt of this letter send me an answer. Here is another word. Do not be led away by the enticement of biscuits, and come to fight. No, do not advance to the fighting, but let the invaders come to that place. This is all. From Teika Maeutu.

No. 21. Copy of a Letter from His Honor D. McLean to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sie, — Superintendent's Office, Napier 14th November, 1868. I have the honor to transmit, for your information, translations of letters dated the 10th ana 11th instant, from the chief Henare Potae, respecting the late massacre at Poverty Bay ; also a letter from the chief Hotene Porourangi, of yesterday's date, from the Wairoa. I have, &c, The Hon. J. C. "Richmond, Wellington. Donald McLean.

Enclosure 1 in No. 21. To Donald McLeak, — Turanganui, 11th November, 1868. My loving friend, salutations to you. The refugees have arrived there, and you will also have seen the news. 7

25

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

26

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

This is another word. These Hauhaus will not leave here, they are building a pa. Their number is 300. It is for you to judge what force to bring against them. Let them be two or three against one of the Hauhaus, as these people are elated with their murderous works. There are sufficient of us here, Europeans aud Natives, to hold our position for a short time ; our numbers are 100 Natives and 50> Europeans who are officered by Mr. Gascoigne. We will not move out, but remain in the redoubt. Archdeacon Williams is also here, as a friend of ours. Use all haste in coming to us. From your friend, Henry Potae.

Enclosure 2 in No. 21. To Mr. McLean,— Te Wairoa, 13th November, 1868. Friend, salutations to you. We have received your letter to Rapata, myself and Ngatiporou, requesting us to remain here. We are agreeable to do so, but, at the same time, we arc thinking of the movements of the Hauhaus. They may still be remaining at Turanga, or they may have gone elsewhere. If they have retreated to the bush from Turanga or some other place, they may have gone elsewhere, perhaps to Waiapu, committing murders. As they have heard that we are here, perhaps they will proceed to murder the women and children. If we were stationed at Turanga, we should be nearer to send on words of warning to the men remaining at home, and receive an answer. But, at the present time, we have heard no word from our place. This is another word. We have had a quarrel with the Major with respect to the food. Ngatiporou have not sufficient food. This is all from your friend, Prom Hotene Porovhangi.

Enclosure 3 in No. 21. To Mr. McLean, — Turanganui, 10th November, 1868. My friend, salutations to you. This is the news from this place. The Hauhaus have made a descent on this place, on this present day, at 3 o'clock in the morning. Biggs and Wilson, together with their wives and children, and other Europeans, women, and children, are killed. Myself and my soldiers were at Turanganui in the redoubt at the time. My sentries saw the blaze of Mr. Wilson's house at half-past 4. We thought it to be an accidental fire. At 5 o'clock a messenger arrived, when we heard the truth respecting the Hauhaus. lat once started to the store to provision the redoubt, as it had been so previously arranged by Major Biggs and myself. The refugeesare now coming in here, men, women, and children. I have put them into the redoubt. The redoubt is quite full with the number of Europeans of all sexes and ages. There is also plenty of provisions in the redoubt; four tons of flour and sugar, and a good supply of meat and tobacco. Immense is the pain of the heart at the death of these great ones—died without the opportunity of defending themselves, not on the battle field, but fell by the hands of murderers. By the report of the refugees, this Hauhau does not intend to return. Make haste and send soldiers ; send Ngatiporou and Ngatikahungunu, also arms and ammunition; make haste. The leading men are dead. I alone am here rallying the Europeans and Natives. That is all. From your affectionate friend, H. Potae.

No. 22. Copy of a Letter from His Honor D. McLkax to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sir,— Napier, 18th November, 1868. The several telegrams daily forwarded by me will have already advised the Government of leading events on this coast, and of the steps which have been taken for the public safety. The latest reports from Poverty Bay are up to the 15th instant. I enclose a letter of that date from Captain Weetrup, which corroborates the melancholy intelligence already received, that thirty-four Europeans and fifteen Maoris arc known to have been killed by Te Kooti and his followers. Some of the incident* connected with this tragedy are too painful to relate, and I shall therefore, for the present, abstain from doing so. The steps that have been taken since this cat ast rophe may be briefly summed up as follows:— A reinforcement of seventy Natives of Karaitiana's tribe, with Captains Westrup and Tuke, were immediately despatched for the relief of Poverty Bay by the " Ahuriri," which afterwards proceeded with letters to all the most important chiefs of the East Coast, to warn them of what had occurred, and to prepare them in case their services should bo required. J. H. Campbell, Esq., late Resident Magistrate, was instructed to proceed to "Waiapu, to confer with the chiefs Mokena and others, and keep the Government advised of occurrences in that part of the Island. Copy of his instructions is herewith enclosed. Ihaka Whangs, and about seventy of his men, were, with twenty refugee settlers from Poverty Bay, embarked at Whangawehi and taken on to Turanga. On the evening of the 16th, 15,000 rounds of rifle ammunition, forty stand of arms, some tents, and twenty-two men of the Constabulary force, were despatched by the " Star of the South " to Poverty Bay. To Mohaka, where a small band of settlers and Natives are determined to hold their own, I sent per " St. Kilda" six stand of rifles and ten casks of ammunition. Captain "Westrup, having given the strength of the enemy at 500, states that a large European force is absolutely necessary to ensure success, and that for attack in the field, 500 mixed forces would be requisite, also 200 for garrison duty. Considering that the safety of other settlements would be secured by taking prompt steps with reference to Poverty Bay, I chartered the " Ahuriri " to proceed to Hicks' Bay and the East Coast to obtain more reinforcements from the Ngatiporou Tribe ; while about 200 of the Napier Natives, accompanied by their chiefs Renata, Hapuku, and Tareha, have volunteered, and this day proceeded to Poverty Bay in the " St. Kilda." Notwithstanding these large reinforcements, I cannot conceal from the Government the necessity for stationing a few companies of the Imperial troops at Wairoa and Poverty Bay, and of providing a reliable European force to take the

A.—No. 10.

field with the Natives. Without Europeans, and however eager and willing the friendly Natives may be to fight, it is scarcely to be expected, more especially if they meet with any reverse, that they will carry on a continuous warfare, although quite ready to take the field for occasional expeditions. Great credit is due to them for the aid and co-operation they have already afforded. I do not apprehend any immedate danger to Napier or its vicinity; but, as a precautionary measure, and to accustom the inhabitants to such discipline as will enable them to take their respective positions in case of attack, Captain Wray of the 18th iiegiment has kindly undertaken to form a night patrol with the Militia and Volunteers, which will give the officers and men of those forces an opportunity of becoming acquainted, under military direction, with picquet and patrol duty. On the northern frontier towards Taupo, the place is not guarded against a surprise, and I have therefore considered it prudent to call upon the settlers on the line of road from Meeanee to Pohue to organize a system of communication by which they would at once be apprised of any movement of the enemy, besides having the opportunity of hearing direct from Napier any rumours from other portions of the Province. A copy of instructions for this arrangement is herewith enclosed. Notwithstanding the measures that have been adopted, I feel that the Government should not relax in its endeavours to secure such a force as will suppress the present insurrection, and the sooner this is done the more speedily will the war on this coast be settled. The Government may rely upon my using every endeavour to assist in the present emergency, but I feel it necessary to suggest that during a period of hostilities all instructions to and letters from the different military officers on this coast should come through me. I cannot but think that it will be impossible to ensure a successful carrying out of military plans, where mixed forces are employed, if even a semblance of divided authority is allowed to prevail. I herewith enclose copy of instructions to Mr. Hamlin, by whom I forwarded several letters to the leading chiefs of the East Coast, of which I have not time to furnish copies. I also enclose translations of letters from the chiefs Henare Potae, Hirini te Kani, Ihaka Whanga, and Hamuera Porangi, to whom I have sent acknowledgments. It appears that a few of the friendly Natives who joined the enemy voluntarily or from fear, have been shot ; and that Paratene Pototi, a chief of high rank and excellent character, was, with six others, tied up preparatory to their being killed. Paratene had previously returned all the rifles in his possession to the Government stores at Turanganui. I consider that the Government has been most fortunate in the present juncture in securing Captain AVestrup to command at Poverty Bay, cordially aided as he is by Captain Tuke and Lieutenant Gascoigne. It will be seen by Captain AVestrup's letter that the friendly chiefs Henare Potae and Hirini have done good service, which entitles them to marked consideration by the Government. Ihaka AVhanga, who marched with seventy of his followers to the relief of Poverty Bay, also deserves the greatest credit for his conduct and example. I should not omit to mention that the A renerable Archdeacon L. Williams has done good service to the Colony by the excellent counsel imparted by him to both Europeans and Natives, as well as by the courage and fortitude ho has displayed during a period of unusual difficulty and anxiety. I have, &c, The Hon. J. C. Richmond, AVellington. Doxald McLean-.

Enclosure 1 in No. 22. Copy of a Letter from Captain Westeitp to His Honor D. McLean. Bir, — Turanganui, Sunday, 15th November, 1868. I have the honor to inform you of the safe arrival of myself and force at Turanganui, on Friday, 18th instant, having, on the way, called at the Mahia, and embarked Ihaka AVhanga and about seventy of his men (forty only armed). On arrival I found the news you had already received fully corroborated. Thirty-four Europeans and fifteen Maoris arc known to be killed (probably more) ; a correct return will be forwarded as soon as possible. With the exception of Tamihana himself, and about five or six of his men, the whole of his people have joined the enemy. Paratene and men have also joined the enemy, who have since shot some of his people, and bound himself and six others, who, it is said, are to be shot to-day. The Muriwai people still hold out, with about forty armed men and refugees from other pas ; they have sent for assistance. Renata AVhakari and three others who went over to the enemy have been shot by them. I have made use of two small vessels lying here to communicate with the Muriwai people, and have asked them to come over here, but without effect. The enemy are in great force, and are represented by Urewera prisoners and AVaikatos greatly reinforced by ex-friendlies, well armed, from Wairoa and elsewhere—the latter only a few, if any. They number at the least 500 men, and must have now in their possession over 300 rifles. I am holding this place and the Court House on the right bank of the river ; but my force, all told, is only 2SO. and many of these unarmed, and none trained. White reinforcements are continually inquired for by all, and the paucity of our numbers is producing a bad effect. The enemy have taken possession of Tamihana's pa, and are strongly posted at Puke Amionga and Captain Westrup's. I should at least require 500 men to take the field, and 200 garrison. The enemy has brought all his women and children, and this, coupled with the fact of their continually carting stores to their position, leads me to believe that they intend to remain. They are led by Te Waru, Te Kooti, Kama, Horowera, and others; Wi-Pere has joined them, in fact nearly all have gone over. I propose making a reconnaissance to-day, to bury the dead if possible. A large reinforcement of Europeans is absolutely necessary ; with them I could attack the enemy, but without, success would be very doubtful. I have good reason to believe, that with encouragement the Ngatiporous would take the matter into their own hands, and, having good knowledge of war and some prestige, would most probably succeed in expelling the enemy, and punishing him severely. I propose making a reconnaissance, not only with the object of burying as many of our dead as possible, but obtaining a better knowledge of the enemy's position. A few light field-pieces or mortars

27

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

28

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

Eev. Sfohi Turei, Te Mokena, Te Iharaira te Soukamau.

would he most useful, with men to work them. I propose to detain a vessel for the purpose of communicating with the opposite side ofthe Bay. By the next mail I trust to be able to furnish you with a correct detail of the dead and missing. We require arms, ammunition, and tents; at least fifty stand of arms are required. Henare Potae and Paora Parau and Hirini have behaved splendidly, and I trust the Government will acknowledge their services. I have, &c, His Honor Donald McLean, Esq., Chas. AVestrup, Capt., General Government Agent. Commanding Local Forces.

Enclosure 2 in No. 22. His Honor D. McLean to Mr. J. H. Campbell. Sie,— Napier, 12th November, 1868. I telegraphed to "Wellington this morning in reference to your being employed at Waiapu to look after the friendly Natives, and although I have not yet received a reply, I feel certain that the Government will recognize the necessity of your being sent up to confer with Morgan and the other chiefs in reference to the present state of affairs, and I trust you will do your utmost to prevent any of the Ngatiporous at Waiapu from joining the Hauhaus. The " Ahuriri " will land you at Awanui or Tuparoa, with twenty casks of ammunition for Morgan, and letters for him and the other chiefs of the East Coast. I hope you will keep the Government advised of all proceedings by every possible opportunity. I have, &c, J. 11. Campbell, Esq.. Napier. Donald McLean.

The within system of communication from Meeanee to Pohue is proposed for the consideration of the settlers on that line of road, in order that they may be made acquainted with the movements of the enemy, should any scouts or parties attempt to enter the Province in that direction. As this proposal concerns the safety of the settlers in the neighbourhood of the stations named, it is to be hoped that they will individually assist in carrying out the same. Donald McLean, Napier, 17th November, 1868. Superintendent.

System of Patrol Communication. The following system is proposed for the consideration of the settlers on the line of road from Meeanee to Pohue Bush:— Meeanee. —A mounted man to be despatched at 12 noon to Puketapu, where he will receive a despatch from Mr. Heslop and return with the same to Mr. Maney. Puketapu, —A mounted man to be despatched at 11 a.m. to Mr. Hill's, where he will receive a despatch and return with the same to Mr. Heslop's. Tutaekuri. —A mounted man to be despatched at 10 a.m. from Mr. Hill's to Peka Peka, where he will receive a despatch and return with the same to Mr. Hill. Peka Peka. —A mounted man to be despatched at 9 a.m. to Taylor's station, where ho will receive a despatch and return with the same to Robert Wilkin. Glengarry Station. —A mounted man to bo despatched at G a.m. to Mr. Parsons' station, where he will receive a despatch and return with the same to Mr. Taylor's. Pohue. —A mounted man to be despatched at 6 a.m. to Titiokura or other direction where the movement of any Natives can be watched, and such information as can be obtained to be forwarded by a mounted man from Glengarry Station.

Enclosure 3 in No. 22. His Honor D. McLean to Mr. F. E. Hamlin. Sie, — Napier, 17th November, 1868. Tou will at once proceed by the " Ahuriri " steamer to the East Coast, as far as Hicks' Bay, and collect as many able-bodied Natives of the Ngatiporou as are willing to volunteer for active service at Poverty Bay, without denuding the settlement of men for their own defence. I wish you to take this opportunity of telling the chief Mokena, that if he has any reason to doubt or suspect the Hauhaus under his care, and to whom Government arms have been issued, that it might be advisable to ask them for these arms to be given over to the men who volunteer to come and fight. I wish Mokena and you to use a wise discretion in this matter, and not to press the point if it should appear impolitic or injudicious at the present time to do so. I have enclosed letters to the chiefs named in the margin. I have, &c, ~F. E. Hamlin, Esq., Napier. D. McLean.

Enclosure 4 in No. 22. To Me. McLean, — Turanganui, 15th November, 1868. My friend, salutations to you, the whole of Kangowhakaata have joined the Hauhaus, Paratene and all his people, Ngatimaru, and the offsprings of Mahaki, have all joined Te Kooti; therefore we do not feel strong enough to stand up against Te Kooti, as he has secured a number of good arms (to the number of 300). We, on the other hand, also number 300, which makes us equal (in numbers) to Te Kooti's well-armed men. Tamihana is the only refugee who has come over to us. Ngatitahupo, under Ihaka, are still holding their pa. "We have just fully ascertained from the refugees that this Hauhau consists of Te Kooti, Paora Toki, Te Waru, and Nama (and followers), they being the leading men; also Ureweras. Anaru JMatete is the only one not here (cannot account for).

A.—No. 10.

The steamer went as far as Waiapu; she brought no men, the chiefs there did not see her—neither Te Mokena nor Te Iharaira. I gave Mr. Campbell full instructions to go to Horowera, Makeronia, and to Te Hokopaura; but he did not reach those places, but sent the steamer back from AVaiapu. AVe were very dark in not having reinforcements quickly. AVe are wasting our time here, as it will be useless our advancing against him with our present strength, he is too strong for us. AVe are inferior in numbers, and he equal in quality of arms to ours. Friends, call on Wellington for troops to protect Napier, and those at Napier send here; there are no Hauhaus to attack that place—Napier. The whole of the Hauhaus are here. It is on account of our inferiority of strength that he is not caught here, aud his people who have joined him. That is all. From your affectionate friend, Henare Potae.

Enclosure 5 in No. 22. To Me. McLean, — Turanganui, 15th November, 1868. My affectionate friend, salutations to you. You have heard of our disasters and those of our European friends, together with some Natives. I have to inform you that Henare Tomoana, of Napier, and his soldiers, together with Ihaka Whanga (and his people), have arrived. The Hauhaus, 170, on their arrival at Turanga the following chiefs turned, Paratene, Uraia Eiki, Pita Ngungu, Kereama Manutahi, Wireinu Kiriahi, Ngatimaru, they have all joined Te Kooti; Tamihana Ituatapu is the only exception. I have all Paratene's children with me at Turanganui in my redoubt. This is my word to you, that you will send us some instructions. We now number 300, in fact 400 without arms. Previous to the death of Major Biggs, on the coming in of the women and children to our barracks, Henare and myself were much grieved. But on their being shipped on board vessel, it greatly relieved us. Friend, farewell. Send us instructions. \ From your affectionate friend, Jlirini te Kani.

Enclosure 6 in No. 22. To Napier, to Mr. McLean, — Turanganui, 15th November, 1868. Friend, salutations to you. This is my word to you, the reason I have come here is the Hauhaus have made a descent on this place. Major Lambert and us had a quarrel. He wished us not to come here, but to go to the Wairoa, but I would not consent to his views, as there are no Hauhaus there to fight against, the Hauhaus are all here. Friend, send us some tobacco. That is all. From your affectionate friend, Ihaka Whanga.

Enclosure 7 in No. 22. To Napier, to Mr. McLean,— Turanganui, 15th November, 1868. Friend, salutations to you. Friend, be it known to you, the people of Turanga are lost, that is, those of two pas, Tamihana's pa and Kaharuhi's pa. Friend, listen: the whole of the Hauhaus are here, Te Kooti, Te Waru, and Nama. Send us reinforcements, we are only 100 strong here. We are (stationed) at the township. The town is not yet taken by the Hauhaus. This is another word of mine: send some more arms, as some of us are without arms. That is all. From your aft'ectionate friend, Ihaka Whanga.

Enclosure 8 in No. 22. To Mr. McLean,— "Wherowhero, 14th November, 1868. My friend, salutations to you. Come and bring our gun with you, bring it to the Muriwai; I am here waiting for you. My word has come to pass which I said to you ; although we meet with a disaster do not be downcast, now the evil is passed we shall now live. Friend, come that you may see your country, and the remnant of your people. Friend, the evil day is passed over us, we shall meet with no more disaster. From your friend, llAiniEBA Poeaxgi (Toiroa).

j No. 23. Copy of a Letter from Major Maik to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. (No. 29.) Sib,— Opotiki, 7th December, 1868. I have the honor to inform you that Wi Pere, a Turanga chief, with a party of ten men, women, and children, arrived at Torere, Wi Kingi's settlement, on the 4th instant. 1 immediately sent for him, and he gave the following account of the Turanga massacre and his own adventure: —" Just before dawn on Tuesday, the 10th of November, I was awakened by a shot; I rushed out of my house, and heard two more; I thought at the time they were at Cadle's house, and that it might be a drunken row, as there were twenty or thirty Natives drunk there in the evening. In a few minutes Wilson's house was on fire; I thought then that it was the Hauhaus, and told the people to fly, as we had no 8

29

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

A.—No. 10.

30

arms. Some of the women and children went, but others went to sleep again ; in the meantime nine of my people went towards Cadle's to see what had happened. I followed them, and as we neared the house we saw a number of men in good clothes standing about. They called to us to ' come on ;' we halted, then turned back, and the Hauhaus fired a volley, without hitting any one. AVe ran, and the second volley killed Hoera, and wounded another in tbe arm. I hurried to my place, got a horse, and snatching up my youngest child, rode away ;my wife and other children had left before me. AVe went to Oeta, Tamihana's pa; the party who had fired at us rushed on to my pa, and took a number of prisoners—Piripi, his wife, and five children, and Pera, were set apart, and then shot and sworded. Tiopira and Paora, Chatham Islanders, who had been left sick at AVhareongaonga, Maria Morete (wife of Pera) and child, Heni and child, Ema and three children, were spared, and so were all the people of Patutahi, Taureka, and AVahanui, about seventy in number; the first-named was surprised before the attack on the Europeans, and the main body stayed there while Te Kooti and about thirty surprised Matawhero. A Native from AVahanui met Kempthorne, and told him what was going on. " I met Captain AVestrup at Oeta; he said, It is no use staying here, for the pa is not in a state of defence ;I am going on with the women and children towards the AVairoa. Tamihana tried to rouse his people to put the pa in order, but the Hauhau section of them got rum out of the houses of the Europeans, and some made themselves drunk; as Tamihana could not do anything he got drunk too. This state of things lasted for several days. Hape sent a letter to Turanganui for a steamer. In the mean time Matawhero was being sacked and burnt, but Te Kooti wrote to Tamihana, Paratene, and other chiefs, that they had nothing to fear. News also reached us that all the roads were occupied, and no one could escape, and that if I did not give myself up the pa would be taken next day, and I would be sworded. There were no boats or canoes by which I could escape, so I decided upon surrendering. My uncle, Himiona, would go too, although he knew that he would not be spared. I tried to dissuade him. AVe went to Patutahi, and found that the story about the roads was not true. Te Kooti gave me tho option of returning with my people to Matawhero. I suspected him, and said, No, I will follow you. I heard after, that if I had consented we should all have been killed. " Paratene visited Te Kooti at Patutahi, and they made an agreement in writing not to interfere with each other. Te Kooti said, 'If I break the treaty, your coj>y shall be a sword to slay me; and if you break it, my copy shall be a sword to slay you.' Paratene answered, 'It is well'; and Te Kooti took off his hat, bowed, and said,' Amen.' We had been three days at Patutahi when Himiona, AVi Rangiwhaitiri, and Paora Patahuri, were taken out on the pretence of being put on sentry, and shot, and then pierced with swords. The same day Te Kooti entered Paratene's pa with a strong force, and took all the inmates prisoners. Paratene, Renata, Whakari, Hira Hokopu, Iharaira Hokopu, aud another whose name I have forgotten, were at once separated from the others, and shot. They were all well-known Government Natives. The next day Natana, who went to Patutahi with Paratene, and had been detained by Te Kooti to take care of his child, was shot. At this time we were at Pukepuke, well guarded. Most of the events described were not witnessed by me, but there was no attempt at secrecy. A large force were employed collecting stock of all kinds. A party of 25 were sent to Kempthorne's and Poynter's runs for cattle ; they were returning by Patutahi, and fell in with a small party of Government Natives, who fired on them, killing two, viz. Harawira Naku and Riwai Patete. Te Kooti said it was their own fault, as they were too fond of the things of this world. The Hauhau force at this time amounted to about 300 men, besides women and children; the prisoners, many of whom are red Hauhaus, amounted to perhaps 300, including women and children. Of Te Kooti's own force, perhaps 200 are armed with Enfields or breech-loading carbines ; they have also numbers of swords aud revolvers. Having collected a quantity of stock, the Hauhaus and their prisoners marched at a slow pace for Makihoi, an old pa above AVaikohu on the Opotiki road, distant upwards of thirty miles from Turanga, Te Kooti's intention being to make it his head-quarters on account of its excellent position— Opotiki, Waiapu, and Turanga, all being within a moderate distance. At the time Te Kooti made inquiries of the Urewera about the roads to Opotiki and Tireri, Hoani Tauwehi answered that the roads were very good; he also asked what character AViremu Kingi of Ngaitai bore, and the Urewera said, 'He has often been out with the Pakeha to fight, and it is said that he caused the death of Rakuraku's mother.' Kooti said, If this is true, Jehovah will curse him. On the 24th of November, while we were encamped at the head of AVharekopae Stream, at the foot of Paeroa Mountain, we were attacked in the forenoon by the Government Natives; the fight lasted all day, and two of To Kooti's men were killed, and about ten wounded; he took care not to expose himself, and was very busy serving out ammunition ;he complained that his stock of it was being expended very fast. About 7 o'clock p.m., I asked him to permit me to take the women and children into the ranges for safety ; he consented. I mustered my own people, and we started up the bed of a stream; we had to leave Paora Matuakore with his wife, who was very ill. By morning my party had decreased from thirty to fifteen. For five davs we wandered among the mountains without being able to increase our distance more than a few miles. For four days we heard firing, and on the fifth we got to Tapuihikitia, which is at the head ofthe Turanga plain. From here I sent Maria Morete and Horiana, with two children, to Turanganui. In the evening, while catching horses, we heard firing not far off, near AVaikohu, and struck into the bush by the Karnakama road. In five days we reached Torere, having been ten days in the bush; our food during that time consisted of fifty pounds of flour, and whatever we could collect—such as eels and Tawa berries. The party consisted of myself, my wife Arapera, our three children, Tamati, a AVairarapa man, two children of Himiona's, one of Tiopira Tawhi's children, and Ilakopa and Paora of Ngaitai, who had been to Turanga with a letter to Major Biggs." I have endeavoured as nearly as possible to give this account in the narrator's own words. In answer to questions, AVi Pere imformed me that there were about thirty Ureweras with Te Kooti. These men were from Maungapowhatu, under the chiefs Te Amo and Hoani Tauweke. Kooti had sent messengers to the Ruatahuna people to join him, and also to Matutaera. He said of the latter, that if he persisted in keeping aloof, he would be cursed by Jehovah, who would command him (Te Kooti) to march to Tokangamutu, and put Matutaera and all his people to the sword. He also said that it was not his intention to attack Auckland, AVellington, and Napier for the present, but when he cleared the small settlements, the large ones would fall into his hands ; that he would never

A.—No. 10.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

31

spare a European nor minister of either race, as they had been the cause of all the trouble at Turanga^ nor any Natives who had been cursed by Jehovah ; Mokena, Hotene, Hirini, Rapata, Paora Apatu, and Tamihana would soon be delivered into his hand. He does not believe in the New Testament, but is constantly quoting the Old, and can always find a passage to justify his acts or orders. He rules his people, by whom he is regarded as sent by Jehovah, with great severity ; he has caused several to be run through the body for manifesting sympathy with some of his victims, and a man called Kakeho, who went to a settlement and ordered food in his master's name, was put to death, immediately upon the fact being made known to Te Kooti. If he intends to put a man to death, he strikes him lightly with a hunting whip which he always carries, and then transfers him to a policeman, who takes him in charge till Te Kooti is ordered by Jehovah to send for the executioners. These men are selected principally from distant tribes. Tepene Te Waru, who was taken prisoner at Orakau, and had his left arm amputated by Dr. Spencer, 18th R.1., is one of them. Their duty is to lead the victim apart from the camp or settlement, where he is shot, and swords plunged through his body, w Thich is left unburied, that it may be devoured by the " birds of the air and the beasts of the field." No trial takes place, and no one dare ask questions or make any sign of sympathy. The Urewera have explained the position of Opotiki, and ask him to avenge the deaths of their people who have fallen in this district, upon the Europeans and Wi Teria, Te Teira, and other Whakatoheas who have acted as their guides at different times. Wi Pere says that Captain Wilson alone offered resistance, firing three shots at the murderers, upon which they set his house on fire, and told him that his life would be spared. He then came out with a child on his back, and they told him to go; he had only moved a few yards, however, when they shot him and his family. In other instances the Europeans were enticed out of their houses, and then killed. Cadle was not killed till his house and store had been plundered, lest hi3 blood should defile any of the goods. Having in view the possibility of a visit from Te Kooti, I have fully armed the Ngaitai (Wi Kingi's tribe), and twenty of their eastern neighbours, the Whanau Apanui, under the chief Tatana Ngatawa, who are to come to the assistance of Ngaitai in case of an attack by the Kamakama road, which strikes the coast at Torere. For the defence of this settlement I have strengthened the Otara Blockhouse, by taking men from the Waioeka Blockhouse, and by the employment of five trustworthy Natives to be stationed at the former post, whose duty it will be to scout on the Kowhai road, which emerges from the ranges on the Otara River. In the event of Te Kooti being driven back from Poverty Bay, he would in all jDrobability retire upon the Ureweras, who would unite with him for the purpose of attacking some of the Coast settlements. In such a case it would be necessary to take steps to guard against surprise from another direction, but at present Kamakama and Te Kowhai are the points requiring special attention. I have, &c, The Hon. Dr. Pollen. W. G-. Maim.

No. 24. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. S. Atkinson to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sie, — Turanganui, 9th February, 1869. I have the honor to forward the following notes from a statement of Karipa Maruwhakatapua, made on the Bth of February, 18G9. Karipa was not present during the fighting at Ngatapa, but was lying ill at some distance in the bush. Was informed of the fall of Ngatapa by morehus, and immediately started oft' with as much speed as his health would permit, accompanied by his wife and three children, Hemi Rangi, Wi Pero, and his wife. On the fifth day they reached Makihoi, where they found a party of thirty or more, consisting of Tamati Te Rangituawhara, Horomona Turakitai, Hcrewini Tamaihonia, four Ureweras, two Ngatihineuru, viz. Maika and Hirini, three of Ngatikowhatu, viz. ltewi Tipuna, Hone Tenia o llama, and another, also Pera te Uatuku, Pera te Awaahaku, a younger brother of Karauria to Ua, Hori Koroma, Meihana Paturua, two women of Ngatikowhatu, two women and a child of Ngatihururu, ten women of Te Aitanga a Mahaki, and about ten children. The proposal was made by these people, and urged strongly by Tamati, that they should all go and join Te Kooti, who was on the Motu River, astheir lives would not be safe if they should return to Turanga. Karipa declined going, and said that he would stay in that neighbourhood to look out for straggling fugitives. The whole party then left to join Te Kooti, with the exception of Karipa and his family, Hori Koroma, Meihana, and Winiata and child. After these were gone, a party of twenty (Ureweras and Ngatihineuru) came up headed by Nepia Tokitahi and Te Whiri, an Urewera chief. These reported that Manihera, Waiatua, Timoti, and six others of Te Whakatohea, had joined Te Kooti at the head of the Motu River. They were on their way to Ngatapa; but when they heard what had happened, they turned back and made their way to Te Kooti's camp. "When they arrived, they proposed that Te Kooti should go with them back to Waioeka. Te Kooti, however, decided to send Manihera to "Waioeka, with a supply of money to purchase rum, flour, and tobacco at Opotiki. Te Kooti had then thirty men with him, consisting of Urewera, Ngatihineuru and Te Aitanga a Mahaki. Rangiaho had been with him, and though pressed by Te Kooti to stay, had gone home taking his men with him. After Nepia and party had passed on, there came Nikora te Wailiarakeke and Manihera (Ngatikahungunu from the Upper Wairoa). These had narrowly escaped being captured by Rapata Wahawaha, and Nikora expressed great indignation at Hirini Taiahuahu because he had been recommending the fugitives to come to Turanga. He said that if he had heard him offering such counsel he would have shot him, and he was determined to shoot any one else whom he might hear talking of such a thing. It was not until these had passed on that Karipa and those who had remained with him came away and made for the Muriwai. Last saw Te Kooti at Ngatapa. Firing commenced at Ngatapa the day after he had gone to hia

A.—No. 10,

32

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

retreat in the bush. Could not say how many men there were in Ngatapa, but there were 120 armed. Supposes Te Kooti is now at Waioeka. If the Whakatohea do not want to fight at Opotiki, he will go to Maungapowhatu, and on to Taupo, which he means to make his head-quarters, and from whence he may come to attack either Turanga or AVairoa. The Urewera did not all leave with Eangiaho. There are still some with Te Kooti, under Te W^hiri; the survivors of the Chatham Island prisoners are all with him. The murderers of Major Biggs and others were not belonging to one party in particular, but were some Chatham Island prisoners, Ngatikahungunu, Urewera, and Ngatihineuru. There were 170 with Te Kooti at that time. Maata accompanied them, as also did Huhana, widow of Meihana te Whana, Oriwia, Miriama Toruhuihui, wife of Hirini te Ea-tu, Akenihi, wife of Kepa Pokepoke, other women of Ngatikahungunu and Ngatihineuru, Te Waru's two wives, and a Tuahine of Te Waru. Saw Pera Punahamua on the morning of the massacre. He went with Te Kooti from Patutahi, but soon came back saying that Te Kooti and his followers were going to " patu tangata." Pera was taken by Te Kooti to act as guide to the settlers' houses. Meri Taiakupe was taken by Te Kooti as a " Whakarau," and is now among the Urewera. I have, Ac, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. W. S. Atkinson, E.M.

Subsequent to this information given by Karipa, I bave heard from another source that Te Kooti asserts that he has obtained a plan of Opotiki, that the magazine was a long way from the redoubt, and could bo easily taken, as the people of Opotiki were so few and scattered ; and that, if the AVhakatohea consented, he should attack Opotiki at once. W. S. Atkinson, R.M.

No. 25. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. 8. Atkinson to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sin,— Turanganui, Bth March, 1869. I have the honor to state that finding I should be detained some days at Waiapu, and believing that the Government would be anxious to obtain news from Opotiki as to Te Kooti's movements and force, I requested Captain Fox to proceed there with H.M. s.s. " St. Kilda." On her return I received a letter from Major Mair, 8.M., copy of which I have the honor to enclose herewith. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. W. S. Atkinson, E.M.

Enclosure in No. 25. Copy of a Letter from Major Maib to Mr. W. S. Atkinson. Mt deab Me. Atkinson, — Opotilri, 3rd March, 1869. Tour letter of 9th February, with one from Mr. Campbell, readied me last night, and the arrival of the " St. Kilda" affords me an excellent opportunity of replying. Te Kooti, after a sojourn of several weeks at Waioeka, left on the 20th ultimo for Maungapohatu, to unite his forces with those of Eru te Maikowha, better known in these parts as the " murderer," from the fact that all the murders committed in this district during the past two years have been carried out by him. The Waikato party alluded to in your letter numbered sixteen Ngatiporou, and about the same number of Urewera. Anaru Matete, Te Munu, Te Kewene, and Te Popata, were the leaders of the party; they joined Te Kooti before he left Waioeka. During his stay there I was kept well informed of his movements ; he tried to get the Urewera to join him for the purpose of attacking Opotiki, but they answered by inviting him to Maungapowhatu. He has said a great deal about Turanga since he has been in these parts, but I do not think that he will try his fortune there, unless he knows that the place is denuded of troops ; his present game is Opotiki, Ohiwa, Whakatane, or other settlements in this district. The former he does not feel quite safe about, as there are too many Pakehas, but he will probably show up at one of the other places mentioned before this week is out. I have heard to-day that he is at a place called Otara, on the Waimana Eiver, about twenty miles inland from Ohiwa. I do not know for certain what his force may be, but estimate it at 130 or 140. If any of the Euatahuna people have joined, it will exceed this number. There is an impression abroad that Te Kooti has been crushed, and is powerless for evil; but it is a very erroneous idea —he will do a great deal of mischief yet. lam convinced that his losses at Ngatapa were very little more than half of the number as given by newspapers. The Urewera lost a few men, but Eangiaho, of whom so much has been said, was not killed ; he is only a third-rate chief after all. Te Kooti has not less than fifty Chatham Islanders with him ; his wound was a mere graze on the left collar-bone. He has got into a country now from which it will be very difficult to drive him, but it must be done, and the Urewera must be well punished before there will be any peace for this part of the Colony. We can get together a considerable force of Queenites in this part, but they are not fully armed. I ha\-e heard a good deal lately of an invasion of the eastern part of this district by Ngatiporou, ostensibly for the purpose of having a " tangi," but the local Natives say, for the purpose of " muru." for some old Maori " tikanga." In any case I. would rather they did not come, as they will eat up every green thing, and there is only enough to keep the resident Natives going till next summer, unless of course they are coming in suificient force, and with the view of pursuing Te Kooti for the sake of the £1,000 reward, in which case they will be welcomed. I have no time to write to head-quarters as the steamer's stay is limited, but if you are writing to Colonel Haultain, perhaps you will be good enough to give the latest about Te Kooti's movements.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

33

A.—No. 10.

You vtdll oblige me too by thanking Mr. Campbell for his letter. I shall be only too glad to correspond with both of you when an opportunity offers. I have, &c., W. S. Atkinson, Esq., R.M., Turanganui. W. G. Mair.

No. 26. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. S. Atkinson to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sie, — Tauranganui, Bth March, 1869. In compliance with instructions contained in your letter No. 61-3, 13th February, 1569, directing me to obtain recruits for the West Coast, I have the honor to state that I obtained the cordial consent of Mokena, Rapata, and Hotene to the enlistment of certain of their tribe for that service. After the distribution of the money mentioned in my letter of equal date, I deemed it advisable to stay myself at Waiapu, and send Mokena on in the " St. Kilda " with Sergeant Ferris to Makeronia and Kavva-Kawa, where they succeeded in obtaining twenty-seven men. From Waiapu I only obtained five. Calling at Tuparoa, Te Hotene came oft* with a letter from Hirini te Kani of Turanga, stating that the Hauhaus had killed two soldiers there, and that they (the Hauhaus) had also been seen inland of Tokomaru. In consequence of this alarm only ten men joined the A.C., and I proceeded thence to Akuaku, where Rapata came oft" at once to see me. The Ngatiporou wished to proceed in a body to Turanga, but I explained that we were quite strong enough to hold our own until we received instructions from the Government, and that in the meantime I merely required men for the West Coast. Between this place, Te Matote, Anaura, and TJawa, about forty men joined the force. All these men are only enlisted for one year, but I have not the least doubt they will re-enlist at the end of that period should the Government require their services. Nothing would induce their chiefs to allow them to bring their arms. From the general feeling of insecurity on this coast, there was, as may be imagined, a disinclination on the part of the Natives to leave their kaingas, but principally through Rapata Wahawaha's influence, which he exerted strenuously in furtherance of your expressed wish, and by his consenting to present them in person to the Government, their disinclination was overcome. Mr. Ferris, from his energy and knowledge of Native character, was of great assistance. The chief Hatiwira, son of Iharaira te Hokamau, has joined the force expecting a commission, and I would suggest that he should receive the same, as he is a man of great influence. Eruera te Rangiwaha, with his followers, also joined on the understanding that he was not to be in the ranks. Rapata Wahawaha, who accompanies the force, will explain the circumstances. In conclusion, I would state that Rapata deserves great praise for the manner in which he has endeavoured to assist me in carrying out the wishes of the Government. The Hon. the Native Minister, I have, &c., Wellington. __________^__ "^ Atkinson, R.M.

No. 27. Copy of a Letter from Mr. S. Deigiiton to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Resident Magistrate's Office, Blß,— Wairoa, 15th January, 1869. I have the honor to forward the enclosed report of this district, for the quarter ending 31st December, 1868, which I much regret is so unfavourable. In my previous reports I have remarked upon good effects arising from the industry and settled habits of the Native population of the district, which promised in a short time to be in as flourishing a condition as could be wished for ; but unfortunately, since the escape of the prisoners from Wharekauri, and the outbreak attendant upon that occurrence, affairs in general are in a much worse state here than they were four years ago, when I first arrived. A general feeling of insecurity now prevails, and I fear will continue till the band of murderers under Te Waru are apprehended. The feeling of course exists among the Europeans, who are gradually leaving the district. The Military Settlers, who were making comfortable homesteads in the country, have been all obliged to come in; the cultivations are more or less destroyed (from neglect), and their owners subsisting with their families, for the time being, upon the Militia pay, 2s. 6d per day and rations. What is to become of them when their services are discontinued it is hard to say. The Natives, on the other hand, are placed in almost a similar situation, they having been obliged to desert all their inland cultivations during the time it was most requisite for them to have been at work preparing the ground for the summer crops, and in consequence have little or nothing to depend upon for the ensuing winter. I may state here that the land in the vicinity of the township is quite useless for the purpose of growing potatoes ; and the feeling of insecurity is so great at present, that I fear nothing will induce them to cultivate the land available for that purpose in the interior, even should there be time to do so. I must give it as my decided opinion, that until Te W«ru and his people are utterly routed, and punished for the late outrages, that the same sad state of affairs is likely to continue. lam inclined to believe, from various reports afloat, that Te Waru and his people are at or near Waikare-Moana, and the Wairoa Natives are very anxious to go in search of him, providing they can get some assistance from the Government; but at the same time I must say that I fear very little can be done with them if left to themselves, recent events having so completely disorganized them. Ido not know whether, strictly speaking, I have any right to give my opinion in these matters, but I do so thinking that the 9

A.—No. 10.

34

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

G-overnment would wish to be thoroughly acquainted with the state of the Native affairs in this district. Another great evil existing here, is there being no chief of sufficient influence to take any decided lead in affairs of importance ; this, in combination with the division of the Native population into a number of small tribes, all being imbued with a large amoimt of jealousy and distrust towards each other, is quite sufficient to neutralize any efforts made for the common good. I regret much that such a feeling should prevail, especially (at the present time) when unanimity is so much required. The feeling I allude to was not so prevalent at the time Kopu was alive, or even for some time after his death; but now that a combined effort is required on the part of the Natives, it is unfortunately too apparent. But although affairs here at present wear such a gloomy aspect, I trust it will not be for a continuance; and I am of opinion that, if the prime mover of all the disturbances in this district, Te Waru, is captured, the place will soon again revert to its former prosperous condition. I have, &c., The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. S. Deioiiton', II.M.

TAUPO. No. 28. Copy of a Letter from Mr. S. Locke to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sin,— Napier, 10th February, 18G9. I have the honour to forward, in compliance with your desire, a report of a journey made in company with Lieut.-Colonel Lambert to Taupo. We left Napier on the 21st of January, and proceeded by way of Petane and Tarawera to Nukuhau, at the outlet of Taupo Lake, the pa of the chief Poihipi, and from thence to Oruanui, where we met HohepaTamamutu and Hare Eewete te Kume, and then proceeded along the eastern shore of Lake Taupo, calling at Hatepe, the principal pa of Paora Hapi, and Tauranga a Hauhau settlement, the pa of Tukorehu, and the residence of Wirihana (who endeavoured to get the Taupo Hauhaus to join the ex-prisoners), on to Tokanu, the residence of Hare Tauteka, Heuheu, Herekiekie, Paurini and others. We next visited Rotoaira, and thence on by the Rangipo Valley to Patea, where we saw Karaitiana, and further on Ihakara, chief of Patea, and returned to Napier through the Ngaruroro Gorge. I have furnished Lieut.-Colonel Lambert with all the information relating to the Natives, and the districts through which we travelled, giving him a tracing of our route so that he can supply the Government with a full report in reference to matters connected with military posts or other subjects of that nature to which it is unnecessary for me to advert. The tracing which I enclose will show the route we followed, and also the different lines of roads that have been examined between Napier and Taupo. But as full reports on these roads have been made by Messrs. Gill, Weber, and Ross, engineers, and by Mr. Ellman, copies of which have been already furnished to the Government, it is scarcely necessary to express an opinion as to the most eligible of the several lines. I fully admit that, owing to the poverty of the great part of the land in the Taupo district, the necessity for making a good dray road within that district may not appear necessary ; but for military purposes, and in a political point of view, especially if Natives were employed upon the works, the advantages derived from a main line of road through the centre of the Island cannot be overrated. A large body of the Natives, I am satisfied, take a very lively interest in the matter, and would be ready to work at a moderate rate of wages, and instead of being isolated as at present would soon begin to feel the advantages of more easy and frequent communication with the different towns and settlements on the coast. The Natives at every pa treated us with the greatest hospitality and kindness makingfriendly speeches, which were replied to in the same spirit. From their appearance and manner, and from the tenor of their remarks, I am inclined to think that a great want of confidence exists on the part of the Hauhaus as to the action that may be taken by the Government and the friendly Natives. I believe many of the doubts and jealousies now existing could be removed if more easy means of communication were opened up, and a friendly intercourse established. It is well known that our greatest enemies are those who have been most isolated and secluded from intercourse with the Europeans, and who have had but few opportunities of participating in the advantages of civilization. A few days before we reached Tokanu, Rewi Ngatimaninpoto had been called to Taupo, owing to a dispute with Hohepa Tamamutu, who was shot at by the Hauhaus for persisting in putting up a flag on a hill w rhich was disputed land, the object being to carry on the trigonometrical survey for the Native Lands Court. Rewi cautioned the Natives of his party against any disturbances in that district; at the same time he addressed the following message to the chiefs of the Government party at Taupo : — " Whakaarohia mai kei te Maehe nei Matuatia ai, Tamaititia ai, Tuakanatia ai, Teinatia ai, Tangata ke ai, AVhanaungatia ai, Pakehatia ai, Mate ai, Ora ai." Like most of the messages of this kind from important chiefs, the language used is ambiguous, and may be construed to mean good or evil. The Natives to whom it was addressed did not understand the purport of it. The impression of the majority with whom I conversed on the subject understood it to mean that in March a meeting of the King party will take place at Moerangi, near Taupo, when a final decision will be arrived at as to whether peace or war is to prevail. Of the Ngatihineuru Tribe, of whom Nikora was the chief, formerly residing at Pohue, Haroto, Tarawera, Runanga, and the mountainous wooded district that divides Hawke's Bay from Taupo, little need be said, as nearly the whole tribe is extinct, having been killed or taken prisoners at Omarunui and Petane in 18G6. That portion of the road to Taupo is now almost deserted. The population in the Patea district (a road through which also leads to Taupo) may be considered friendly; the Natives are few in number, and generally well disposed. The tribe to whom most of the Taupo country belongs (the Ngatituwharetoa) musters about 400 fighting men, about 250 of whom

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A—No. 10.

35

are Government Natives, and about 150 Hauhaus. The red dotted line shows the general outline of the boundaries of the Ngatituwharetoa, although they are connected by intermarriage, &c, with the Arawas on one side of the Island, and AVanganui people on the other. The blue dotted line tinted red shows where the Hauhau portion of the tribe reside. The Government Natives are very anxious to have the roads opened, and a settlement made in the district. I believe that a force of not less than 300 fighting men, partly Europeans partly Maoris, placed in a central part ofthe Taupo district (say Nukuhau), from the commanding position they would occupy, would tend more to the final settlement of the war, and the thorough opening up of the country, and have greater influence, than a much larger force could possibly exercise on the coast; more especially if, in conjunction with this force, a part of whose duties it would be to make roads through the country, a judicious employment of Native labour were also used for the same purpose, so as to give them occupation and excite a desire for the arts of peace. Any efforts in this direction, having the amelioration of the Maori race and tho peace of the country in view, should not be subject to sudden checks, but should bo fairly tried for a few years. The resources ofthe country around Taupo for the support of any number of men at the present time are very small, and should the Government think of stationing a force there, most of the supplies would have to be conveyed to the place during the first twelve months. AVe visited the mill at Tokanu, which, as far as we were able to judge, would be a good one when put in thorough repair ; and I consider any help the Government could render the Natives towards that object, more especially as the land around is well adapted for agriculture, would be money judiciously spent. The position of Taupo, from being in the centre of the Island, and the great importance that has all along been attached to it as a place of refuge for any ofthe disaffected tribes if forced to relinquish their possessions on the coast, forcibly suggests the idea that the Government should take some steps to have such a hold on that part of the country as will remove this long cherished idea on the part ofthe disaffected. Of course it is not for me to indicate what steps the Government should take to accomplish this object; but it has long been my opinion that war in the North Island would end more speedily if the Taupo country was properly administered, and efforts used to convert the Hauhau party on the west side of the lake, by inducing them to join the Government Natives and abandon the unfriendly attitude they at present assume. Should there be any other subject on which you desire to obtain more particular information with reference to Taupo, I shall be happy to afford it; and I feel naturally anxious to assist in promoting in any way the interests of a district which, I may say, I have been chiefly instrumental in opening up for settlement. • . I have, &c, The Hon. J. C. Richmond, Wellington. S. Locke.

PATEA, WANGANUI, AND TAEANAKI. No. 29. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. Booth to the Hon. J. C. Eichjiond. Sie, — Wanganui, sth December, 18CS. I have the honor to report that yesterday, whilst at Woodall's Redoubt, a sentry reported t» Lieut.-Colonel Herrick, the officer commanding, that two (2) Natives were approaching the camp, and that they were carrying a white flag. An order was given that they were to be stopped at the brow of the hill, about 300 yards from the camp. Lieut.-Colonel Herrick and myself at once went, and found they were messengers from Titokowaru's camp. One I recognized as belonging to Titokowaru's hapu (Ngaruahine), and named Eameka ; the other, Eimitiriu, has been living at Pa Karaka, and has once or twice come into Colonel Whitmore's camp under cover of being a friendly Native. On being asked what they had come for, they produced a letter from Titokowaru—copy and translation forwarded herewith. Lieut.-Colonel Herrick, with my concurrence, thought it advisable to detain the two messengers until we were able to communicate with the Government, and for the following reasons : —The man Eameka has been with Titokowaru and his tribe since the commencement of the present outrages, and is said by friendly Natives to be one of the Teleaumarua (advance guard) ; the question, therefore, is as to whether a flag of truce is to protect a man suspected of murder and other outrages, or, at any rate, who has been aiding and abetting those who are guilty of these crimes. The other man, Eimitiriu, came into camp on the 27th of last month, professing to be friendly; he obtained a pass from Colonel Whitmore, promising that he would act as a spy. Having carefully examined our position, he went directly to Titokowaru's camp, and, by his own confession, told Titokowaru that our position was weak, and that the force was composed of Pakehas only ; that there were no friendly Maoris in the neighbourhood ; and gave such further information as led the Hauhaus to take up a position the same night about 1,400 yards distant from our redoubt, and at daylight next morning they opened fire on our position. He, Eimitiriu, has been living in Titokowaru's camp since that time, and neither Lieut.-Colonel Herrick nor myself felt justified in liberating him unless instructed to do so by Government. I may mention in conclusion, that when the prisoners were searched, on being taken into custody, a watch was found on Eameka which had belonged to Constable Darlington who was killed at Te Ngutu-o-te-Manu, his name being inside the case; a gold chain was identified as having been the property of Lieutenant Hastings. He was wearing also a pair of Government ammunition boots. Nothing was found on Eimitiriu beyond two boxes of matches, a knife, and Colonel Whitmore's pass. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. James Booth, E.M.

A.—No. 10.

36

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

Enclosure in No. 29. Te Weraroa, Tihema 5, 1868. llei whakawai mahakatajtga siott. Kia Te Whitimoa,— Tena koe, he ui atu kia koe : Nowai a Ingarangi nowai tenei e turia nei e koe ? Taku ki a koe, kotahi te ra o te hanganga i te rangi me te whenua, kotahi te ra o te tangata me nga mea katoa e hua ana i roto. Mehemea e mohio ana koe na te Atua te hanganga i enei e pai ana, he mea oati taua iwi. Pakehatia ana koe e huaina ana mou ko Ingarangi. Iwi Maoritia ana au e huaina ana moku ko Nui Tireni. Te mahara koe kua whakatakotoria he takiwa ki waenganui o taua he mea nui he moana. Te mahara koe mawhiti mai ana koe i reira ki konei, kaore nei au i mawhiti i konei ki reira. Taku ki a koe, neke atu i oku wahi ki ou wahi i waenganui moana, neke atu i te taone ki era wahi atu. Whakatika kia iriiria koe kia horoia ou hara me karanga ki te ingoa ote Ariki. Kati, Na TITOKOWARTT. [teanslation.] Te Weraroa, sth December, 1868. Mattees fob tour consideration. To Whitmore, — Salutations to you. This is a question to you. To whom does England belong ? To whom does this upon which you stand belong ? This is my word to you. The heavens and the earth were made in one day, and man and all things bearing fruit therein were made in one day. If you know that God made these, it is well. A covenant was entered into with those people. You were made a Pakeha, and the name of England was given to you for your tribe. I was made a Maori, and New Zealand was the name given to me. You forgot that there was a space fixed between us of great extent —the sea. You, forgetting that, jumped over from that place to this. I did not jump over from this place to that. This is my word to you. Move off from my places to your own places iu the midst of the sea. Move away from the town to those other places. Arisej! that you may be baptised, that your sins may be washed away, and call upon the name of the Lord. Sufficient. From Titokowaetj.

No. 30.

Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. Booth to tho Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sir, — Wanganui, 23rd December, 186S. I have the honor to report that last evening Aperahama Tamaiparea, of Waitotara, arrived at Putiki, AVanganui, having escaped from the Hauhaus at AVaitotara, and crossed the country between the AVaitotara and Upper AVanganui. He reports that when he returned to AVaitotara, being authorized'to do so by His Excellency tho Governor, he was taken prisoner, and kept in Titokowaru's camp for some days. He kept himself aloof from the Hauhaus, and although Titokowaru sent for him three or four times, he refused to go to him. At length he was allowed to go up the river, and thus made his escape. He says Titokowaru's force is about 400 strong. All the Ngarauru have joined with the exception of Aperahama himself, Hare Tipene, Pehimana, Tonga, and a few young men. Hare Tipene and his few followers are at a place well inland, called Piraunui. Titokowaru has got with him all his men, women, and children, and he has taken up Taurangaika as a permanent residence. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. James Booth. R.M.

No. 31. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. Booth to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Eesident Magistrate's Office, Sik,— Carlyle, Patea, 20th January, 1809. I have the honor to report, that on Sunday evening last, 17th instant, I left Patea with the Native Cavalry Force under Kemp, also accompanied by Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell, Captain Richardson, and Mr. E. McDonnell. We reached Waihi at about 10 p.m. the same day. Next morning, at daylight, we left Waihi, crossed the Waingongoro Hirer, and proceeded to To Ngutu-o-te-Manu. The pa was very strongly fortified, but had apparently been deserted for months ; everything had been removed from the place—there was not even a fowl or pig about the place. The fortification consisted of a double palisading around the proper front and right flank of the position, about twelve feet in height, each stake being the thickness of a man's leg, the whole fastened together with supple-jack. The inner line of palisading was only of sufficient width to allow the muzzle of a gun to pass through. The outer palisading was about a foot or eighteen inches from the ground, the stakes being pointed. Inside the palisading were the usual rifle-pits about breasthigh. At the front and flanking angles were bullet-proof stages, commanding the usual entrances through the bush; there were also three large rata trees in the pa, which could be ascended, the kiekie, &c, forming cover. We burnt fifty-eight whares in the pa. At the foot of a large rata tree, inside the pa, I found a small heap of calcined bones, and a short time afterwards the Natives found two heaps of calcined bones outside the palisading, few of them being larger than a crown piece; the ground where these bones were found was blackened by fire for the space of 12 feet by 5 or 6 feet. As we had only three or four billhooks, it would have taken too long to destroy the defences ; we therefore left them standing, but destroyed everything in the pa. After destroying the place, we returned, breakfasted at Waihi, and on our way destroyed Otoia, which contained about sixty houses, but was not defended by palisading. I have, &c., Tiie Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. J. Booth, E.M.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

37

A.—No. 10.

No. 32. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. Booth to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. Sib,— Carlyle, 14th March, 1869. I have the honor to report, that on the evening of the 12th instant I accompanied Colonel Whitmore, with the force under his command, on an expedition against Titokowaru. At daylight yesterday morning we came upon his position in the bush on the left bank of the Patea River, near to a place called Otautu. After some hours' hard fighting the enemy retreated, leaving the whole of his Baggage, tents, &c, in our hands. Seven or eight Hauhaus are known to have been killed. We did not get any of the bodies. Several of them also must have been wounded, as we saw a good deal of blood in different places. After the village had been taken, Kemp in command of his own men, the Arawa, and Kupapas, started off in pursuit; they killed one man, who had just crossed the river, and brought two women prisoners. Colonel Whitmore and myself examined the prisoners. We learnt that Titokowaru was himself in the fight, and that he escaped by swimming across the river; we also learnt that Taurua, Wharematangi, and Te One Kura are with Titokowaru, but that they are very dissatified with him, and intend to leave him. The Ngarauru, with the exception of Tapa, and perhaps one or two others, have deserted Titokowaru, and have gone up the Waitotara River; at the same time, also, Tito te Hanataua, with ten men, deserted him, and went home, as well as the Ngatimaru, ten in number, from the Upper Waitara. Titokowaru has had no communication whatever with the Ngatimaniapoto or with Te Kooti; it is also satisfactory to know that he has not been in communication with any of the Wanganui Natives, as they do not know what has become of the two prisoners who are in Wanganui. This is by far the greatest success we have yet had against Titokowaru, and the effect will be that his men, with the exception of his own personal hapu (Ngaruahine), will desert him. The retreat from Taurangaika was evidently looked upon as a defeat by some of his followers, who at once left him. I think, also, they are getting very short of ammunition, as we found several very small packages in different whares, carefully tied up, each package not holding more than about an egg-cup full. It is also evident that they are not receiving supplies, or they would have heard news of some kind. One of the women, a sister or cousin of Taurua, speaks very bitterly against Titokowaru, who, she says, had deceived them by false promises. The people are now disheartened, and lam in great hopes that in a week or two Titokowaru's power will be completely broken. I have just learnt from Patohe (Hone Pihama's brother) that Tito has gone to Te Ngaere, and he thinks it is very probable that Titokowaru will also go there on account of his provisions. Kemp and his Natives are in high spirits and eager to go on • the Wanganuis and Arawas are now out scouting. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. James Booth, R.M.

No. 33. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. Booth to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. (No. 16-2.) Sib,— Patea, 19th March, 1869. I have the honor to report that in consequence of information relative to the position of the Hauhaus, received from Major Kemp, I left this place in company with Colonel Whitmore and Captain Swindley, A.D.C., yesterday, at 1 a.m., to go to Whakamara. We went by way of Manutahi and Taumaha, and overtook the rear of Lieut.-Colonel Lyon's column near Whakamara at daylight. On reaching the head of the column we could plainly hear the Hauhaus talking, and also there was great crying in the camp. Our Natives, who had lain in the neighbourhood all night, reported that during the previous evening the enemy had scouted the road for a considerable distance towards Mokoia, and that the women had been for potatoes, and had returned before nightfall; that about midnight food ■was cooked, and at about 1 a.m. they began to talk, and that one man (Tamati Popo), recognized by his voice, was heard haranguing the fighting men of the tribes, blaming them for not taking his (Tamati's) advice at Otautu, and retreating sooner than they did; that because they had resisted so long they had lost many men, but that they themselves were to blame for their losses. Titokowaru then spoke, advising his people to use very great precautions, not to forget that this was the day of the white man and of the Maori, and that they were to place the women and children in front, and the men were to bring up the rear. There seemed to be a good deal of dissension in the Hauhau camp. They expressed their strong disapprobation at the desertion of the Ngarauru, and said what a pity it was they had not split their heads before allowing them to go. Towards daylight the women began to cry, and were crying when we got up to the column. Horopapera, one of Kemp's men, acted as guide. He, with Kemp and a party of men, made a long detour through the bush to get to the rear of a fortified pa which he knew to be there, and which it was supposed they were occupying (they were encamped close to the edge of the bush, just beyond the pa). This movement delayed the column for some time; and whilst we were waiting for Kemp to open lire, we were unfortunately seen by a mounted scout, who at once gave the alarm, and the Hauhaus got away into the bush. They are evidently in a state of alarm, as, with the exception of the scout, who fired three shots from a revolver to give the alarm, there was not a single shot fired at us. It is satisfactory to know that we can follow them right into the bush, and make them run before us in their own country. Ido not suppose they have more than from 100 to 200 rounds of ammunition; and now that Kemp, with 300 men composed of Wanganuis, Arawas, and GO European volunteers, is on their track, and the whole of the rest of the force is moving on in the open country, so as to be able to intercept them whenever there is a chance of doing so, I do not see how they are to escape from us, hampered as they also are with women, children, and wounded. The men are in the very best of spirits. The Wanganuis and Arawas are behaving splendidly. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. James Booth, E.M. 10

A.—No. 10.

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

38

No. 34. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. Booth to the Hon. J. C. Eicnjiotn). Sih, — Eesident Magistrate's Office, Carlyle, Ist June, 1869. I have the honor to report that, after Tukino and others of his hapu had passed through Oeo on their way to Pariaka, I was informed that they had up to that time been living at some place on the Patea Eiver, not far from Te Ngaere. I also learnt from another source, that a quantity of seed potatoes were stored away somewhere inland. I was previously aware of the existence of a track leading from Taiporohenui to the Patea Eiver, by which Tito Te Hanataua and his people used to go every summer for the purpose of eel-fishing. I stated these facts to Major Noake, who, with myself, thought it very desirable that the clue should be followed up, and for this purpose he kindly placed. 100 men at my disposal. After a very fatiguing march of more than two days we struck the Patea Eiver; but not having a sufficient supply of provisions, we had to return without having discovered any village or camp. The country is flat nearly the whole way, and from the point we reached to Te Ngaere appeared to be perfectly so. The climate and soil here will, lam convinced, grow anything that can be grown in New Zealand; and there is an almost unlimited supply of timber —rimu, matai, and kahikatea. We did not see any totara, though it does grow in the district. Some of the trees were from eighty to ninety feet without a branch, and as straight as masts —and this in conjunction with a fine river, which runs at that place 100 yards wide, down which timber and other produce could be rafted. If this district ever becomes populated by Europeans, it will be one of the richest agricultural districts in New Zealand. It is, of course, a disappointment not to have come to any village or other residence or cultivation at this place ; but I think the fact of our taking such a journey into the interior of their country through the bush, and by a track supposed be unknown excepting to a few of the Tangahoe Natives, (Hone Pihama and Ngahina knew nothing whatever about the road), will show the Hauhaus that we do not intend to give them much rest. Moreover, the track we followed is an old war trail, and leads directly to Taupo by way of Mangaio, near Pipiriki, on the Wanganui Eiver. During the last three months we have discovered one of their tracks leading through Te Ngaere to Waitara; and also this track leading through the Upper Patea, besides others in different parts. One good result will certainly follow from these expeditions ; and that is, we are gradually but surely finding out all their secret places by which in the last war they secured a constant supply of food, and are thus taking from them the possibility of remaining in the country. If the Government will go to the expense of clearing a portion of the bush, and making roads by which pack-horses and men can march comfortably to certain parts of this district, I think there will not be much fear of the Hauhaus reoccupying those parts of the district again ; for instance, a road for pack-horses might be made — 1. To Te Ngutu-o-te-Manu. 2. General Chute's road repaired. 3. The road to Te Ngaere and Upper Waitara. 4. The road by which we have just been to the Upper Patea. 5. A road from Mokoia to Whakamara. 6. A road to Otoia, and from thence inland. Other roads might be made also south of Patea. The making of these roads need not be expensive ; very little if any cutting is required on any of them; all that is required is to have the brushwood cleared, and the fallen timber removed from the present tracks, and light bridges thrown across the worst of the streams. It is intended to make an expedition up the Patea Eiver in three or four days. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Jaiies Booth, E.M.

No. 35. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Pabkis to the Hon. J. C. Eichmostd. (No. 279.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 4th October, 1868. I have the honor to report, for the information of His Excellency's Government, that the chief Hone Pihama arrived last night with very unfavourable news again from the Patea district. He reports that on Wednesday last his man Karira, who was stopping at Waokena, on their reserve by the beach, near Hawera, with Natanahira, Patohe, and others, left for Patea to fetch the mail, duo here yesterday. That on arriving near Manutahi, he and another young man who was with him fell into an ambuscade, and were taken prisoners and marched off to the rebel camp, which was then at Manutahi, Brown's place, and not at Waitotara, as reported in the Wanganui papers. That as Karira did. not return with the mail, Patohe went with six young men to look for him on the following day, Thursday. That on getting upon the sandhills, near the Tangahoe Eiver, they saw fires in the Manawapou Eedoubt, and the place apparently abandoned. They crossed over to the redoubt, and when just past it a party of Natives jumped up and presented their guns at them, but on discovering that it was Patohe they did not fire upon them. One of the rebels called to them to come and kindle a fire in the oven and cook the body of a dead European, which was lying near the redoubt, for food. Patohe replied, That is your work ; I have come to look for Karira, have you seen him ? The rebels answered, We caught him yesterday; he is not dead, but a prisoner at our camp. Titokowaru says he shall liberate him. The rebels then informed Patohe that on the day previous (Wednesday) they attacked an escort taking carts to Patea, somewhere near Manutahi, and drove them back to the Manawapou Eedoubt; and during the night they attacked the redoubt and took it. That when they got inside they found one European dead, but all the others had evacuated the redoubt and disappeared. That they returned to their camp, and the next morning they came back again, when they found that after they left, in the night, the Europeans had been back to the redoubt before going to Patea, as they supposed.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

39

A.—No. 10.

The rebels told Patohe that Titokowaru's plans were to attack the redoubt near the public house, at Kakaramea, on Friday night; and that if he succeeded in taking it he should then cross the Patea Eiver without attacking the redoubts at the township, and fight his way to Wanganui, and plant his crops for the season on the farms above St. John's Wood, by the road leading into the avenue. All this, of course, is said to inspire his followers with confidence, and to incite them to energetic action and bravery ; but it is to be hoped that we shall soon gain a decided victory, without which I am afraid the consequences will be very serious. From all I can learn of Hone, who is generally correct in his information, the articles which have appeared lately in the Wanganui papers are altogether wrong. I mean those referring to a proclamation of the Maori King, and to Titokowaru's party having crossed the Patea, and were even said to be at Waitotara. They were encamped at Manutahi, inland of Manawapou, on Thursday last, intending to advance towards Kakaramea on Friday. Brown and Enoka, of Manutahi, two Pakakohi chiefs, are said to have gone into Patea with Taurua, and Wharematangi has sent a message to Titokowaru, objecting to his crossing the Patea Eiver, which message the latter has said he shall disregard. Hone Pihama assures me that the only Natives with Titokowaru up to last Thursday were the Ngatiruanuis and a few of the Ngatimarus, who were with him before he left the Ngutu-o-te-Manu, mentioned in a former report of mine. The Ngatiruanuis with him are part of the Ngaruahine Tribe, part of the Tangahoe Tribe, and part of the Pakakohi Tribe, numbering altogether over 300, he thinks. That section of the Tangahoes under Ahitana has not joined Titokowaru, but were still inland of Keteonetea on Thursday last. Hone reports very favourably of the Taranaki Natives, and hopes they will not be drawn into it; but as I said in my report of yesterday, he says they would like to see Titokowaru put down, lest they should become ivhakama (ashamed). That is the feeling throughout. I have, &c, E. Paeeis, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 36. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to the Hon. J. C. Eichmond. (No. 251.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 4th October, 1868. In further reference to my letter of to-day reporting the arrival of Hone Pihama, and the capture of his man Karira and another by Titokowaru's party, I have now the honor to report that Patohe arrived this evening at 6 o'clock from Waokena direct, and reports that Karira and the other were liberated yesterday, when they returned to Waokena. In my letter of to-day there was a mistake about the rebels having got into the redoubt on "Wednesday night. It appears that when they followed them to the redoubt in the evening of the attack upon the escort, they fired into the redoubt for some time, and then retired to their camp at Manutahi, and on returning early next morning to attack the redoubt they found it evacuated. There was one cart left behind. Karira states that they left Manutahi yesterday, and were going to encamp at a place called Otoia, inland of Kakaramea, where poor Broughton was killed. Before crossing Patea they intend to attack the redoubt by the Kakaramea Township. He also states that there is a division in Titokowaru's camp ; some are for returning from Patea, but Titokowaru is for going on towards "Wanganui, which, of course, is all bombast. On Karira and the other leaving the camp yesterday, Titokowaru gave him a letter for Hone Pihama, and one for Ngahina, both to the same purport, inviting them to join him, and warning them to stop the mail. That he had stopped the roads, and punished some with death and spared others ; and that during the night the occupants of the Manawapou Eedoubt fled, and that 200 of the Wanganui Natives had arrived at Perekama, but what is that to him ? Patohc has come over seventy miles since last evening to bring those letters to me. The one addressed to Hone Pihama I enclose herewith, and keep the one addressed to Ngahina. Hone Pihama and his brother Patohe are both with me now at my own house, and will return either to-morrow or next day. They are very much grieved about their mail being stopped, but I have told them it will not be long before they will bo able to carry it again, and in the meantime I have advised them to keep quiet and not do anything rash, which might cost them their lives. I have recommended that Patohe, Natanahira, and party should leave Waokena, and come to Oeo, lest Titokowaru should take them away by force. I have, &c, E. Paeeis, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure 1 in No. 36. Copy of a Letter from Titokowabf to Ngahixa. Ki a Ngahixa,—■ Ngatupehau, Hepetema 3, 1868. Tena koe. Ka tukua atu ano hold taku ki a koe. E hold ki uta. Hei kata rnau hei taunu hei kanga iho mau i ena kupu pehea atu ranei i tau mahara. Paingia ae, paingia koretia ae, e pai ana, kei a koe ano tou whakaaro. Tenei tetahi, kati te haere i nga rori me mutu, mutu rawa. Kia rongo koe kua mau aTe Karira raua ko Te Mataka engari kua mau ta koutou mera kia mau rawa. Kaua ano hoki e whakateitei a whakateka ake mo ta koutou mera. Kati, kati rawa. Kia tupato rawa koutou mo tena kupu kaua e tomo ki nga pariki i muri o toku tuara. Waiho te puehu o te ruruanga o Bangawhenua kia takoto ana ; ma toku ringa e toro. Kua rongo au ko Whanganui kei Perekama he ope e rua rau 200, kahore au e pouri. He aha ki ahau tenei korero ? Kati. Na Titoko.

A.—No. 10,

40

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

[Translation.] To Ngahtna,— Ngatupehau, 3rd September, 1868. Salutations. I send my (word) to you also. Eeturn to the shore. This word is for you to laugh at, to deride, to curse, or what you will. If you agree to it, it will be well; if you do not, it will be well; the thought is with you. This is another word : cease travelling on the roads, stop it altogether. Do you hearken :Te Karira and Te Mataka have been taken prisoners, and the mail has been seized, but let it be altogether stopped. Do not be presumptuous or incredulous about your mail; stop it, stop it, altogether. Do you be very careful about that word, do not go into the redoubts which are behind, my back. Let the dust shaken off by Eangawhenua lie; let my arm stretch forth. I have heard that a war party of Wanganuis, 200 in number are at Perekama, but I will not be discouraged about that. What is that word to me ? Sufficient. Titoko.

Enclosure 2 in No. 36. Copy of a Letter from Titokowaeu to Te Ngohi. Ki a Te Ngohi,— Ngatupehau, 4 Hepetema, 1868. Tena kua mau to mera me ona kai tango. Kia rongo mai koe kia mutu rawa te mera i nga rori, kia tupato mo tena kupu. Kua noho ahau ki konei. Ite tahi 1 o nga ra ka tutakina to rori, ka whiua, ka mate ano te mate ka ora ano te ora. Itepo ka horo Manawapou, ite ata ka whakaekea tae rawa atu kua horo, kati tena, he kupu ano tenei. E hoki ki uta whai mai i ahau kia mau ahau i a koe ki te ara. Kua rongo ahau ko Whanganui kei Perekama, he ope, erua rau. Kia ahatia ? Hei aha ma wai ? Kati. Na Titoko. Ki a Te Ngohi, me tou rohenga e noho ana i te taha moana iwi, Taranaki.

[TEANSLATIOJf.] To Te Ngohi,— Ngatupehau, 4th September, 1868. Your mail and its carriers have been seized. Do you hearken : let the mail on the roads be altogether stopped, take warning by this word. I have taken up my quarters here. On the Ist the road was shut up, the attack was made, some were killed and some lived. At night Manawapou was evacuated; it was attacked in the morning, but when we got close to it we found that it had been evacuated. Sufficient on that. This is another word : Eeturn to the shore, follow me in order that you may come up with me on the road. I have heard that a war party of the Wanganui Natives are at Perekama. What of it ? What is that to any one ? Sufficient. Titoko. To Te Ngohi, and your people who are living by the side of the Tribe of the Sea (i.e. Europeans), Taranaki.

No. 37. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Pabeis to the Hon. J. C. Bichhond. (No. 288.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 10th October, 1868. I have the honor to report for the information of His Excellency's Government, that More arrived at TJrenui this week from Tokangamutu; no one with him but his wife. He was at Urenui two days, and from there he went to William King te Eangitake's place; and from thence he purposed going to Ngatimaru, Ngatiruanui and Taranaki, for the purpose of warning any Waikato Natives in those districts to return to Waikato, to avoid any entanglement that might arise out of Titokowaru's proceedings. This he declares to be the purport of his visit on this occasion, by order of the King. I have, &c, E. Pabbis. The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 38. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Pabbis to the Hon. J. C. Bichmoio). (No. 286.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 10th October, 1868. In further reference to my reports of the 3rd and 4th instant, relating to Tamati Teito, I have the honor to report that, on Wednesday last, I went to a place called Koparoa, where he lives, inland of Mataitawa, accompanied by His Honor the Superintendent, the Provincial Secretary, Major Stapp, and a number of our Natives under Mahau and Tahana, two of our Assessors. We soon discovered that the object for which he had invited us to meet him was to hear his proposal that the Europeans should abandon the confiscated land ; the reply to which was, that such a proposal could not be entertained for a moment. I further explained to him that it was now a year since he came in, during which time he had been living quietly, and had understood everything which had been done respecting the land, and had never before said anything about the Europeans, although I had visited them on many occasions. He indulged in very unbecoming language in reference to the Government, and made use of threats, which he afterwards tried to qualify by saying that he should not

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

41

he guilty of violence himself, but that other tribes might. He is doing his utmost to spread disaffection among our friendly Natives, and recommends them to clear out and go to the bush ; but six of our Natives spoke at the meeting, and assured him of their determination to remain faithful to the Government, and deprecated in strong terms his interference. The day after we were there he wrote to the Superintendent, asking him to come and see him on the Bth of October. The Superintendent has offered to meet him at Mahoetahi on Wednesday next, but whether he will come down there or not I cannot say until his answer is received. He has only seven others with him, and so far as I can ascertain, no other Natives of tiie district are supporting him; but ho is no doubt trying to take advantage of our misfortune in the Patea district and our weakness in the Mataitawa district, where there are but few settlers left. There is one family living close to them, at Te Koparoa, perfectly isolated from the other settlers and the block-house, there being no road to their place. I have recommended His Honor the Superintendent to advise them to come away therefrom for a time. Every other part of the district is perfectly quiet at present. I have, &c, E. Paebis, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 39. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to the Hon. J. C. Eichmond. (No. 290.) Sib, — New Plymouth, 21st October, 1868. In further reference to my report of the 10th instant, No. 286, in reference to a meeting at Koparoa, and the arrangement for a subsequent meeting at Mahoetahi, I have now the honor to report that Tamati Teito and five others came by invitation to Mahoetahi on Wednesday last, to meet His Honor the Superintendent and myself. At the request of Tamati Teito, about a dozen of the settlers of the Mataitawa District attended the meeting, and the Natives present were the followers of Mahau and Tahana. The subject discussed was the same as on the former occasion, the confiscated lands, which he said we must abandon, without which the settlers would be killed. I reminded him that, at the meeting at his own place the week previous, he had said that other tribes might do it, and that now I wished him to understand that I did not want his opinion as to what other tribes might do, but that I wanted to know what he himself meant to do. In reply he said, If they do not leave I will kill them. I gave him to understand that if an European had been guilty of such a threat he would have been arrested at once, but as he had come there by invitation of the Superintendent, I would not take advantage of him, but warned him not to repeat his threat, and told him that the killing of European settlers would not restore the land to the Natives, but bring further trouble upon them. As he distinctly held out the threat to do bodily harm to the settlers, I recommended His Honor the Superintendent to advise those settlers beyond the Mataitawa Block-house to come in, until we saw what the upshot was to be, which he did accordinglv, and as the most of them were present, they agreed to come in the following morning. Before leaving, I had a private conversation with Mahau, who at once suggested that I should either make Tamati Teito prisoner, or allow him to drive him away from his place at Koparoa. My objection to the first proposition was, that Tamati Teito had been present at the meeting by invitation of His Honor the Superintendent; to the second proposition of Mahau's, to allow him to drive Tamati Teito and his people away, I was quite averse, knowing that if that was done, they would be sure to return and surprise the settlers in retaliation. I therefore arranged with Mahau and Tahana that they should take the matter in hand, and see if they could induce him to retract what he had said; or, if he refused to do that, and still threatened violence to the settlers, not to allow him to return, but detain him until they heard from me the following morning, which Mahau agreed to do. Before leaving Mahoetahi to return to town, I ordered a Native policeman to go during the night to the chief Nepe, who lives at Pekatu, near Mangonui, and request him to come in to me the following morning. As there were many Europeans at the meeting, the news spread rapidly that the Mataitawa settlers were called in, which was the cause of a good deal of excitement, more particularly in town; and before I went to bed several.came to my house to inquire if the report was true, which of course I was obliged to admit, but at the same time I told them all that there was no occasion for the slightest alarm. The following morning His Honor the Superintendent and Major Stapp met me at my office, to consult as to what had better be done, when we decided to put the settlers into the Manutahi and Mataitawa Block-houses, as a precautionary measure. AVHiilst we were engaged at my office, a deputation of four shopkeepers waited upon us to make certain suggestions, when His Honor the Superintendent very properly told them they must leave the matter in the hands of those who understood how to deal with the question better than they did. His Honor the Superintendent, Major Stapp, and I, were starting to go to Mataitawa, after I had taken out warrants of arrest for Teito and three of his followers, in case I decided to arrest them after hearing what had taken place during the night; but before we left town, Tahana and Kipa, two of our Assessors, arrived from Mahoetahi to inform me, that Tamati Teito had recanted during the night, and given them most satisfactory assurances of his assent to put a stop to the whole matter, and hot to interfere with the settlers, and that Mahau had taken Teito and his few followers with him to his place at Te Puata. Some of the Justices of the Peace were of opinion that a meeting of that body ought to be ■convened, and accordingly those who were available were soon brought together —about ten of them. I took Tahana and Kipa to the meeting, and got them to state what had taken place during the night, 11

A.—No. 10.

42

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

which, together with my own explanation of the matter, gave satisfaction, and allayed the excitement,, which the people in the town are very prone to. In the afternoon the chief Nepe, Hapurona's uncle, and another Native named Topine arrived ; and as I had sent for him to ascertain what the state of feeling of the Natives inland was, and as towhether they knew anything as to Tamati Teito's movements, I requested His Honor the Superintendent to go to my ofh'ce with me, to hear what he said. Nepe's account of the state of feeling of the Ngatiawas inland was everything we could wish. He assured us that they had no intention, so far as he knew, of interfering with the settlers, nor were they aware that Tamati Teito was doing so. He farther recommended us not to allow a single settler to be removed ; that no one would support Tamati Teito, and that he was only doing it to try to make himself a name, which, from what he knew of his antecedents, Teito was not likely to succeed in. I gave Nepe and Topine 10s. each for their trouble in coming in a distance of fifteen miles so readily, when requested to do so in a case of emergency. The information which he gave us enabled me toview the matter as one of no occasion for any suspicion of danger, and fortified me in a manner which enabled me to meet Teito the following day with a great deal more assurance than I should have done had Nepe not come in. Friday morning I started for Manutahi, accompanied by His Honor the Superintendent and Major Stapp, for the purpose of reassuring the settlers of no danger, and to request them not to move. As we were on our way out we met Mahau's son coming in for me. We went direct to Mahau's place, Te Puata, where we found Teito and party. They told us that they had sent for me on account of having heard that some of the settlers were moving away from their houses, and that they wished me to stop them from doing so, as no one would interfere with them. The few Natives who were left at Tamati Teito's place, on seeing Mr. Davis about to move hisfamily, asked them what they were leaving for, and requested them not to go; but on seeing they were determined to leave, they assisted them to bring their children out of the bush to Manutahi, and then came on to Mahau's place to report what was going on, when Tamati Teito seut them back to tell the settlers not to leave. I gave Tamati Teito a severe reprimand for having caused so much trouble and confusion by his violent language, and warned him against a repetition of the offence. He replied in a humble manner, and promised to be quiet in future, and agreed to associate with the friendly Natives, and put in some crops at Mahau's place as a guarantee of his peaceable intentions. He has never interfered with the settlers in any way beyond this demonstration, by which I believe he thought he might coerce me into some arrangement about land for himself, and make himself popular with other Natives. From Mahau's place we went on to Manutahi to reassure the settlers; but before we got there the Natives had been to them, and we found they were reconciled, and returning to their respective places. Tamati Teito went quietly back to his place on Saturday last, and on Monday he sent in two women to go to the chief Poharama, of Moturoa, on a peace mission, intending to follow himself if Poharama entertains the two women, which he is doing. Poharama refused to attend the meeting at Mahoetahi, although invited by Teito, stating that before he went to see him he wished to have some assurance of his future good behaviour. . lam happy to be able to report that, although this matter has given me a good deal of anxiety, and been the cause of considerable excitement, I am of opinion that it will have a very good effect, by clearing away a sort of cloud which was hanging over those few Natives, caused by such reports asthose of "William Old, which it was believed was got up for a purpose: he having drawn for a back bush allotment as a military settler, would like to exchange it for a more available and more valuable one. I should not be doing justice to our Natives, who have through many years of trials and difficultiesduring the war proved faithful to the Government, if I neglected to bring tinder the notice of the Government the assistance the Puketapu section, under Mahau and Tahana, have rendered me in thismatter. I have, &c, E. Paeeis, The Hon. the Native Minister. Civil Commissioner.

No. 40. Copy of a Letter from Mr. B. Paeeis to the Hon. J. C. Eiciimond. (No. 319.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 3rd December, 1868. I have the honor to report, for the information of His Excellency's Government, that whilst I was absent at the South last month a small section of the Taranaki Natives commenced talking about the confiscated lands, and thereby caused some uneasiness to the settlers in the Okato district, who, on receipt of the news of the atrocities committed by the ex-prisoners at Turanganui, became very much alarmed, and appealed to His Honor the Superintendent to have a force of fifty men stationed at the Okato Block-house, which I opposed, believing from information which I had obtained, that there was no immediate danger. After I returned from the South the above Natives wrote to me, and I answered them by letter (copies of the correspondence herewith enclosed), arranging for a meeting; but in the interim from the time of my return to the time for the meeting the excitement of the settlers was something ludicrous, although I had positively assured them that there was no immediate danger, and that I hoped to get timely warning of any such emergency. Some of them commenced removing their things into town, under the belief that the meeting was to be a declaration of war. On Monday last I proceeded to the Taihua (near AVarea), the place appointed for the meeting, accompanied by His Honor the Superintendent and all the leading chiefs of our friendly Natives (over twenty), whose presence at the meeting had a very good effect. The question discussed at the meeting was the confiscated lands, which the speakers in the opposition repudiated, and asked to have it returned to them and the settlers removed from off it.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

43

I explained to them that a very liberal arrangement had been made in favour of the Ngamahanga Tribe to which they (the present agitators) belonged, in consequence of a large majority of the tribe, under the chiefs Iharaira Te Pirini, Paora and others, having unconditionally surrendered in 1864, and had behaved very well ever since ; that the block of land between Hangatahua and AVaiweriweri had been set apart for Native purposes ; but that I wished them to understand that if they committed themselves by any acts of violence towards the Okato settlers, that that arrangement would not be any longer binding on the Government. We arrived at Taihua too late on Monday evening to go into the question that day, consequently had to stop there for the night, which was occupied in talking over past events; and early on Tuesday morning, before the talking commenced, there was a line of sticks stuck up to represent the confiscated districts ; from the AVhite Cliffs to the Bell Block on the North, and from Omata to Stoney River (Hangatahua) on the South, leaving a space for the intervening blocks acquired by the Government by purchase. I was about six hours combatting the question with a Native named Hairini Te Motu, who was the principal speaker; and during the whole time they maintained perfect good-humour, and repudiated any intention on their part to be guilty of violence towards the settlers at Okato, a number of whom were present at the meeting, and were treated very civilly. Our friendly chiefs behaved exceedingly well. Ihaia, of AVaitara, and Hoera Tiwa, son of the old chief Nikorima, took some water and sprinkled the sticks which had been put up, in token of their approbation of the arrangements which have been made with regard to the confiscated land. Ropata Ngarongomate followed in the same strain, and was supported by Mahau and Tahana; after which Hairini said, " I see plainly it is not Parcte who has taken the land." During the whole of the discussion there was no expression whatever made use of which could be construed into a threat, and I consider the result of the meeting was satisfactory, in which opinion T am supported by our friends the chiefs who went with us to the meeting, and in this case, as in the case of Tamati Teito, have rendered good service. I append to this letter a list of those who accompanied us. On returning from the meeting, His Honor the Superintendent wrote to the Okato and Tataraimaka settlers, assuring them that there was no occasion for the slightest apprehension of danger, and that the meeting had terminated favourably. Several families who had come in have this day gone out again. I have, &c, R. Parris, The Under Secretary, Native Affairs. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure 1 in No. 40. Te Ngaua Pariki Kainga "Wahi o Whangatahua, Noema 25, 18G8. Kia Parete, kia Te Retimona me to runanga,— E hoa ma, me haere mai tatou ki konei korerorero ai, he mangai he mangai, he kanohi lie kanohi; he mea pai hoki tenei, kia ata korero tatou, kia tere mai koe 26-27 otira kei a koe te ritenga. Na te pooti o Ngamahanga, Na Motu, Na Rum, Na Tauanui.

[translation.] Te Ngaua Pariki Kainga llangatahua, To Parris, to Mr. Richmond, and tour Runanga,— 25th November, 18G8. Friends. You must come here and let us talk together, mouth to mouth, face to face, for it is good that we should speak to one another. Be quick here on the 26th or 27th, but the thought is with you. From the Pooti of Ngamahanga, Motu, Rum, and Tatjanui.

Enclosure 2 in No. 40. E hoa ma, — Niu Paremata, Noema 25, 18G8. Kua tae mai ta koutou reta mo maua ko Te Eetimona kia liaere atu maua i te 26-27. Kia rongo mai koutou kei te raruraru maua i enei ra i whakarite ai koutou, engari kia mutu ta maua raruraru i reira maua ka haere atu ai, kia mutu hoki nga rangi tupuhi. Maku e tuhituhi atu kia koutou kia mohio koutou te rangi hei huihuinga mo tatou. Kei pouri koutou mo te korenga otera i whakarite ai koutou. Naku. Na Parete, Kia Patara Eaukatauri, kia Motu, kia Koutou katoa, Hiwa Komihiana. kei Te Taihua.

[translation.] Friends, — New Plymouth, 25th November, 18G8. Tour letter has reached Mr. Richmond and myself, asking us to go thither on the 2Gth and 27th. Listen. "We are engaged on the days named by you, but when our business is over wo will go to you —also as soon as the bad weather is over.

A.—No. 10.

44

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

I will write and let you know on what day you shall gather together to meet us. Do not be disappointed at our inability to meet you at the time named by you. R. Parris, To Patara Raukatauri, Tc Motu, and all of you, Te Taihua. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure 3 in No. 40. Kia Paeete,— Noema 26, 1868. Kua tae mai ta korua reta kia matou, kua kite matou, e raruraru ana koe i aku ra i whakarite ai 26-27. E hoa kia tere to tirotiro ite ra. E Parete kei Hangatahua matou kei te kainga o Kahu, me korero taua ki taua kainga. Na Motu, Kei Hangatahua.

[translation.] To Parris,— 26th November, 1868. Tour letter has come to us. "We have seen that you are engaged in business on the days named by us—26th and 27th. Friend. Appoint an early day. Parris, —"We are at Hangatahua, at Kahu's place; we had better meet at that place. Motu, At Hangatahua.

Enclosure 4 in No. 40. Niu Paremata, Noema 27, 18G8. E hoa e Patara, e Motu, koutou katoa, — Tenei ano taku kupu kia koutou me huihui tatou i te manei te 30 o nga ra o te marama nei kei Kaihihi ranei kei te Taihua ranei, otiia kei a koutou te wakaaro. Kahore ano he whare mo te tokomaha ki kona ki te kainga o Kahu, engari pea ki Kaihihi. Naku na Paeete, Hiwa Komihiana.

[translation.] Friends Patara, Motit, and all of you,— New Plymouth, 27th November, 1868. This is my word to you. Let us meet on Monday, the 30th instant, either at Kaihihi or Te Tahua, but the thought is with you. There is no house to accommodate a large number of persons at that place—at Kahu's place— but perhaps there may be at Kaihihi. E. Pabris, Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure 5 in No. 40. Te Taihua Taranaki, Noema 28, 18G8. He Panui ki nga Maori ki nga Pakeha kia whakamutua te korero teka, kua mutu te panui i te tekau ma waru o Hepetema kua mahuo ki muri, kua tukua atu e toku ringaringa kia Parete me ona hoa Pakeha i mea taua panui kaore he matenga tangata ki nga kuaha, kaore he ringaringa toto ki nga awaawa, kua mutu te patu, no to reme te ao, koia au i mea ai e te hunga korero teka o Kaihihi o Pahitere o te Taihua ranei Pakeha ranei i Okato i Tataraimaka ranei i whea ranei, kia mutu te korero teka, ko taua mahi he whakatara a ka kohuru, a ka kino, koia au i mea ai kia mutu te teka kia tango taku ringaringa i to £5 pauna i roto i o koutou arero. Ko taku whakaaro ko te riri ma tatou ko te whakawa anake ki te riteuga o te Ture ahakoa kiuo pai ranei. Ka mutu, Na Eaukatauri Bunoa.

[translation.] Te Taihua, Taranaki, 28th November, 1868. A Notification to both Pakehas and Maoris to desist from spreading false Beports. —The notice was issued on the 18th of September, which is now past, and has been given by my hand to Mr. Parris and his Pakeha friends. That panui was to the effect, that there would be no killing of men in the gateways, nor hands red with blood in the ravines ; slaying is at an end. The world is the Lamb's. That is why I say, O! lying ones of Kaihihi, Pahitere, and Te Taihua, or of the Pakehas at Okato, Tataraimaka, and elsewhere, to cease false-speaking, that results in irritation and murder, and evil (war) ensues; therefore, I say, cease from lying, that my hand may take £5 from each of your tongues. My idea is, that the only striving which ought to exist between us should be to settle matters in accordance with the law, whether good or bad. That is all. Eaukatauri Bunoa.

Enclosure 6 in No. 40. List of Friendly Chiefs who accompanied the Civil Commissioner to a Native Meeting held at To Taihua, 30th November, IS6B : —

A.—No. 10.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

45

Hoera Tiwa, Te Tahana, Ihaia Kirikumara, Te Waka, Teira Manuka, Poharama, Mahau, Hoera Parepare, Hami te Earo, Eopata Ngarongomate, Wi Paki, Kornene Tupoki, Eopiha Haungenge, Matene Tupoki, And about ten others.

No. 41. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to Mr. Gr. S. Coopee. (No. 322.) Sin,— New Plymouth, 4th December, 18G8. Before I went away to the South last month, I engaged the old chief Nepetarima, Hapurona's uncle, to go through the Ngatimaru district to obtain information relative to the state of feeling ot the Natives of that part in reference to the present critical condition of the country. Nepetarima came in to me on Saturday last to report the result of his visit, and from what he has gathered it appears that some of the Ngatiawa Natives, under Wm. Kingi te Eangitake and Ilajiurona wanted to join Titokowaru —that is, they proposed that all should go in for it. The chief agitators were Wm. Tamihana, formerly of Kaipakopako, and Eeimana Eeretawangawanga, formerly of Waitara. At a meeting to consider the question, a taiaha was laid down before Wm. King, as an indication of the wishes of some amongst them, an old custom of submitting a proposal to go to war. Wm. King took the taiaha in his hand and addressed his people, refusing to have anything to do with it, and threw the taiaha over a cliff into the Waitara Eiver. Nepetarima tells me that very wonderful reports of Titokowaru's successes are sent through the country (which of course is not to be wondered at), but he assures me that Wm. King and Hapurona continue to refuse to sanction fighting in their district. Hapurona requested Nepe to tell me not to be anxious about his district; that the only matter he was dark about was the uncertainty about Ngatimaniapoto ; that if they were to decide to come this •way, the Pukearuhe District might be thrown into confusion, but that he did not think they would come without his having some warning, when he would immediately let me know; that if they came into his district he should request them to go and join Titokowaru. Hapurona also stated that if Titokowaru continues successful, he will be likely on his return from the south to march through the Taranaki coast towards this district, but that he was not at all likely to come to the back of the mountain. I have, &c, E. Parris, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 42. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeris to Mr. Gr. S. Cooper. (No. 4.) Sie, — New Plymouth, 2nd January, 1869. With reference to my letter of the 21st ultimo, reporting arrangements which I had made to visit the Taranaki Natives, I have now the honor to report, for the information of His Excellency's Government, that on Monday the 21st ult., I left this with about 150 of our friendly Natives, which were made up to 200 on arriving at Pahitere, Eopata Ngarongomate's place, at Kaihihi, Porikapa's place, and at Taihua, the place of the Ngamahangas. The disaffected Kingites, under the young chief Te Whiti, occupy the Warea district, our southern frontier, to which party a small section of the Ngamahangas under Te Motu (Hairini) is also allied ; and the recent action of Te Motu in reference to the Okato settlers, as reported in my letter of the 3rd December, 18G8 (No. 319), was the cause of a great deal of uneasiness and suspicion as to the intentions of those Natives, and differenco of opinion as to the best course to adopt in such an emergency. A large majority of the settlers were in favour of putting the district on a war footing at once, by calling out the Militia for active service to occupy all the block-houses ; but this I strenuously opposed in the absence of any overt act of violence on the part of the .Natives, believing such a course would be fraught with danger to the settlement. Fortunately, His Honor the Superintendent, and Major Stapp, the officer commanding the Militia, favoured my views of the question. An invitation having been received from those Natives to visit them, I determined to venture a personal communication with them, in which I was met by opposition from some of our friendly Natives, who were very suspicious of treachery and danger, and proposed that if we went we should go armed. This lof course set my face against, as it would have been highly injudicious, and certain of failure if not of disaster. Te Motu lives at Taihua, where we stopped on Monday night; and before leaving the following morning the question of the probability of danger was discussed, which Te Motu repudiated; nevertheless, some of my party would insist upon the necessity of being " tupato" (cautious). From Taihua to Pariaka, there is a much nearer track for foot travellers than the one for horses, and as our party was about 70 on foot and 130 on horseback, it was proposed that the former should go by the nearest track. This, however, was at once opposed, and orders given that the whole party should keep together. From Taihua we followed the coast line for five miles to Kapoaiaia, where we struck inland ; and on arriving at Waikoukou we received a message from Pariaka, requesting us to remain at Waikoukou for the night, which we did, Te Motu remaining with us. 12

A.—No. 10,

46

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

"Wednesday morning everybody decorated their beads with "parepare," and as soon as the order of procession was arranged we advanced upon Pariaka, about one mile and a half distant, where we found a village with about thirty bouses on the banks of tbe "Waitotara Biver, a secluded spot in the dense forest, where there were about 300 Natives assembled to meet us. "We encamped in a small clearing outside tbe village, and received a very cheerful welcome from the inhabitants in their usual friendly salutations. After we had been there a short time, a party of about twenty, under the young chief Kukutai, came out of the village to address us. Their speeches were couched in very moderate language, coloured a little now and then with banter, which was very effectually rebutted by our friends, and perfect goodhumour sustained throughout. In the meantime food was being prepared in the village, and the uncovering of the ovens was a signal for the stir and bustle consequent upon an occasion of " tuku kai ma te taua manuhiri" (supplying food for visitors), which was brought by about a hundred men and women, —prepared maize, potatoes and pork, &c, &c. After they had laid down the food they performed a " Ngeri," a very interesting sight, and one I have not witnessed for many years—something like a war dance, but void of its distortions of countenance, and more joyful than defiant. The following morning, Thursday, the young chief Tamihana, son of Aperahama te Keke, came out of tbe village with a small party with branches of shrubs in their hands, and advanced towards us till within about fifty yards, when they commenced to retire, waving their branches as a token for us to go into the village. Our party soon fell in, and I was put in front, with Poharama and Eopata Ngarongomate, in which order we all marched into the village, where they had cleared a large space on one side, and covered it with ferns and leaves for our reception, whilst they themselves were all grouped together on the opposite side of the village. A long " tangi " ensued ; but before it had subsided Te AVhiti requested them to stop, and as soon as the old women were prevailed upon, Te "Whiti commenced to address us. He commenced by putting the following question,separately,to Poharama, Eopata, Mahau, Tahana, Porikapa, and others :" E tangi ana koe ki a wai ? " As none of our Natives attempted to reply, he put the same question to me. " E Parete e tangi ana koutou ki a wai ? " I rose and turned to our people, and asked them if they wished me to answer Te Whiti's question. They replied in the affirmative. I then said, " E hoa eTe Whiti e tangi ana matou mo nga kanohi o nga tangata kua ngaro, e kore taua e taea te hura te whakaara ki te ora; e tangi ana matou mo nga kanohi a nga tangata kua ngaro i nga tau maha, katahi ano matou ka kite i tenei ra ; ko koe e Te Whiti tetahi; i whea koe me to kanohi huna." (" Friend Te "Whiti, we are crying for the lost faces of those whom neither you nor I can exhume and raise to life ; we are crying for those lost faces for many years which we now see for the first time ; you, Te Whiti, are one of them; where have you been hiding your face ?") Te Whiti replied, " E marama ana o kupu " (your words are clear) ; "we have been lost to you, and you have been lost to us ; let those great matters of difference which have separated us be settled by kings, governors, prophets, and leading men ; let bad works be put a stop to." This was the purport of his speech, which was delivered in a very calm manner, himself evidently full of superstitious ideas with regard to supernatural influences, the effect no doubt of a secluded life, which he has been living for many years. Te Motu, who is looked upon as a tohunga in the tribe, was in a small house close by all the time Te AVhiti was talking, engaged in prayer; but the chief tohunga (Hemi Tohu) we did not see, but it was supposed he was engaged all the time in some superstitious ceremony or other. AVe were told that in a day or two Te Whiti would issue a proclamation, which we were requested by Te Motu to wait for. No fixed time was mentioned, nor did any one appear to know what it was to be. Thursday and Friday (the latter Christmas-day) nothing occurred more than mixing with them in the most friendly manner. I myself often visited Te AVhiti across the river. Saturday morning ] went to him, and told him that tbat day and the following one (Sunday) I should give him to search out the end of his thoughts in reference to ourselves (my party), who were thinking of returning. He simply replied, " E marama ana o kupu " (your words are clear). Monday morning I went to him for the last time, and asked him if he had anything he wished to say, as we were leaving, when he asked me if I had seen clearly that we ought to return (" Kua tau te tika ki a koe mo te hoki") ; meaning, had it been supernaturally communicated to me. On leaving Te AVhiti I saw Te Motu, who pressed me very much to stay longer, but I told him I could not, as I had other matters which I must attend to ; but I promised to leave Poharama, Eopata, and Tahana, who agreed to remain for a day or two longer. They came in Thursday evening, and reported that nothing new bad occurred after I left, but brought a message for me to go back to them again on the 27th, which, according to their calendar, is to-morrow. They say that their time (calendar) is right and ours is wrong. AVm. Kingi te Eangitake was there, but he refused to see us the first time out of his own district; but his brother Enoka and his grandson Eruera and five others, all the AVaitara Natives who were there, were very friendlv and sociable with us. More, from Tokangamutu, was also there, and was very sociable with my party. On Sunday evening he made a long speech, couched in the most peaceful terms. He stated that when he left Tokangamutu, he was requested to inquire into the cause of Titokowaru's proceedings, which he had done, and was of opinion that he was wrong and must be left to his fate. More stated that this was his last visit, and that he purposed returning as soon as Te Whiti had issued his edict (proclamation) to Tokangamutu, by the coast line through the Town of New Plymouth, taking with him what Waikatos there were now in the district—about ten or twelve, I should think, who were stopping with More in one house, ready for the departure. Hoani AVarekawa, the chief who sold Tataraimaka to the Government, and who, with his sons, were Te Motu's backers on the occasion of the meeting which was held at Taihua, as reported in my letter ofthe 3rd ultimo, No. 319, has promised that there shall be no more interference in reference to the Okato settlers, which district he went through since we returned from Pariaka, to reassure the settlers of good feeling towards them. Our Assessors and leading men who accompanied me are exceedingly pleased at the result of the meeting, and are very sanguine aa to the peaceful intentions of the Taranaki tribes. AVm. Kingi

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

47

A.—No. 10,

Matakatea, of TJmuroa, having heard that I was going to the meeting, very kindly came and joined us on our way to Pariaka, and kept with us the whole time we were there, as a Government man in opposition to Kingites, which without doubt the Pariaka Natives are, with Te Whiti as a little king over them. Their kindness and hospitality was beyond all expectation, and they appeared to have food in great abundance, and in appearance were very healthy, with a large proportion of children under, I should say, ten years of age; I counted myself over sixty. The people of this place have made an enormous quantity of mats called peupcus, which a Native frequently wears two of, one around his waist and one over his shoulders. On arriving at Pariaka, we were surprised to see an European make his appearance with nothing but two peupeus upon him, as above described. The Natives called him Pato. As soon as I had an opportunity of speaking to him, I questioned him as to his antecedents, and how he came amongst the the Natives, when he told me that he was for some time working in New Plymouth, until about a year ago, when he started to go to Wanganui overland ; that on leaving he was destitute of money or food, and had scarcely any clothing ; that on arriving at Kapoaiaia, three miles south of Warea, he was taken ill and became very weak, and was unable to proceed on his journey ; that the Natives found him in an exhausted condition, and were very kind to him, and offered to take him to their place at Pariaka, which he agreed to; that he had been living with them ever since, and had received the greatest kindness from them. He told me that his name was James Murphy, and that ho had a wife and four children at Bangitikei, where some years ago he was a settler and had sixty acres of land ; but that the conduct of his wife had caused him to leave her and his family, and brought him to his present condition. The result of the meeting has had a very good effect upon the settlers, who now begin to think that the action I have taken in the critical condition of the settlement is preferable to the location of armed forces on our frontier, to menace and provoke hostilities, which some argued could not be averted, and which I confess I had very serious doubts about myself, after the continuous successes of those in rebellion against the Government, which I was afraid would be considered a favourable opportunity for a reunion of all the disaffected tribes to make one general effort against the Government of the country, under the King movement; which question, as I have often represented, will have to be met in some shape or other by the Government. The question of confiscation was not once referred to at the meeting by the Natives, and I deemed it not advisable to do so myself, pending the final issue of the endeavours of the Government to punish atrocious offenders in other parts. I cannot close this report without again bringing under the notice of the Government the very valuable assistance rendered by our friendly Natives, at a time when they have had to neglect their crops to serve the district and the Government. I was obliged to incur some little expense for supplies for them, and trust the Government will not disapprove thereof. I have, &c, E. Parris, The Under Native Secretary, "Wellington, Civil Commissioner.

No. 43. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. (No. 28.) Sie, — New Plymouth, 3rd February, 18G9. I have the honor to report, for the information of His Excellency's Government, that a party of loyal Natives under the chiefs Poharama of Moturoa, and Ihaia of Waitara, paid a visit to the Natives of the Ngatimaru district, a section of the Puketapu Tribe who have been away with the disaffected tribes since 1863. Last week they returned, accompanied by "Wiremu Tamihana and his wife, the daughter of the great Pukotapu chief, Toheroa, and about twenty others, all of the Puketapu Tribe, and are now at Mahau's place. They purpose returning in a few days, and will be accompanied by some of our Natives, who go for the purpose of assisting them to bring out their canoes, preparatory to their coming out and settling down with their friends. The end of last month I spent a week at Mimi and Pukearuho with the Natives returned from the Chatham Islands, showing them some small parcels of land reserved from the Military Settlers' Grants for Native purposes, which land I have promised them in connection with the resident Natives, who are behaving very kindly and liberally towards them. The principal block of land for them will have to be surveyed some future day, inland of the Military Settlers' lines, but at present they wish to live together until the state of the country is more settled. They are now living at Maruweni, on the north bank of the L Trenui Eiver, within hail of the redoubt, which is on the south bank of the river. I purpose leaving in a few days to go through the Taranaki district, and on so far as Kaupokonui, to see the Natives who have recently withdrawn from the Ngatiruanui district, to avoid complicity during military operations against Titokowaru. I have, Ac, E. Parris, The Under Native Secretary, "Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 44. Copy of a Letter from Mr. B. Parris to the Hon. J. C. Eiciimond. (No. 29.) Sir,— New Plymouth, 18th February, 18G9. The very painful duty devolves upon me of having to report for the information of His Excellency's Government the massacre of eight Europeans, and amongst them the Eev. Mr. Whiteley,

A.—No. 10.

48

REPORTS EROM OEFICERS

on Saturday last, the 13th instant, at Pukearuhe. These murders it is believed were committed by four Mokau Natives (whose names I give below), who came up from Mokau on the Bth instant, and were stopping until Saturday morning with the Urenui Natives, fraternizing with them and the European settlers, and professing to be friendly disposed. They left Urenui on Saturday morning to return to Mokau, and on their way back called at Mr. Messenger's and at Mr. MacDonald's, the latter about five miles from the Pukearuhe Block-house, where the foul deed was committed. The Rev. Mr. Whiteley left Mr. MacDonald's about bud set on Saturday evening, on his way to Pukearuhe, where ho purposed to hold service early on Sunday morning, and call again at Mr. MacDonald's in the forenoon on his return; but up to Monday morning, nothing having been heard of him, Mr. MacDonald's son rode on to Pukearuhe to ascertain what was detaining him. On arriving at the entrance to the redoubt, he saw both Mr. Whiteley and his horse lying dead in the road, the sight of which convinced him that the Europeans at that place —three men, one woman, and three children —had all been killed; and under this conviction, and the probability of his own danger, he turned his horse and gallopped back to warn the settlers on the Mirai, Waiiti Block, and to report to Captain Good at Urenui, who sent word into town, and sent out a covering party to Mimi for the settlers moving into Urenui. The news was received in town on Monday, about 4 p.m. The s.s. " Wellington " was in the roadstead, and by her fifty stand of arms and ammunition was immediately sent off to Urenui, as that post was ill-provided for an emergency, there being only twenty stand of arras there, the Government having called them all in from the Native holders some months ago. The Government is of course aware that the Chatham Island Natives left their arms, &c, in charge of Captain Thomas on leaving that place. The s.s. "Wellington" returned the following day to the roadstead, and took on board fifty Volunteers and steamed to Waiiti, where they were landed the same evening, about three miles from Pukearuhe, a party of mounted men having ridden down overland to be present to cover their landing. In the evening the mounted men rode on to Pukearuhe, and found the body of the Rev. Mr. Whiteley lying at the same place, .and also discovered a place with dead bodies in it, but it being late did not remain to exhume them that evening. During Tuesday night we had three shells made at Urenui for the corpses, and early on Wednesday morning Captain Good went off with a party of Natives and two carts, and, with the Europeans at Waiiti, proceeded to Pukearuhe to recover the bodies. The Rev. Mr. Whiteley was found in the same place, on the road leading into the redoubt. Mr. Gascoigne, wife, and three children, were found in a hole covered up with earth. The two Military Settlers, Richards and Mullen, were found in the track leading down to the Waikaramarama Gully, at the back of the redoubt. The block-house was burnt down, and Mr. Gascoigne's house, a small raupo building ; other raupo houses were left standing. A sow with young pigs were shut up in a sty, and two cows were tethered, and a lot of poultry (about all the domesticated animals at the place) apparently had not been interfered with. Tlie bodies were all brought away, and put on board a cargo-boat at Waiiti on Wednesday afternoon. The s.s. " Phoebe," which arrived here yesterday (Wednesday), was kindly sent to meet the boat, which she towed up to the roadstead. An inquest is now being held, and the interment is to take place this afternoon. This melancholy occurrence has cast a gloom over the settlement and alarmed the out-settlers, who are bringing their families into town. The Ngatiawa and Taranaki Natives profess to be as much surprised as we ourselves at this very treacherous and unexpected occurrence. Arrangements have been made to occupy the district block-house for the time, pending instructions from the Government, in order to give the settlers confidence to get in their crops. Up to the present time there is not the slightest appearance of a rising, but what it will lead to it is impossible to say. I have sent Natives into all the disaffected districts to ascertain the feeling of the people in reference to the murders. I trust His Excellency's Government will excuse me for suggesting that this is a favourable opportunity for proving whether Matutaera and his Council really mean peace or war. He has for a long time been declaring for peace, and proposing that questions in dispute should bo settled by investigation, and that crime and offences should be left for the law to deal with. The following are the names of the four Natives who were at Urenui for a week, and left that place on the morning of Saturday, the 13th instant, and who are (without a single dissentient among the Natives of the district) suspected of being the murderers —Rawiri, elderly Native, say 50 years of age ; Ritimana Ponga, Hone Pihama, Henry Phillips (half-caste), young men; all residents of Mokau Heads. I have, &c, The Hon. the Minister for Native Affairs, R. Paeeis, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 45. Copy a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. (No. 32.) Sib,— , New Plymouth, 20th February, 18G9. In further reference to my reports of the 18th and 19th instant, I have the honor to forward an extract from a letter just received from Captain Good, from Urenui. The news from the Ngatiawa. and Taranaki out-districts is so far favourable, inasmuch as those Natives express themselves in the strongest reprehensible terms with regard to the Pukearuhe murders. A Native from the Mitni district has consented to go in the direction of Mokau, for the purpose of trying to obtain further information. I have, &c, The Hon. the Minister for Native Affairs, E. Pabbis, Wellington. Civil Comissioner.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

49

A.—No. 10.

Enclosure in No. 45. [EXTEACT.] Sie, — Urenui, Saturday, 20th February, 1869. The news from Ngatimaru is satisfactory; Horomona arrived yesterday by way of the Tuaho, and Rangitake's wife Heni (Jane) by way of Tupari. The murders at Pukearuhe are viewed by the whole of them with extreme disapproval. I have, &c, R. Parris, Esq. T. Good.

No. 46. Copy of a Letter from Mr. R. Paeeis to the Hon. Mr. J. C. Richmond. (No. 33.) Sie, — New Plymouth, 23rd February, 1869. I have the honor to forward herewith copies of letters as per margin, conveying the latest information respecting the Pukearuhe murders, which, if true, exonerates the four Natives who visited Urenui. The letter signed Titokorangi is the Maori name of Eawiri, who states that he had a narrow escape of his own life for opposing the chief Wetere Ta Kerei in hu advance upon Pukearuho for the purpose of excuting his plans for the massacre of the Europeans of that post. The letters from Mokau were obtained by a Native who volunteered to go there from the Mimi district, where he has been living with some followers of Wm. King's for a long time past. He is a Waikato Native named Haiti. Ho reports that at Mokau ho saw a war party of 110 under the chiefs Wetere Ta Kerei and Tikaokao (the baptized name of the latter is Tawhana) ; and that they told him that Tapihana was expected with 100 more. That they should remain at Mokau for the Governor's army to attack them ; but Te Haiti recommends us not to believe that they will remain at Mokau, being himself of opinion that they will advance upon the Pukearuhe district. Fortunately they can do us but little injury in that district, as there is but a very small quantity of crops, and about four very indifferent settlers' houses there. The cattle have all been brought away. I have therefore recommended that none of our limited forces should be stationed beyond Urenui. Hapurona and Wiremu Tamihana have pledged themselves to oppose their bringing war into their district, and to advise them to return to Mokau. That if they refuse to do so, they will give us warning. The Taranaki tribes continue to declare their disapprobation of the conduct of Ngatimaniapoto and their determination to remain quiet. Several hundred natives assemble this day at the Public Cemetery, to cry over the grave of their cruelly murdered and universally beloved missionary, the Rev. Mr. Whiteley, than whom no one perhaps better understood Native character, and who (with all others Europeans and Natives) was completely thrown off his guard by the friendly visit of the four Natives from the Ngatimaniapoto Tribe, and who, if Eawiri's letter is true, meant friendship and were not aware of the treacherous design of the chiefs Wetere Ta Kerei and Tikaokao, until they met the party under Wetere on the North side of the White Cliffs, two miles from Pukearuhe. I have, &c., The Hon. the Minister of Native Affairs, It. Paerts, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

Wetere to Kupapas, Feb. 19, 1869. Wetero to Maruwelii Natives, Feb. 19, 1869. Titoltorangi to Maruwelii Natives, Feb. 19, 1869. Hapurona to Mr. Parris, Feb. 20, 1869. Mr. Good to Mr. Parris, Feb. 21, 18G9.

Enclosure 1 in No. 46. Mokau, 19th Pepuere, 1869. Ki nga Kupapa timata i te Pihanga tae atu ki o rohe katoa, rere mai ki uta ki te kore koe e pai ki uta, noho marire, waiho maua ko te Kawana ki mahi ana ita maua mea. Takoto atu kei titiro koe ki maui ki matau. Heoi Na Weteee. Na Tawhana.

[translation.] Mokau, 19th February, 1869. To the Kupapas commencing at Te Pihanga, thence throughout all your boundaries : Come up to the interior ; it' you do not like the interior, remain quiet. Leave me aud the Governor to carry on our own work. Sit quietly where you are, look not to the right or left. "Weteee and Tawhana.

Enclosure 2 in No. 46. Mokau, 19th Pepuere, 1869. Haebe atu e tenei reta panui ki te heke o Maruwelii kia Wi Tamihana, kia Riwai, kia Ketu, kia Pamariki, kia te Rakatau, kia Paekaho, kia koutou katoa, tena koutou i roto i te atawhai o te Atua. He ki kotahi kia koutou, noho marire i to koutou kainga i Maruwelii, hei oho koe ki ta maua mea ko Kawana waiho kia maua. E hikoi aliau ito taha waiho kia haere ana; takoto ete Iwi i runga ite Kaweka nui ta maua malii waiho maua kia mahi ana, kei peka koe ki maui ki matau ka tangi teuei manu te pitongatonga titiro titiro kaua e titiro. Heoi ano, Ka "Weteee. Na Tawiiana. 13

A.—No. 10,

50

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

[Translation.] Mokau, 19th February, 1869. Go this letter to the Maruwehi, to Wi Tamihana, Eiwai, Ketu, and Pamariki, Te Eakatau Paekaho, and all of you. Salutations to you in tho love of God. This is a single word to you: live quietly at your own place at Maruwehi. Be not alarmed at what the Governor and I are doing, leave us to ourselves; if I step along beside you, leave me to walk unmolested by you. Best, O people, upon your high place of observation ;if ours becomes a great work, leave us alone to do it. Do not go either to the left or right. When this little bird the pitongatonga says " Look, look," do not look. "Weteee and Tawhana.

Enclosure 3 in No. 46. Mokau, Pepuere 19, 1869. Kia Tamihana, kia Riwai, kia Heremaia, kia koutou katoa, Tena koutou. Kia rongo mai koutou, kaua hei rapu ki au, kaua hold iaui te tuatahi i tenei i rokohangamni eauki Te Horo. I hopukia matou ki reira. Ka whakahokia mai e au i reira, wahi iti ahau kua mate, i mau nei te patiti moku, na to rerenga. Heoi ano, Na Titokoeanoi.

[teajjslatiox.] Mokau, 19th February, 1809. To Tamihana, Riwai, Heremaia, to all of you. Salutations. Give heed all of you. Do not let there be any inquiry (or search) after me, not after me at the first. As it is they were found by mo at Te Horo; we were overtaken there. I sent them back from there. I was very nearly killed; the hatchet was unloosed wherewith to kill me, but slipped. Titokoeanoi.

Enclosure 4 in No. 46. Te Kawau Pa, Pepuere 20, 18G9. Haeee atu ra e taku reta aroha Ida Te Retimana raua ko Parete. E koro ma tena korua, kua rongo matou kua mate nga Pakeha i Pukearuhe e Ngatimaniapoto. E kore au e poauau noa ki tena ritenga e whiti ana te maramatanga i roto i au. E hoa eTe Retimana korua ko Parete, he kupu atu kia korua kaua e nohoia a Tikorangi a Te Arei e nga hoia, waiho kia takoto te ara a to kaumatua o Kaiwhakarua ko te tuatahi tena, ko te tuarua, ko Tamihana ratou ko ana tamariki kia waiho ma nga iwi tana e whakakino, maku kahorc kia waiho mau e piki mai i te ara a tu kaumatua, e hara tena he i au ko taku whakaaro kei to kaumatua. Heoi ano tako kupu. Kia Parete. Na Tuahutabaxgi Hapueona. Kia Te Rctimana.

[teanslatjox.] Te Kawau Pa, 20th February, 18G9. Go this my letter of love to Mr. Richmond and Parris. Sirs, salutations. We have heard that the Pakehas at Pukearuhe have been killed by Ngatimaniapoto. Sirs, listen: I will not join in this matter, the light shines within me. Friend Mr. Richmond, you and Parris. This is a word of mine to you two. Do not let Tikorangi and Te Arei be occupied by the troops. Leave the road of your old man, of Kai Whakarua to lie. That is the first matter. Secondly, as regards Tamihana and his children, let it be for the other tribes to bring evil here, as for myself Ido not intend to do so; if I leave it to be for you yourself to seek retaliation according to the doing of your old man (Kai Whakarua), that will not be my fault ; my thought is that the mode of dealing in this will be the same as that of your old man, viz., that innocent as well as guilty will be called to account for this. That is all, &c. TiTAIIUTAEANGI HaPTJEONA.

Enclosure 5 in No. 46. Copy of a Letter from Mr. T. Good to Mr. Paeeis. Mr deae Paehis, — TJrenui, 21st February, 1869. I have learned more minute particulars concerning the deaths of Europeans at Pukearuhe. The war party arrived at the Cliffs in broad day. Only two Europeans were at the Block-house, Richards and McMilno. These were enticed away by being told that there were a number of pigs for sale on the beach. McMilne went first; he was tomahawked on the road leading to the beach. Seeing that Richards did not follow, the murderers returned, urging him to come and look at the pigs. The unfortunate man followed, and was killed near to where MeMilne fell. The " taua " party then rushed up to the redoubt; Lieutenant Gascoigne, wife, and children were absent, being in their field of corn and potatoes situated on Pukearuhe township. On looking up he observed Natives at the Block-house. He at once returned towards them, carrying the youngest child, Mrs. Gascoigne and the other two children following. On arriving at the little stream at the base of the hill upon which the Block-house stood, Lieutenant Gascoigne turned and gave the child to his wife, going forward to see the Maoris. Upon meeting with the scoundrels they shook hands with him right and left, accompanying him to his own door. Upon Lieutenant Gascoigne raising his hand to open the door of the house, he was struck from behind, and there fell. Soon after Mrs. Gascoigne came with her children, when they were all killed.

A.—No. I<l

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

51

About sunset Mr. Whiteley was seen approaching on horseback, though not recognised until descending the hill leading to the old pa. He was permitted to advance, cross the stream, and ascend the hill opposite. He was then met and ordered to return: this the poor gentleman refused to do. His horse was then shot, and Mr. Whiteley himself killed by five shots. The rebels are said to be posted at the Tirohanga, near Katikatiaki, beyond the White Cliffs. Brevet-Major Stapp will show you my letter to him. I will do the best I can until I see you. Tours sincerely, Thomas Good.

No. 47. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to the Hon. J. C. Richmond. (No. 41.) Sir,— New Plymouth, 4th March, 1869. I have the honor to report, for the information of Hia Excellency's Government, that up to the present time no signs whatever have been detected of any Ngatimaniapotos having been in the district this side of the White Cliffs, since the massacre on the 13th ultimo ; and while some of our Natives are of opinion that they are not likely to come away from Mokau, but will wait, expecting to be attacked there, others say that they believe that after waiting for some time, and finding we are not likely to go to Mokau, they will then, if in sufficient force, advance upon this district, and commence offensive operations. In this they will be opposed by Hapurona, who intends to advise them to return to Mokau, and confine their fighting to that quarter. There is a meeting of Natives now assembled at Pariaka, at which the action of Ngatimaniapoto in the Pukearuhe massacre will be discussed. I have sent Eopata, Tahana, and Patara to attend the meeting. More, from Tokangamutu, is there, and also a party of about twenty of Ahitana's Natives from Te Ngahere, who arrived yesterday morning. Ahitana's Natives report that Titokowaru's followers are leaving him, in consequence of his intriguing with their women, and that ho is expected to return to To Ngutu-o-te-Manu very shortly. Hone Pihama will keep a good look-out for his retirement west of Patea ; which, when true, he will immediately report to me, and I shall then send oft* an express to Colonel Whitmore, as requested by the Honourable the Defence Minister. I have, &c, The Hon. the Minister for Native Affairs, E. Paeris, AVellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 48. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Pareis to the Hon. J. C. Eichmond. (No. 43.) Sir,— New Plymouth, 4th March, 18G9. I have the honor to report for the information of His Excellency's Government, that early this morning Enoka, the brother of Wiremu Kingi te Rangitake, came to my house, the first time he has been in the town of New Plymouth since the war. Enoka has been stopping with his brother, Te Eangitake, at Pariaka, for several months, with Te "Whiti and the Warca Natives. The late massacre at Pukearulic by the Ngatimaniapoto, has been fully discussed at Pariaka, and Enoka informs me that the only conclusion they can arrive at is, that the take or cause of it is the return of the Ngatitamas from the Chatham Islands ; and that the Pukearuhe massacre is intended by the Ngatimaniapotos as a declaration of their intention not to surrender Poutama to the Ngatitamas, a district which includes part of the Pukearuhe Military Settlers' settlement, extending nearly to the Mokau River, and which was originally owned and occupied by Ngatitama, until they were expelled by Waikato, about thirtyfive years ago. It is difficult to explain why they should murder Europeans as a warning to the Ngatitamas not to occupy any part of Poutama, but that is the decision of the whole of the Ngatiawa and Taranaki tribes. It is true that those murdered, all but the Bev. Mr. AV rhiteley, were living on the Poutama district, and that the Ngatitama, although they had not as yet gone on to the land, were intending to do so, which Ngatimaniapoto had no doubt heard of. "W. Kingi Eangitake and Te Vhiti requested Enoka to come in this way, being much the shortest way to get to the Ngatiawas north of Waitara, the purport of his visit being to advise them to have nothing to do with Ngatimaniapoto, as they believe the talce to be as before stated. The returned Natives from the Chatham Islands have declared their intention to fight against Ngatimaniopoto, and I shall not be surprised if it leads to a reunion of the whole of the Ngatiawa tribes to defend their tribal rights, which would do more to break up the King faction than anything else. . I have, &c, The Hon. the Minister for Native Affairs, 31. Pabrts, "Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 49. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeris to Mr. G. S. Cooper. (No. G3.) Sib, — New Plymouth, 20th March, 1869. I have the honor to report, for the information of His Excellency's Government, that during the past fortnight a large number of Natives from different districts have been assembled at Pariaka, inland of Warea, for the purpose of hearing the final decision of the young chief Te Whiti (whose

A.—No. 10.

52

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

influence is very considerable in this Province, and also w Tith Tawhiao, the so-called King), with regard to the present state of the relations of the two races. I was invited to attend the meeting, but on account of the uncertainty of the movements of Ngatimaniapoto, I deemed it unadvisable to do so, and excused myself on those grounds. I sent Mahau, Tahana, Ropata, and Kipa, and a number besides accompanied them. They have this ia.y returned with a most favourable account of the result of the meeting, full particulars of which I will endeavour to forward by next mail. The whole of the Taranaki tribes were present, and also Hone Pihama and Natanahira, with their following from Oeo. There were also about twenty of Ahitana's people, from Te Ngahere, there. I have, &c., E. Paeris, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 50. Copy of a Letter from His Honor H. E. Richmond to Mr. G. S. Cooper. Superintendent's Office, New Plymouth, Sie, — 2nd April, ] 869. I have the honor to forward herewith copies of correspondence relative to a proposal to move part of the forces of this district to the aid of Colonel Whitmore, who was at Te Ngaere, with the Colonial forces, in the Patea District. It will be seen by Major Brown's memorandum of 2Gth March, that Mr. Parris and myself both assented to the proposal of Colonel Whitmore to march a force from this district by way of the mountain road to Te Ngaere, and as Major Brown asked Mr. Parris to assist him to get fifty Natives for the expedition, he sent for Ihaia, Teira, and Mahau, for the purpose of arranging for that number of Natives. On arriving in town Mr. Parris explained to them the proposed expedition, when they all three of them most earnestly and emphatically warned us that if we sent the forces through the neutral district of the Ngatiawas (without being led there by the enemy), after the understanding which had been arrived at with the Ngatiawa and Taranaki tribes, we should upset everything that has been done with them to secure the neutrality of their respective districts as against Titokowaru and Ngatirnaniapoto, and drive them again into hostilities. This declaration made by three chiefs who have stood by the Government through many years of difficulties, was considered sufficient reason for reconsidering the approval given by Mr. Parris and myself to Major Brow Tn's memorandum submitted to us, and which, after a consultation with Major Brown and four other gentlemen called in for the purpose (Major Stapp, the Provincial Secretary, Mr. Thomas King, and Mr. Chilman), led to the withdrawal of the previously-given approval and to the subsequent correspondence with Major Brown and Colonel Whitinore. It is of course quite possible that the expedition might have proceeded without any evil resulting, but it seemed inexpedient, at this critical juncture, to risk making enemies of tribes who for some time past have shown an increasing tendency to keep quiet, and who from their position might inflict grievous losses on our settlement, but are not likely ever to take up arms against us if success should attend our operations henceforward, against more formidable enemies, such as the Ngatimaniapotos and Ngatiruanui. On the day after our advice was given against the intended movement, letters arrived from Colonel "Whitmorc, countermanding it, on the ground that it was probable Titokowaru had left the Ngaere. There is, however, much reason to believe that he is still there, and that Hapurona's influence has prevented him from obtaining a refuge in the Ngatimaru District. I enclose a copy of a minute taken by Major Brown, of Ihaia's statements on this subject. I have further the honor to inform you that three Natives who went up to Mokau about a week ago, to accompany More, the Waikato peacemaker, on his way northwards, arrived at Urenui on Friday, bringing intelligence that a considerable war party was at Mokau, and further stating that the murders at White Cliffs w rcro approved by Tawhiao. I have not myself had an opportunity of seeing any of these men, but they have been examined by Ihaia, of Waitara, and the enclosed minute, taken also by Major Brown, gives the substance of what they report. News of this was immediately forwarded to Colonel Whitmore, and Mr. Parris, who w yent to Opunake on Friday afternoon ; and letters from Colonel Whitmoro were received back yesterday morning, stating that, under the circumstances, operations against Titokowaru would probably be suspended, and that he should come to Waitara by the mountain road with his main body, and send up camp equipage and a detachment of men by the " Sturt." I also enclose for your information a minute of evidence as to the war party at Mokau, taken before the Hon. J. C. Eichmond. No further news has been received to this date, and as the " Airedale" brought no report as to the Kins: having sanctioned the murders, it is probable that it is untrue. I have, &c, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. H. E. Eiciimond, Superintendent.

Enclosure 1 in No. 50. Ihaia and Mahau came to the Militia Office at two p.m. this day. Ihaia states that three Natives, Te Wetu, Neretene, and Nuku arrived at about 11.30 p.m. last night at Waitara, having left Mokau the night before, whither they had gone with More and his party. They report that there are four hundred Ngatimaniapotos tliere, principally young men, under Tikaokao, Te Ilialare Wakahoehoe, Wetere, Karauti, Te Kuri Taunui, Wata Taonui, and others. They stated that it was their intention to come from time to time to Pukearuke, to see if the Pakcha was attempting to occupy it, and if so, to drive him from it. Te Whakahoehoe spoke, and said the sword was now drawn: that when the settlers at White Cliffs were killed, the King was informed of it: that

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

53

the captain was killed, his wife was killed, and the children were killed ; others were killed, and the Ecv. Mr. Whitcley and his horse ; the wedding ring taken from Mrs. Gascoigne's body was shown to the King, the watch taken from Mr. Whitcley was shown to the King, and also the saddle taken from the horse was shown to him. The King then rubbed himself all over with Kokowai, and went out and spoke, " Gold has been found at Tongariro, and a road has been made to Tongariro ; let three hundred men go to Tongariro, let three hundred men go to Kawia, let three hundred men go to Hangatiki, let two hundred men go Kihikihi, let two hundred men go to Mokau." The Huatare then rose up and said, " What shall be done with Searancke ?" and the King answered, " He comes and he goes, he can be disposed of." "Na te Kingi ano te wakaaetanga kea mate nga Pakeha ki Pukearuhe, na te Kingi ano te wakaaro kia whawhaia ireira." Kua puta te ruri ki Tongariro. C. Beowx, Major. P.S. —Ihaia recommends that ambushes be laid between Mimi and Pukearuhe to catch Ngatimaniapoto. Ihaia states that Hapurona has compelled some twenty Ngatimaru Natives who left Titokowaru to return to him at Te Ngaere (where Titokowaru has three pas), and refuses them refuge in Ngatimaru; and a Native named Wati, of the Kawau Ngatitu Parikino, is wounded in the head (iaw) at Te Ngaere, also a Ngatimaru Native of influence. That Titokowaru has three pas in Te Ngaere. C. Beown, Major. 3rd April, 1869. P.S.—lhaia explains Hapurona's influence being strong enough to keep Titokowaru and his people out of Ngatimaru ; that all the Ngatiawa and a section of the Ngafimaru are agreed on this point, and that the others are not strong enough to break the compact, or fear to attempt it.

Enclosure 2 in No. 50. Memo, of Evidence taken before the Hon. J. C. KicrorasD, sth April, ISG9. Neeetine (Nelson), brother of llopata Ngarongomate, who accompanied More to Mokau, reports that there were four chiefs at Mokau ; he saw three, the other was inland. The names of these chiefs were: —(1.) Tikaokao, alias Tawhana; (2.) Ileihana, alias Te Wakahoehoc, alias Tc Huatare; (3.) Karauti, alias Te Atua, alias Te Kuri Taunui; (4.) Wetcre. When More met them Wetere said, " The killing at Pukearuhe is not mine, it is Tawhiao's." More contradicted him, and they coutinued arguing about it till evening, when they went into a whare. Eeihana then said: " Listen, More. After you went away I went to Tokangamutu. I heard what Tawhiao said in his house. He said, 'I am caught, lam caught by Mackay and Louis (Hettet), by their evil conduct in opening a store at Tokangamutu and making a bridge at Taupo. They are the worst men in the world.' I (Ileihana) answered, 'In the morning I will kill Mackay and Louis.' Tawhiao said, ' Suppose you do, there are plenty more to be caught.' I said, 'Yes, there are more at Pukearuhe.' Ileihana went on to say that, after the massacre at "White Cliffs, a letter was sent to Tawhiao, informing him of it. After receiving it he rubbed himself with kokowai, put on a ' koko,' and took up a ' taiaha,' and coming outside his house, called on Ngatimaniapoto, Waikato, Ngatiruanui, Wanganui, Urewera, &c. He said Waikato and Ngatimaniapoto were to be ready for blood; Taupo, Urewera, and Wauganui to wash themselves clean. He flourished his taiaha and made a blow with it, then laying it on the ground, he ordered the other four tribes (Waikato, Wanganui,Ngatiruanui, and LTrewera) to rest. To Ngalimaniapoto he said, ' This is not my work, Ngatimauiapoto have brought it to me. Let 300 go to Mokau, and 300 stay at Tokangamutu.' " This was all the talk in the house at Mokau. More said he should go on to see Tawhiao. He sent back no message to Mr. Parris, and did not say anything to me before we parted, about what Ileihana had said.

No. 51. Copy of a Letter from Mr. B. Paeeis to Mr. Gr. S. Cooper. (No. 89.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 19th April, 1869. In further reference to my report of yesterday, I have the honor to forward herewith, for the information of His Excellency's Government, a letter which I received from Major Brown, at 11 o'clock last night. I have always been of opinion that Titokowaru and his followers would on leaving Te Ngaere retire upon the Ngatimaru District, and the fact of his being there need not create any alarm unless there should be any concerted plan for co-operating with Ngatimaniapoto to attack this district, in which case we should of course have to confine our operations strictly to the defensive. I am leaving this at 10 o'clock this morning, to ride out to Major Brown's camp, and shall advise him to abandon all idea of carrying out his expedition, for we cannot afford to risk a disaster at the present time, as such a result would be fatal. Major Brown, I have no doubt, sees now from the tenor of his letter the fix he might have got into had he gone with so small a force. I am sending a copy of Major Brown's letter to Colonel Lyon, commanding at Patca, by the overland mail which leaves here to-morrow. I feel considerable diffidence in advising Colonel Lyon, lest I should be accused of improper interference in military matters, as some were wont to do last session of the Parliament, but I shall suggest for his own decision the advisability of his moving up to the Waihi Camp with the Ngatiporous, and as many Europeans as he could take, from whence he could 14

A.—No. 10.

54

REPORTS PROM OPFICERS

speedily come to reinforce this district by the mountain track in case there should be a concerted attack of Ngatimaniapoto and Titokowaru on this district. I have, &c, R. Parets, The L Tnder Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner. P.S.—Enclosed is a copy of my letter to Colonel Lyon. —E. P.

Enclosure 1 in No. 51. Copy of a Letter from Major Brown to Mr. E. Parris. My deae Parris, — Takapu Redoubt, 7 p.m., 18th April, JBG9. Ihaia has sent in Pumipi ; he came by Pukemahoe, ami saw Titokowaru, his men, women, and children ; he says every house was crowded with them. The messenger says that, in Ihaia's opinion, unless I have obtained reinforcements, that it is idle to attempt anything against Titokowaru and the force he has ; that he had better be left to feel himself secure, until such time as we may be strong enough to pounce upon him, either there or elsewhere in Ngatimaru. Pumipi, from his account, cannot have been more than ten hours coming from Pukemahoe, and it is a question in my mind what the neutrality of Ngatiawa is worth to prevent Titokowaru coming in this direction ; he is now on this right bank of the Waitara, between Hapurona's place and W. Kingi's. I lent Pumipi my horse to get to Tamati Tiraurau and Teira as soon as possible ;he says his legs will carry him no further. He estimates Titokowaru's force at 500 men ; I should say half that, with, say, fifty Ngatimarus. Pumipi says his orders from Ihaia are to bring Tamati here to-morrow to give his opinion. I do not see any reason to act against Ihaia's opinion as expressed by Pumipi. What with Titokowaru in our vicinity inland, and Ngatimaniapoto possibly a day's march from us on the North, we are safe to have warm work in one, perhaps in two places, front and flank at once. I write this iu case you have any wish to see Pumipi, or to communicate what I have heard to Patca or Wellington. I have, &c, R. Parris, Esq., New Plymouth. Chas. Browx, Major. P.S. —Titokowaru is at Pukemahoe.

Enclosure 2 in No. 51. Copy of a Letter from Mr. It. Paeris to Colonel Lton. Sir,— New Plymouth, 19th April, 1869. I have the honor to forward herewith, for your information, a copy of a letter which I received from Major Brown, the officer commanding the Taranaki Militia and Volunteers, last night at 11 o'clock. Pukemahoe, the place mentioned as Titokowaru's camp, is on the Waitara River, in the Ngatimaru District, from whence it is possible he is in communication with Ngatimaniapoto, who are supposed to be at Mokau. Before Colonel Whitmore left this for the North, ho ordered an expedition upon certain information which lie had received about Titokowaru having placed the women and children of his tribe in refuge somewhere in the Waitara Ngatimaru District. The expedition was to try and capture the women. Subsequent information has put the matter in a different light as Titokowaru is now said to be in force, whether to remain quiet or to co-operate with Ngatimaniapoto, remains to be proved. I have reason to believe that the expedition is abandoned, the force being too weak to risk an encounter with the number said to be there. I take the liberty of suggesting for your consideration and decision, the advisability of your moving up the Ngatiporous, and as many Europeans as you can consistently detach from the other posts in the Patca District, to the Waihi Camp, from which place you could speedily reinforce the Waitara District by the mountain track, in case there should be any concerted plan of Titokowaru and Ngatimaniapoto for attacking this district, which we have no proof of at present; but in the event of such a movement occurring, I have no doubt Major Brown will communicate with you at once. The " Sturt" and " St. Kilda," left the Waitara Eiver for the North on Friday, with the Colonial forces which were brought from the Patea District. I have, &c, The Officer Commanding Patea District. B. Parris, Civil Commissioner.

No. 52. ' Copy of a Letter from Mr. R. Pabeis to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. (No. 85.) Sin,— New Plymouth, 18th April.. 1869. I have the honor to report, for the information of His Excellency's Government, that two days before the departure of Colonel Whitmoro from Waitara to Auckland, intelligence was received that Titokowaru had brought his women and children into the Waitara District, or lower part of the Ngatimaru District, where it was reported he intended to leave them. Colonel Whitmore, after consulting with Ihaia Kirikumara, ordered an expedition to the Ngatimaru District under the command of Major Brown, which was to have left early Tuesday morning, 13th instant, for the purpose of trying to capture Titokowaru'e women. The force detailed for the expedition was about 150 Europeans under Major Brown, and 50 Natives under Ihaia, all of whom assembled at Tikorangi on Monday last, intending to start therefrom Tuesday morning early. There has, however, been some delay, as explained in Major Brown's letters herewith enclosed. Ihaia left Thursday morning with fifty Natives, for the purpose, lam informed,

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

55

A.—No. 10.

of communicating with his relatives (William King's Natives), who are in part of the same district. The European part of the force is still at Tikorangi, waiting to hear from Ihaia. After Colonel Whitmore left intelligence was received that Titokowaru, with a considerable number of men, had also arrived in the district from Te Ngaere, which, if true, removes the chance of success in the object of the expedition to capture the women, and raises a doubt as to the expediency of the expedition being undertaken. With this view of the matter I have written to Major Brown, and beg to forward herewith copy of my letter to that gentleman. Our friendly tribes are very much opposed to our commencing hostilities in neutral districts ; but they say if Titokowaru or Ngatimaniapoto commence in those districts, they will at once oppose them. His Honor the Superintendent has also written to Major Brown, being of the same opinion as myself, and I am happy to say that the better thinking portion of the settlers quite agree with us. I am, however, not certain that Major Brown will abandon the expedition; but if he does not, I am convinced there will be a strong feeling of insecurity for the out-settlers in everv district, all of whom south of Waitara were beginning to recover from the fright occasioned by the Pukearuhe murders. On the 9th instant, Colonel AVhitmore went with the steamboat " St. Kilda" to the mouth of the Mokau Elver. The Hon. Mr. Eichmond and I accompanied him. We saw a few women, apparently returning from their cultivations, but none of the men showed themselves ; the opinion, however, of the Natives with us was that they were keeping out of sight, expecting we were going to land, when they would attack us. A few shots were fired into the place, and we then returned to Waitara, and although it was fully expected that the Ngatimaniapoto would advance upon the Pukearuhe District, nothing whatever has been heard of them since. When. More, with twelve Waikatos, was returning from Taranaki to Tokangamutu, on arriving at Mokau ho behaved exceedingly well, and manfully condemned the action of Ngatimaniapoto, and called upon Tikaokao, Wetere Ta Kerei, and Eeihana Whakahoehoe, to accompany him to Tokangamutu, which they then refused. This information I obtained from a Taranaki Native, who accompanied More so far as Mokau, but as he left More at Mokau, they might have changed their minds and gone inland with More, otherwise I cannot understand their keeping away so long from Pukearuhe. The "Sturt" and "St. Kilda" both arrived at Waitara Friday morning from Manukau. The "St. Kilda" left noon the same day, not having gone into the river, and the "Sturt" left Eriday night before high water, talcing with them the remainder of the Colonial forces ordered to the North. Be pleased to lay this report before the Hon. the Defence Minister, together with enclosures, as I have not time to write to both offices before the mail leaves. I have, &c, E. Pareis, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington, Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure 1 in No. 52. Copy of a Letter from Major Brow>* to Mr. E. Pareis. Mt dear Parris, — Takapu Eedoubt, 13th April, 1809. Ihaia has ascertained that two of Titokowaru's men took two women, who were sick, and two children to Ngatimaru. As he does not consider this as sufficient inducement, he has sent Oromona via Kai Pikari to ascertain if any more, or Titokowaru, have arrived since: as he says, " It is no use to go to all the trouble of going there for two women and two children; moreover, that to do so with such a small object, would be to destroy all hope of catching Titokowaru in Ngatiinaru. It is true that if we do not go now they will hear it was talked of, but that they will conclude that, as it was talked of and dropped, it is less likely to be done at a future time, and Tito will feel less dread of going to Ngatimaru." We are waiting, therefore, for the return of Oromona to Urenui: from thence Morgan is to bring on what he says. Ihaia, however, says positively, we are not to proceed till to-morrow morning. Some of the Bushrangers asked for their discharges from that force, as the ss. a day has not been granted them, as they were promised this when they were taken into that force (that is, that they might leave it when they liked). I told them they could leave the Bushrangers, but as my orders were to take a certain number of mep, if they left the Bushrangers I should take them as Militia, where they would have no chance of getting the ss. per day if it was granted to the Bushrangers ; if they refused to march as Militia, they would then be tried for mutiny by Court-martial. On the whole, they decided to say nothing further about it. Tour's ever truly, E. Parris, Esq. Chas. Brown. P.S. —If we do not go to Ngatimaru, we return quick to Wai Iti; three shots were heard from there at Wainui last night.

Enclosure 2 in No. 52. Copy of a Letter from Major Brown to Mr. E. Paebis. Dear Sir, — Takapu Eedoubt, 11 a.m., 14th April, 1869. As I informed you in my note of yesterday, when Ihaia heard that the women and children sent by Titokowaru to Ngatimaru were only four in number, two of each, he sent a scout to ascertain who was really there. The scout returned about an hour ago, and states that he went as far as "Wiremu Kingi's settlement on the Waitara inland, and was there told that Titokowaru was at a Native settlement on the Waitara, seaward of Wiremu Kingi's place, on the south bank of the river, and in rear of Te Ngaere. There are various paths to reach it, by which at the same time are outlets for escape. There arc complications, it appears, that may possibly arise from the expedition

A.—No, 10.

REPORTS PROM OPPICERS

56

proceeding, which were adverted to by the scout (Oromona), of an agreement between Ngatiawa and Taranaki, that no paths of theirs should be used for warlike objects against their neighbours, whether for or against Bakeha or Maori. To this Ihaia replies, that the presence of Titokowaru where he is is a breach of the agreement; and that Mahau, Teira, and himself all promised to you, that if I was stopped from going to Colonel Whitmorc's assistance against Titokowaru, they would themselves go and capture him if he showed himself on Waitara. In this position of the question I was asked to decide what course should be adopted, when I reminded Ihaia that Colonel Whitmore's orders were, that he was to tell me where to go to find any of Titokowaru's people, and I was to go and do it. Ihaia has decided that, if this day is sufficiently fine for the floods to abate in a tributary of Waitara that we have to cross several times to-morrow, we leave this to-morrow morning at daylight, with the object of reaching W. King's settlement. Ihaia hopes to induce the people there to join him, so as to take the whole force in canoes ; the scouts stated that Enoka will be here to see Ihaia, if the floods in the tributary I have named will admit of it. The settlement that Titokowaru is at is about three miles further up the river than the settlement Tamihana has been residing at, and some eight or ten miles below W. King's settlement. I mentioned the complications that may arise with Taranaki, that you may estimate their value, and with His Honor the Superintendent provide against them, if you deem it necessary. We are to reach W. Kingi's place to-morrow night. We march with four days' rations, and we propose to send our wounded down the river in the canoes. If the Waitara is low, they will be landed at Mangonui. I would suggest that some provision be made for checking an advance of Ngatimaniapoto in the absence of the expeditionary force. There will be about sixty men this evening at the Wai Iti, under Captains Messenger and Daviss. I have, &c, B. Barris, Esq., Civil Commissioner. Chas. Brown, Major. B.S.—Noon. Ihaia says that the reports from Mangonui are so encouraging from W. Kingi's people that he will start with his men to-morrow, irrespective of weather or floods, and he will send a messenger to guide us to the Kawau (Hapurona's place), seaward of Tamihana's place, Bauropoto. Titokowaru is at Baki Bald, near Autawa. He wishes us to secure the retreat by the Kawau.

Enclosure 3 in Xo. 52. Copy of a Letter from Mr. R. Parris to Major Brown. (No. 81.) Sir,— New Plymouth, 18th April, 18G9. With reference to the expedition which was ordered by Colonel Whitmore before leaving for Auckland, upon certain information which he had received to the effect that Titokowaru had brought the women and children of his tribe to the "Waitara jNfgatimaru District as a place of refuge for them, I feel it to be my duty, in consequence of the delay and the publicity obtained of the intended expedition, and also on account of the information received subsequent to the departure of Colonel Whitmore, that Titokowaru himself is also in the district with a considerable number of his men, to submit to your better judgment my own views in reference to the question of the advisability of proceeding to the Ngatimaru District with so snail a force. The intelligence of the proposed expedition has, without doubt, got to the Ngatimuru District, which Titokowaru would take advantage of by collecting his forces, said to be scattered, to protect their women and children, or clear them out of the district, and therefore the chances which Colonel Whitmore was led to believe, of being able to take them by surprise, are entirely removed. The Ngatiawo Natives, under the leadership of Hapurona and others, have promised to do all they can by moral persuasion to prevent hostilities in their district, either by Titokowaru or Ngatimaninpoto, but if they failed by such means, not being in a position to oppose them by force, they would then communicate with us, a result they by no means anticipate. I respectfully submit that the condition of this district since the removal of the Colonial forces to the North is too weak to undertake aggressive operations in a district where the force would be cut •off from supplies, and also from support on their line of retreat, which would be liable to be intercepted by Ngatimnniiipoto should they arrive in the district during your absence in large force, as the few men under Captain Messenger at Wai Iti would not be able to oppose effectually their advance. Your presence in the Upper Waitara District with a force would, in all probability, disturb the neutrality of the Ngatiawas, which I am aware some would say is of little consequence, considering the whole question ; but we have to consider whether we are masters of the position sufficiently to justify that view of it, and to risk involving the whole district in difficulties, by coercing neutral tribes to make common cause once more with Titokowaru and Ngatimaniapoto at this particular time when the bulk of the Colonial forces are required elsewhere. I have, &c, Major Brown, Commanding T.M. and V., E. Parris, Takapu, Tikorangi. Civil Commissioner.

No. 53. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Parris to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. (No. 102.) Sir,— New Plymouth, 29th April, 18G9. I have the honor to forward herewith for your office, copy of a letter that I have sent to the Hon. the Defence Minister, with enclosures. I have, &c, E. Parris, The Under Native Secretary, "Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

57

A.—No. 10.

Enclosure in No. 53. Copy of a Letter from Mr. R. Paeris to the Hon. Colonel Hatjitain. (No. 100.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 28th April, 1869. I have the honor to forward herewith for the information of His Excellency's Government, copies of correspondence as per margin, and also to report the latest information which I have received relative to the movements of Titokovvaru and his following. Ihaia Kirikumara, who with fifty Natives went to the Ngatimaru District to obtain information, returned therefrom last Wednesday evening, and reported that he and his party were cordially received by the Ngatiawas (Wiremu Kingi te Rangitake's people), who had kept aloof from Titokowaru's party. On hearing of lhaia's arrival in the district, Titokowaru sent a message to him by Karaitiana, a Ngatimaru Native, inviting him to come into his (Titokowaru's) camp. Ihaia sent back an answer stating that if he wished to see him he must come to where he was. Ihaia explains his motive for inviting Titokowaru to come to him by stating that, had he consented to do so ; even with a small bodyguard he had determined to shoot him. I have no doubt that Titokowaru thought of lhaia's antecedents, and deemed it the safer course not to separate from his main body of supporters to hold communication with him. During lhaia's stay in the district, Titokowaru intimated to the Ngatiawas an inclination to go on to Mokau; upon which Enoka, Wiremu Kingi te Rangitake's brother, told him that if they attempted to cross Ngatiawa territory, they, the Ngatiawas, would fire upon them. This threat is said to have caused some excitement, which after subsiding resulted in Titokowaru shifting his quarters from Pukemahoe, on the north bank of the Waitara River, to the district south of the river, on the track to Te Ngaere. There was said to be a large body of men with Titokowaru, variously estimated at from 200 to 400; the former number I should be most inclined to take as nearest the mark, for from what I can gather none of the Pakakohis or Ngaraurus were there. About a fortnight ago fourteen men and twenty-two women and children, all of whom have been with Titokowaru, and are more or less implicated in his late offences, and were with him at Te Ngaere until they were driven therefrom by Colonel Whitmore, arrived at Pariaka, inland of Warea, to take refuge under Te Whiti. This is one of the embarrassments of the question in the breaking up of Titokowaru's force: small parties as they secede from him taking refuge amongst neutral Natives, and thereby complicate matters in neutral districts. Of course those who shelter them become implicated in their crimes in the eye of the law, but how to enforce that law is a very difficult question, and can only be done by carrying war into such districts. Nothing whatever has been heard of the Ngatimaniapotos, and it is generally believed that they have gone to Tokangamutu. I have, &c, R. Paeeis, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

Major Brown to Civil Commissioner, April 26, 1869. Ciyil Commissioner to Major Brown, April 26, 1869. Civil Commissioner to Major Brown, April 27, 1869. Major Brown to Civil Commißsioner, April 27, 1869. Lieut.-Colonel Lyon to Civil Commissioner, April 23, 1869. Civil Commissioner to Lieut.Colonel Lyon, April 28, 1869.

Sub-Enclosure 1 to Enclosure in No. 53. Copy of a Letter from Major Brown to Mr. R. Paeeis. (No. 158.) Militia and Volunteer Office, Sib, — New Plymouth, 26th April, 1869. I have the honor to enclose, for your information, a copy of a letter that I have this day addressed to Captain Good, at Urenui. I understood, when the Hon. J. C. llichmond was here, that the arrangement I made for the occupation of Tupari met with his approval; also, that the force under Ihaia might be raised to 100 men. If you can corroborate my impression I shall be glad of it, as I relied on his early return from Manukau to obtain his approval in writing, for the information of the Hon. the Defence Minister. I have, &c, R. Parris, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Chas. Brown, Major, New Plymouth. Commanding T.M. and V.

Copy of a Letter from Major Brown to Captain Good. (No. 156.) Sir — Taranaki Militia Office, 27th April, 1869. As soon as the redoubt of the Armed Constabulary under Captain Tuke is sufficiently advanced to receive the magazine and ammunition at your post, you will take steps to forward them, the force at Waiiti supplying the escort. As soon as hospital accommodation is ready at Waiiti, Dr. O'Carroll will take steps for the removal of the sick from Urenui; when these objects have been carried out, you wflx reduce the number of men to take charge of the redoubt to four, and proceed yourself to Tupari and take charge of the force at that post. Prom and after the end of this month, such of the Maruwehi Natives only will remain on pay, not exceeding twenty-five, as may be at Tupari on duty or with lhaia's contingent. I have, &c, Chas. Brown, Major, Captain Good, commanding at Urenui. Commanding T.M. and V. 15

A.—No. 10.

58

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

No. 90. April 19, 1869,

Sub-Enclosure 2 to Enclosure in No. 53. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to Major Bbown. (No. 9G.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 26th April, 1869. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of this date, enclosing copy of a letter which you have addressed to Captain Good ; and also in reference to the occupation of Tupari, and the raising Ihaia's men to 100, requesting to be informed whether I can corroborate your impression that the Hon. J. C. Richmond signified his approval of those arrangements. In reply, I beg to inform you that I do not remember hearing you submit the matter to the Hon. J. C. Richmond; consequently, I am not aware what took place between you on the subject. I have, <£c, Major Brown, Commanding T.M. and V., R. Paeeis, New Plymouth. Civil Commissioner.

Sub-Enclosure 3 to Enclosure in No. 53. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to Major Beown. (No. 98.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 27th April, 18G9. In further reference to j'our letter of yesterday, covering copy of a letter addressed to Captain Good, ordering some important changes in the disposition of the forces in the Urenui-Pukearuhe District, I beg to submit for your consideration whether the reduction which you have ordered at the Pihanga Redoubt to four men, is not reducing that post to a state of weakness which, from its proximity to our frontier, threatened by Ngatimaniapoto, might be made a point of attack, as in the case of Turo Turo Mokai. There are three families there —the Cornwalls, Goods, and Kyngdons; tho two former have, with praiseworthy fortitude, braved the dangers which have threatened the district since the Pukearuhc murders, by remaining at their places instead of coming into town as many others have done. But by the withdrawal of tho forces therefrom, all but four men, I submit their condition will be extremely dangerous, involving a responsibility which I cannot risk by neglecting to bring it iinder your notice, for you to decide whether they should not be warned to come into town if you carry out the reduction ordered at that post. As regards Tupari, I consider that to be a very important post, if occupied in sufficient force to oppose a flank movement of the enemy; hut if not capable of doing that its importance would bo reduced to a post of observation, capable only of acting on the defensive, in which case a clear understanding should, I think, be arrived at with the Natives who were residents at that place, who are said to be doubtful, lest they should betray the weakness of the post. If there is any real cause for suspicion I think they had better be advised to clear out, but not otherwise, as it would have a had effect upon the Ngatiawas, who are living inland. I hope you will send Ihaiaandhis men to that post, in addition to those already there, as Ihaia's presence would, I think, have a good effect, and that would make the number up to nearly a hundred. It would be a deplorable thing to lose Tupari and Urenui both in one night, with your head quarters at Waiiti. Twenty men would keep the Pihanga Eedoubt, if you saw no objection to detaching that number of men from your Waiiti force, to secure an important post in your rear. I do not know if you are aware that Titokowaru told Enoka that he had an inclination to go to Mokau, and that Enoka threatened to fire upon them if they attempted to cross Ngatiawa territory for such a purpose. This lhaia. informed me of, but at the same time was of opinion that Titokowaru would not disregard the objection raised by Enoka. There is, however, an amount of uncertainty as regards the movements of both Ngatimaniapoto and Titokowaru, which renders it absolutely necessary to use extreme caution in the part where their co-operation would most likely be directed. I have, &c, Major Brown, Commanding T.M. and V., E. Paeets, New Plymouth. Civil Commissioner.

Sub-Enclosure 4 to Enclosure in No. 53. (No. 159.) Militia and Volunteer Office, Sib, — New Plymouth, 27th April, 18G9. I have the honor to acknowledge your letter of this date, No. 98, and to thank you for the information and suggestions contained in it. Some of the information I was not in possession of when I ordered the garrison at Pihanga to be reduced. I quite agree with you under present circumstances, and will countermand the reduction. Your remarks relative to Tupari I will give every consideration to as soon as the weather will allow me to visit that post. I have, &c, R. Parris, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Ciias. Beowx, Major, New Plymouth. Commanding T.M. and V.

Sub-Enclosure 5 to Enclosure in No. 53. Copy of a Letter from Lieut.-Colonel Lton to Mr. E. Paeeis. (No. 4.) Sib, — Camp, Patea, 23rd April, 18G9. I have the honor to acknowledge receipt of your letter, number and date as per margin, covering a letter from Major Brown, commanding Taranaki Militia District, and reporting that Titokowaru is now in force in the Ngatimaru District.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

59

A.—No. 10.

I quite agree with you in the advisability of reoccupying the post at "Waihi, but at the present time am unable to do so on account of the paucity of men in the district, and also that Hauhaus have again made their appearance in the neighbourhood of Manawapou. An expedition is about to start up the Patea River; ou the return I shall do my best to send scouting parties iu the direction of the mountain track. I have, &c, E. Parris, Esq., Civil Commissioner, William C. Ltok, Lt.-Col., Taranaki. Commanding Patea District.

Sub-Enclosure 6 to Enclosure in Xo. 53. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to Lieut.-Colonel Lton. (No. 99.) Sik,— New Plymouth, 28th April, 1869. I have Ihe honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter No. 4, of the 23rd instant. Since writing to you on the 19th instant, further information has been obtained in reference to Titokowaru and his followers, who, finding Te Ngaere untenable, retired to the Ngatimaru District to a place on the north bank of the Waitara River called Pukemahoe. It was first reported that he had taken the women and children there as a place of refuge, but from inquiry it was found that he was there in force, which gave rise to the suspicion that ho was moving to co-operate with Ngatimaniapoto in this district. It is now reported that he has recrossed the Waitara Eiver to tho district between that river and Te Ngaere—having been opposed by the neutral Ngatiawa Natives, —whether to carry on offensive operations or to act on the defensive remains to be proved. If you send scouting parties along the mountain traqk I should recommend them not to bo careless, as I presume the rebels are driven to the necessity of moving about in search for food. The Ngatimaniapoto have not yet put in an appearance this side of the White Cliff's, but the main part of the forces of this district is now concentrated north of Urenui in case they should. I have, &c, E. Paeeis, Lieut.-Colonel Lyon, Commanding Patea District. Civil Commissioner.

No. 54. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Pahhis to Mr. G. S. Cooper. (No. 105.) Sie,— New Plymouth, 30th April, 18G9. Since writing my report of the 2Sth instant to the Hon. the Defence Minister, Wiremu Tamihana Arohe has come in from the Ngatimaru District with later information respecting the probable movements of Titokowaru's party, which I have the honor to report for the information of His Excellency's Government. Wiremu Tamihana Aroho is a leading man of that section of the Puketapu Tribe which was always associated with the old Land League, and subsequently with the so-called King party. The Puketapua were the first victims of those unhappy combinations ; a majority of the tribe declaring for the sale of land were opposed by the minority, who, depending upon the promised support of the Land League, shed the first blood in the cause, in the year 1554, by massacreiiig some of their relatives, which led to the internecine Native war of this district, which lasted for five years, to tho commencement of the war with the Government. I saw Tamihana the first time about a year ago, in the Ngatiruanui District, and was sleeping at the same place with him two nights, when I discovered that he was getting tired of the cause he had so long espoused. About two months ago he came out to visit his relatives, Mahau and others, when he finally decided to return and live with them ; and in the beginning of March tho chief Poharama and about ten others went back with him to assist him to bring five canoes down the Waitara River, and in about a fortnight they returned with the canoes laden with as much of their luggage as they could bring away, bringing with them at the same time about sixty pigs, leaving some of their men and women to prepare for a general clear out. When the news of Titokowaru's arrival in the Waitara-Ngatimaru District was received Tamihana was at Mahau's place. He came to me and expressed himself anxious about his people, lest they should be intruded upon by Titokowaru. I kept him until the expedition under Major Brown was abandoned, and then allowed him to go to bring everything away. He started on the 20th instant, with four others, and on arriving at tho Kauwau he found Hapurona had gone to Pukemahoe, to advise Titokowaru to keep clear of their district. Tamihana's own place, Eaoropoto, was further inland, where, on arriving, he sent one of his men, Paora, inland to Pukemahoe, Titokowaru's camp, to ascertain what was going on. Paora returned and reported that Titokowaru stood up while he was there, and stated that he had no intention to carry hostilities into the district of Ngatiawa, that he had not forgotten the understanding he and the chiefs of that tribe had arrived at; that he should return to his own district and remain quiet until he was attacked. Tamihana came to my office yesterday, to report his arrival and the above information, and, in the presence of Mahau and others assured me that he was of opinion that we need not be under any apprehension of Titokowaru's movements in this district. Tamihana came down the river in a canoe with some others ; and the remainder of his party, who are walking, are expected to be out in a day or two, including all the Puketapus and Pukerangioras, besides some Ngatiruanui Natives, who say they arc tired of the state of things in that district, but who, I have no doubt, have been with Titokowaru's party, although they do not belong to his hapu —Ngaruahine. I have no doubt there are many who have joined him more from fear than inclination, after witnessing his successes at the commencement last year, but it would be impossible to decide between such and those who entered

A.—No. 10.

60

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

heartily into his work of destruction. I shall therefore be glad to be furnished with definite instructions how to act wheu Natives who have been implicated in his offences take shelter with friendly Natives. The exertions of the different sections of the Ngatiawa Natives have been quite equal to their promises to keep hostilities out of their district, and the fact of Tamihana coming in with all the Puketapus while it has been going on, is, I submit, a substantial proof of their sincerity. I have, &c, E. Paebis, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 55. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeris to Mr. G. S. Coopee. (No. 112.) Sib,— New Plymouth, 7th May, 18G9. In further reference to my letter of the 30th April, No. 105, respecting the Puketapus, with Tamihana Arohe, clearing out from the Ngatimaru District, with whom were some who had been with Titokowaru's following, I have now the honor to report that I gave Tamihana instructions to order them to leave the district, and instructions to that effect were sent to them; but on Tuesday last Tamihana came in to tell me that they refused to go back to join Titokowaru, and were still with his lieke, who have all arrived at Mangonui. I therefore decided to go to them myself, and on Wednesday I took Mahau and Tamihana witli me and went to Mangonui, about three miles inland of Te Arei. On arriving at the camp of the Jieke, I found the individuals who had recently seceded from Titokowaru were absent, and on inquiry I was told they were not far off, when I requested they should be sent for. They soon came and sat down among the others, but I called upon them to separate from them, which they did at once. I then called upon the elders of the heke to listen to what I said to them. I ordered them to leave the district and return to Titokowaru, which they refused to do, and said they had come in to give themselves up to me. I told them that our gaol was full, and that they would have to be sent away by sea to some other island, if the Governor ordered it; that their hands were stained with the blood of the slain, and their teeth black with eating human flesh. This they repudiated, and said they were willing to submit to their fate. It was proposed by Mahau that they should remain at Pekatu with Nepetarima. which the latter objected to, lest it should create a feeling of suspicion against his place; in which view of the case I perfectly coincided with Nepetarima, being of opinion that it would be much better for them to be inside of the Military Settlers' lines than to be on our borders behind the Military Settlers. The individuals referred to are four men and three women, who, with Tamiliana's heJce, the Puketapus, and Pukerangioras, numbering about eighty men, women, and children, came away from Mangonui with me the same day. I brought them past the block-house, and through the lluirangi settlement, and left them at Matarikoriko that night, from whence they were to come on to Ngapuketurua the next day. Tamihana's party have brought out eleven good-sized canoes, and upwards of 150 pigs of different sizes. I have, <fcc, E. Paeris, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 56. Copy of a Letter from the Hon. J. C. Kiciimond to Mr. R. Paeris. Sik,— Wellington, 25th May, ISG9. The Government have learned in a letter from Mr. Booth, that Tukino with a party of about 100 men, women, and children of the Tangahoe, lately with Titokowaru, are now at Pariaka with Te "Whiti and the Taranaki Tribe. Peniamine Tuhaka, and Hatiwira Houkamau, two chiefs of the Xgatiporou, now in Wellington, state that the Ngatiporou Constabulary recently pursued these people to the Waingongoro Eiver, and that in their opinion they mean to surrender. Under these circumstances, and as 1 learn from your letter of 28th April to the Hon. the Defence Minister that others of the rebels from time to time wish to come in, it is proper that you should be clearly informed of the intentions of the Government in such cases. Two conditions must be insisted on :— 1. A number of serviceable guns proportioned to the number of men must be given up. 2. The surrenderee must settle in such places and under such of the chiefs of their tribe as may be appointed by the Government. The number of guns to be required, I will not limit strictly. It will be your duty to find out what is possible in each case, but the spirit of the condition must in every case be substantially fulfilled. The mode of securing compliance with the second condition will require careful consideration, and you will receive a further communication on the subject. The above conditions are not offered to any of those who were part of the men with Titokowaru in the first instance, and who are therefore implicated in the atrocities perpetrated on the men murdered at Ketemarac and Waihi, or on the wounded who fell into the rebels' hands at Ngutu-o-te-Manu. With respect to Tukino's party, I feel considerable confidence, remembering the circumstances under which they joined Titokowaru, that a surrender on their part, if made, will be sincere. They should be required for the present to live in the neighbourhood of Oeo, or of the seaward reserves for the Tangahoe within the Military Settlers' block. They must be placed under Hone Pihama and.

A.—No. 10.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

61

Natanahira Ngahina. A roll should bo made of their names, and the chiefs should ascertain by a muster periodically that they aro fulfilling the second condition. The Government calculate that Hone and Ngahina will exert themselves, should the party return to their allegiance, in confirming their good dispositions. It must be understood that in asking those chiefs to take charge of their tribe they will not be left destitute of food by reason of the large increase of numbers thus thrust upon tho loyal party under them. The surrendered men will be supplied with sufficient food to keep them from being a burden on their relatives, on terms of work to be done upon the roads in their neighbourhood. The Government will be glad to receive any propositions from yourself or Mr. Booth as to the mode of dealing with these cases, and will attentively consider any addition to or modification of the terms proposed above. They will look to you to see that the grace offered is not extended for the present to individuals excluded by these instructions. Those who accept the terms must understand that their renewed rebellion has forfeited all claims to the lands formerly reserved for them, and that the reacquisition of any part must be tho result of some considerable term of steady continuance in orderly and peaceful behaviour. I have &c, E. Parris, Esq., J. C. Eichmond. Civil Commissioner, Taranaki.

No. 57. Copy of a Letter from Mr. It. Pareis to Mr. G. S. Cooper. (No. 134.) Sie,— New Plymouth, 27th May, 18G9. I have the honor to report, for the information of the Government, that on the 13th instant a large party of Natives, said to be nearly 100 men, women, and children, of the Tangahoo hapu, arrived at Hone Pihama's place, Oeo. These are the Natives who were living at Matangarara, Taiporohenui, and Taurangarere, at the time of the disasters at Turu Turu Mokai and Te Ngutu-o-te-Manu, and who afterwards joined Titokowaru when he, with the Ngaruahine Tribe, was advancing upon the Patea District. Since their arrival at Oeo, about twenty of them have come on to Pariaka, inland of Warea, and Te Witi has sent two messengers inviting the remainder to go there, but they have refused, stating that they have had enough of " Poropiti mahi kikokiko mahi porewarewa."* By the overland mail, which came in yesterday, I received messages from them, asking me to go to see them, which I declined, pending the decision of the Government as to how Natives who have been with Titokowaru are to be dealt with. I am informed that there are now only four men of the Tangahoe Tribe absent —Tito Hanatana and three others. These are in the Ngatimaru District, or were a short time ago, when I received overtures from Tito Hanataua, which I refused to entertain, and declined to communicate with him. It is believed he wishes to come in by way of Waitara. 1 enclose herewith copy of a letter I received yesterday from Hone Pihama, reporting that he had commenced carrying the mail from Patea to Wanganui, and also the arrival of the Tangahoe at Oeo. I have, &c, E. Pareis, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure in No. 57. Ki a Patiete, — Patea, 23rd Mei, 1869. He whakaatu ki a koe no to tekau maiwa o 7iga ra o Mei i timata ai taku main meraki Whanganui ki L'atea. Kia rongo mai koe, i kore au e hoki wawe atu ki Taranaki, kei te tiaki au i aku tangata mo te mera e wehi ana ki nga Pariki. Ka mea atu ahau kia Karira. Kaua e wehi no te mea e tan hou ana taua ki a ratou, no kona i patai ai ki a taua. Ka mea aTe Karira mehemea ka penei tonu te riteuga o nga Paraki nei ka hoki au ki Taranaki. Ka mea atu au kaua e pouri, mehemea ka mohio ratou kua mutu ta ratou pakiki ki a taua, engari ki a manawanui ki te mahi i tukua e te Kavvanatanga ki a taua ki a meingatia taua hei tangata tika i nga mahi ote Kawanatanga. Heoi ano ena kupu. Me'iemea ka mohio koe he raruraru kei Taranaki man e whakaatu inai ki au. Ki a mohio koeko Tangahoekatoa kua kite au ki Oeo, no takukitenga ka patai au ki a ratou? "E haere ana koutou ki hea ? Ka mea mai ratou. "Ki Parihaka ki Oeo ranei." Ka mea atu au :"Ki te aha i Oeo nei ?" "Ki te taha ra i a koe." Ka mea atu au : " Kua kino au i a koutou engari haere ki te tangata i pai ai koutou." Ka mea mai ratou ki au kaore ratou e pai. Kua kite ratou ite kino ite raru ite mate hoki. Ka mea atu au. "Ka pai ki a kite koutou ite kino ite raru ite mate kua waiho e koutou ngaritenga pai ki au, haere ana koutou ki rolo ki te mate." Heoi ko etahi i haere ki Parihaka, ko etahi i noho i Oeo. Heoi. Kei a koe te ritenga mo nga mea i noho i Oeo. Heoi ano Na to tamaiti aroha, ]S ta Hone Piiiama.

[translation.] To Pareis,— Patea, 23rd May, 18G9. A notice for you. On the 19th of May my work in connection with the mail between Wanganui and Patea began. Do you hearken. I will not soon return to Taranaki. I a'.n looking after my mail carriers, they being afraid of the (people in the) redoubts. I said to Karira, "Do not be afraid because * " Prophets inspired by false gods and possessed by madness." 1G

A.—No. 10.

62

REPORTS PROM OFFICERS

we are strangers to them ; that is why they make inquiries about us." Karira said, "If that is to be done in all the redoubts hore I will go back to Taranaki." I said to him, " Don't bo put out: if they know us they will stop teasing us ; but be steadfast in the work which has been given by the Government to us, tbat we may be looked upon as good men in the Government service." Sufficient are these words. If you know of any trouble at Taranaki, do you inform me. Do you hearken. I have seen all Tangahoe at Oeo. When I saw them I asked them, " Where are you going ?" They replied, "To Pariaka and Oeo here." I said, " Why do you come to Oeo ?" Answer: "To be with you." I said, " Tou do not like me ; you had better go to some one whom you like." They said to me, " They would not agree to that; they had seen evil, trouble and death." I said, " It is well that you have seen evil, trouble, and death ; you left the good works to be done by me, and you went to death." Sufficient. Some went to Parihaka, and some remained at Oeo. Sufficient. The disposal of those at Oeo remains with you. Sufficient. Tour loving child, Hone Piiiaiia.

No. 58. Copy of a Letter from Mr. Gr. S. Cooper to Mr. B. Paeeis. (No. 114-2) Sib,— Native Office, Wellington, 4th June, 18C9. In reference to your letter No. 1.34, of the 27th ultimo, in which you report the arrival at Oeo of about 100 of the Tangahoo Tribe, I am instructed by Mr. Eichmond to request that you will consider and report to the Government whether these and any other rebels on the West Coast who express a desire to surrender, can be employed, by way of penance and as a recognition of sovereignty, in cutting and erecting telegraph poles along the part of the coast in which they are placed. It will be necessary that you should inquire into the quality of timber, the facility of transport, and the number of men capable of the work. The poles required will be twenty to twenty-five feet long, the dimensions eight inches by eight inches at bottom, and four inches by four inches at top, and the number about twenty to the mile. Though this work will be required of the surrendered Natives partly as a penance, it will of course be necessary in some shape or other to furnish food for the people employed. I am to request that you will give this subject your immediate and careful attention, and that you will forward as soon as practicable a preliminary report upon the whole subject, suggesting a mode of conducting the work and furnishing a rough, estimate of the cost. I have, &c, G. S. Coopee, The Civil Commissioner, Taranaki. Under Secretary.

VAEIOTJS DISTEICTS. No. 59. Copy of a Letter from Mr. 11. T. Clarke to Mr. G-. S. Coopee. (D. 232.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sik, — Tauranga, Ist June, 1869. I have the honor to report, for the information of the Government, that on the 17th April last, I accompanied the Hon. .1. C. Richmond and Colonel Whitmore, commanding the Colonial Forces, to Maketu and Te Awa-o-te-Atua, to render what assistance I was able in making arrangements for the proposed expedition into the Urewera country. Colonel Whitmore had previously written to the Taupo chiefs, requesting them to meet him on the 20th. The chiefs Pokeha, Matene, Wi Kepa, and Sewi, were all requested to bo present at the meeting. As most of the chiefs who were to take part in the conference had arrived at Te Awa-o-te-Atua on the 19th, the Commanding Officer decided to lay his plans before them and invite their co-operation. They were told that they would be placed in all respects on the same footing as the European Militia, they were to have their own officers, and that if they drew rations they would have Is. Cd. per day deducted from their pay. They were also requested to choose from amongst themselves one man who should be principal officer, and under whom all the others should act, the principal officer to receive his orders direct from the Commanding Officer. After some discussion they agreed that it was impossible for the Arawa to select a man from amongst themselves, owing to their proverbial jealousy of each other. They therefore suggested that I should accompany the forces and direct them how to act. This I was willing to do as far as I was able. I explained to Colonel Whitmoro that my great object in going with the expedition would be to keep the Arawa together —to smooth down their petty jealousies, so prejudicial to a hearty cooperation. It was also arranged that the Natives should be allowed to draw one day's pay in biscuit and sugar, which they explained they would require while on the inarch; that they would forage for themselves when they got into the enemy's country.

A.—No. 10.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

63

Having settled all the preliminaries, I started for Tauranga on the evening of the 20th to make arrangements for my probable protracted absence, and to hasten on the enrolment of the Arawa required for the expedition. Oq the 22nd I returned to Maketu, where the Arawa from the inland districts had already begun to assemble. On Friday, the 23rd, two divisions, of 250 men in all, were completed, with forty men unattached, intended to carry supplies and ammunition. On Saturday, the 24th, the Arawa marched to Te Matata, where the third division, of 100 men and twenty unattached, wore collecting; the whole force, when completed, officers and men, including the unattached for transport purposes, making a total of 418 men (vide Enclosure). We were delayed at Matata for nearly a week waiting for supplies. The heavy gale then blowing prevented the " Sturt " from entering the river. On Saturday, Ist May, however, all our forces, Europeau and Native, collected at Pukekura (Fort Alfred), just where the road enters the hills after leaving the Rangitaiki River. I regret that Colonel Whitmore did not feel himself in a position to carry out his promise of allowing the Native part of the force to draw one day's pay in biscuit and sugar, the want of which was seriously felt, and led to delays and dissatisfaction on the part of the Natives. Instead of receiving 7 lbs. of biscuit each per man they got considerably less than half. On the morning of the 2nd the march in the direction of Tauaroa was commenced. The whole of the European force and the Division of Arawas under Rewi and Henare Pukuatua (150 men), started early (the Ist and 3rd Division of Arawa remained to prepare food for the road). We halted at Waione to build a redoubt to receive supplies. Although only eight miles from Fort Alfred it was the only suitable spot on the line of march to the site fixed for the next redoubt (Fort Galatea), being the only place where firewood could be obtained. Before daylight on the 3rd the march was continued to Karamuramu, on the Eangitaiki River, a distance of about twenty-five miles from Fort Alfred. Orders had been sent the day before to the rest of the force to come up as quickly as possible. On the 4th the Europeans and Natives were employed in making a redoubt, afterwards called Fort Galatea. During the day the Ist and 3rd Divisions of Arawas came up. In the afternoon the Commanding Officer sent for the Native Officers and showed to them the different lines of road to Ahikereru. The line by Mangawiri was selected as the most direct, and the road to Te Tapiri, which would have involved another day's march, was abandoned. An early start was to be made in the morning. Te Pokiha, with his Division (No. 1), volunteered to take the advance, to be supported by No. 2. At 7 o'clock a.m. of the sth all the forces, Europeans and Natives, crossed the Eangitaiki River. For the first five miles the road led across the Kuhawaea Plain, entering the hills in a gorge caused by the Whirinake River. From this place we could form some idea of the difficulties of the country wo had to contend with. The road for the most part led up or down river-beds, with precipitous banks, here and there interspersed with broken fern hills. On arriving at the foot of a hill called Pouaua the Native guides suggested we should camp for the night, as there was no other convenient place to halt where food could be cooked without discovering to the enemy our whereabouts. Colonel Whitmore yielded to the request, but suggested that scouts should be sent in advance, under an officer, to see if any traces could be found of the enemy. Te Pokiha again volunteered to go in advance, with twenty of his men. This he did without waiting for food to be cooked. Just after the night had closed in, a messenger was sent by Te Pokiha to say that he had not discovered any traces of the enemy, but that he had advanced to within a short distance of Ahikereru, and he thought it most prudent to remain where he was, "to take care of his own tracks." During* the night it rained and continued doing so in the morning. As soon as it was light enough to find the track through the forest the force started. At a little after 9 a.m. we came up with To Pokiha's scouts, in a cultivation near the edge of the forest. Several cooking fires were seen in one of the pas, from which we were led to suppose that it was occupied by a considerable force. The upper pa, called by our guides of the Ngatimannwa, Te Pa Tapu, was apparently untenanted. Te Pokiha described the position of the pas as they appeared from his position, and suggested that he should be allowed to take his division round by the edge of the forest to the left, and cut off the retreat of the enemy by the Ruatahuna Road. This was agreed to by the Commanding Officer, and three hours given him to accomplish his task. Pokiha's division was supported bv fifty men of No. 2 Division, under Mr. Gilbert Mair. The main body was to remain under cover of the forest until the time allowed Te Pokiha should have expired. During the whole of this time it rained hard. Two hours had just elapsed, when we heard loud speaking on our left (the cultivation from which Te Pokiha had started his division). The cause of the exclamation proceeded from two of the enemy, who had discovered the trail of Te Pokiha's force. An attempt was made to intercept them, but without avail. I reported the matter to the Colonel, who immediately ordered the advance of the main body. Just as our forces emerged from the forest, several volleys were fired on our left, and in a few minutes the pa was rushed and taken possession of by Te Pokiha's division. From Mr. Mair's account, the track which the attacking party passed over was of the roughest description; that, after great exertion, they succeeded in climbing the hill on which Te Pa Tapu was situated, to find that the place was unoccupied —indeed it apparently never was intended for any other purpose than a sacred enclosure in which Hauhau ceremonies were to be performed ; that Te Pokiha's men approached towards the pa (Ilarema) with camion, but were discovered; Matiu, the Hauhau prophet, of Ahikereru, was the first to fire and the first to fall; that they entered the fighting pa at one end, and the occupants fled at the other; they were pursued, and all the men that bore arms and resisted were killed, four or five only making their escape; between thirty and forty women and children were taken prisoners. The names of the men killed are as follows : —Matiu, Tamihana, Wikiriwhi, Ranirn, Wi. Amongst those taken in the pa was Ngakoroai, one of the Ngatimanawa, detained by Te Kooti's orders. From him and from the women we learned that they had been entirely taken by surprise; that ten of their number were in the direction of Te Tapiri, watching the cavalry under Captain

A.—No. 10,

64

REPORTS PROM OPFICERS

Moorsom's command, and that messengers had been sent to Ruatahuna two days before, soliciting assistance. This we found to be correct, as the letter, bearing the signatures of Matiu and Hamiora, was afterwards discovered at Ruatahuna. The Colonel Commanding wished to proceed the same day in the direction of Ruatahuna, but To Pokiha pleaded hunger and weariness—not to be wondered at when it is remembered the work he and his division had accomplished the last twenty-four hours. The Colonel then decided upon moving off as early as possible on the morning of the 7th, but when the hour for departure arrived, the Arawa were collecting supplies of food in the cultivations around the pa, and we now began to feel the ill effects of not carrying out our first intention of supplying the Natives adequately with food. The Colonel could ill bear the delay, and perhaps in the heat of the moment made use of expressions reflecting on the Arawa generally in the hearing of some of the Natives, which were injudiciously repeated to others of the Native force. A spirit of insubordination was soon manifest, which, required all my powers of persuasion to allay. I should have before stated that, when it was found that some of the men of the pa were on the road to Te Tapiri, Rewi and Ilenare Pukuatua were desired to take a force out and lay an ambuscade, with the hope of catching these men. They went out about two hours before dark, marched about four miles, planted their men, but without any result. They got back to camp about 10 o'clock a.m. They had not had any food since the night before. Colonel Whitmore marched off with the corps of guides in front up the Okahu stream (that being the regular road to Ruatahuna). The march was very trying even to men who were inured to hard marching. I had not inarched far before I became so lame that it was wilh the greatest difficulty I could get along. Nothing occurred till we reached a place called Manawahiwi, where the traces of the fugitives from Ahikereru were discovered. After following them up a short distance the scouts came upon a place where several Natives had met, and had retired in the direction of Ruatahuna. The tracks were very recent, as the mud had not settled where stirred up. A very short distance from this our road passed over a clear space one hundred yards in length, which afforded no cover. At the further end was a swampy stream, to avoid which the road turned almost at a right angle. On the other side of the swamp was a fallen tree, which commanded the open space I have just described : here the enemy laid an ambuscade. They allowed our men to advance to within a few yards of the place they occupied, then fired a volley, which wounded three men of the corps of guides, one of whom (Heini, a Taranaki Native) died during the night. The enemy were driven oft' immediately. We camped on the spot for the night, the three Native Divisions furnishing advance picquets as well as those in the rear. Here Matene Te Huaki addressed himself to the Arawa, and suggested that they had advanced far enough into the enemy's country, and ought to go back. Henare Pukuatua replied that they would not go back, but would proceed to Ruatahuna. That they were aware of the nature of the work expected of them before they left their homes. That they had not yet met the Ureweras, and that it would be quite time for them to think of returning when they had tried their strength. I took an opportunity of telling the Arawa that I was sorry to hear any of their chiefs suggest that they should return to their homes without having effected anything. That it had been given out, and I had encouraged the belief, that the Arawa were a brave people, and would be able to punish the Urewera in their own country, in spite of their old tradilional stories which represented the Ureweras as invincible in their forests and dens, and that every attacking force had been repulsed with heavy loss.That they were now going under the command of Colonel Whitmore, who had witnessed the fighling of most of the loyal tribes of the Island, and that it would be a reflection on me, and those who had upheld the Arawa as a courageous people, to go back. Te Pokiha then came forward, and spoke in an excited manner. He told all those who had fear in their hearts to return home. Matene taunted Te Pokiha with being childless, and therefore did not feel as a father; that his case was different. Matene then said to me in a low voice, " I intend to go on. I have only addressed the Arawa to ascertain their feeling about the matter." Here the speaking ended, and they all determined to proceed. During the night of the 7th I suffered so much pain from an old wound 1 had received that I found it physically impossible to proceed with the column unless I was carried. 1 therefore suggested to Colonel Whitmore that I should return to Ahikereru and render him all the assistance I could from thence. I look an opportunity of addressing the chiefs separately before I parted from them, begging them to curb their tribal jealousies of each other, and give the Colonel all the assistance they could. To show how eager they were to advance, it was with the greatest difficulty I could persuade a sufficient number to return with me to Ahikereru as bearers and an escort for the wounded men. Te Pokiha took the advanced guard again, but asked the Colonel to arm some of his men with breech-loading carbines, and to allow him to advance in his own way. Te Pokiha consequently ordered his men to fire into every likely place where an ambuscade could be laid. In this manner the column advanced to Ruatahuna without further molestation. They afterwards came across many places where several ambuscades had been laid, but by taking a road to the left they were avoided. I returned to Ahikereru on the Bth, arriving there at 3 o'clock in the afternoon. We had travelled at the rate of about one mile per hour. The report of the expedition, from the time I parted from them, I have gathered chiefly from Mr. Gilbert Mair (who I desired to assist Colonel Whitmore as much as possible) and from the Natives who returned to Ahikereru. The column reached Kakanui, in Ruatahuna, on the evening of the Bth, and the Colonel joined the column under Colonel St. John, which was in possession of Taraliaeta Pa. Lieut.-Colonel St. John's column, which advanced on Ruatahuna by the Whakatane River, experienced great difficulties, and had some hard fighting, but they steadily advanced and drove the Natives from every position, taking several pas ; but I will desire Major Mair, who accompanied that column, to furnish a report of their proceedings. During the time the forces were at Ruatahuna, the Arawa had four skirmishes with the enemy, in three of which he lost considerably. Mr. Gilbert Mair was in the advance in all these affairs, and can speak of his own knowledge as to what occurred. In one attack, led by Henare Pukuatua, the rebels left three of their dead behind them, with their arms, &c.; others had been dragged away by the

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

65

A.—No. 10.

retiring enemy. Henare was elated with his success, but was told by the Colonel that he had not done enough, and that he ought to have followed the enemy up. This, together with the proposition to go on to Waikare-Moana while the enemy was in force within a short distance from our people, brought things to a climax. I will not attempt to describe the scene which followed. The greater part of the Arawa, and the Ngatiawa and Ngatipukeko, joined with Henare, and denounced the scheme of advancing on Waikare-Moana with a hostile force in rear and in front, together with the uncertainty of procuring food on the road, as madness; and while I deprecate the insubordination and confusion which arose, I must congratulate Colonel Whitmore and the Colony that he was compelled by the force of circumstances to return to Ahikereru. Men in such a state of exhaustion as to be driven to exchange great coats and blankets for potato cakes, were, to my mind, very unfit to undertake a march to Waikare-Moana, a road for roughness second to none in the Island. Another cause of great dissatisfaction amongst the Ngatipukeko and Ngatiawa, in which the Arawa sympathized, was caused from the fact that it had been reported to them, two days after the march from Whakatane had been commenced, that orders had been given to withdraw the small European force left in charge of the "Whakatane Pa. It was in consideration of these Europeans being left that induced the Ngatipukeko and Ngatiawa to leave only six able-bodied men in charge of the women and children. They objected strongly to an advance on Waikare-Moana, leaving a strong force of the enemy in their rear, who could detach a party to Whakatane and destroy them utterly. They said, at the same time, they were willing to go to Maungapohatu, as a movement in that direction would in a measure secure the safety of Whakatane. On the evening of the 13th the European part of the force, accompanied by about eighty men under Te Pokiha, retired to Oputao, on their way, as the Natives supposed, to Ahikereru. Major Mair was directed to return by the Horomanga track on the morning of the 14th with the remainder of the Native force and the wounded and sick Europeans. It would appear that after the main column arrived at Oputao the question was again mooted of going to Waikare-Moana, but after some discussion the project was given up, and the march to Ahikeruru resumed. As this column marched over the high wooded range (Tahuaroa) they could see Major Mair's column being followed up by the enemy and heavy volleys exchanged. Major Mair's report, however, will I have no doubt give an account of this. The European column arrived at Ahikereru, on the morning of the 15th, in a very exhausted and wet state, heavy rain having fallen during the latter part of the march. Heavy rain and floods prevented our leaving Ahikereru till the morning of the 18th. After destroying the pa, arrived at Port Galatea the same evening. The day before we left Ahikereru, Te Pokeha proposed that I should leave a written document for the husbands of the women about being removed. He suggested they should have the offer made them of joining their families in the Arawa country, where they were to remain. After making inquiry aa to the actual part taken by these men in late events, I acceded to Te Pokeha's considerate and humane request. I therefore left a document in Maori stating the terms on which they would be allowed to join their families, and I also left a memo, in English to be delivered to any European officers they might meet, explaining their exact position. At Ahikereru and Ruatahuna we discovered several letters of importance, some deeply implicating chiefs who have been generally supposed to be loyal. Tiopira Ilukiki, a man of great influence with the Ngatiawa, is the most implicated. A copy of his letter to some of his people I herewith enclose. I have no doubt in my own mind that the Paharakeke exodus was a planned thing, and the two men now in the redoubt here (Kawhena and Taemona), as prisoners, were messengers to Tiopira from Te Kooti. After taking a little rest, I returned to Fort Alfred on the 20th, where I received a note from Wiremu Maihi, written from Ohiwa, in which he stated that the Hauhaus had made their appearance at Opotiki, and had fired upon Dr. Oliver, close to the Waioeka blockhouse. I found afterwards, from Colonel Whitmore, that on receipt of the information he immediately went to Opotiki, where he ascertained that it was a false alarm got up for a purpose; but Major Mair will doubtless report the circumstance to the Government. I arrived in Tauranga on the evening of the 22nd. Although the objects of the expedition were not fully carried out, I have no hesitation in expressing my opinion that very heavy loss has been inflicted on the Urewera tribe. Twenty of their dead have fallen into our hands ; several others were killed or severely wounded in the several skirmishes which took place; over thirty women and children were taken prisoners, and are now in the hands of the Arawa ; and large quantities of provisions have been consumed or destroyed and a great deal of property removed. The much dreaded Urewera country has at last been entered by a hostile force, which has retired with comparatively little loss. The Arawa, in common with the coast tribes, have always been impressed with the inaccessibility of the Urewera country to a hostile force. Tradition mentions the heavy loss and in some cases almost total annihilation of hostile parties who have ventured into Euatahuua, so that with the Urewera it has passed into a proverb, " If my neck is to be severed, it must be severed in ltuatahuna." I cannot forbear mentioning the admirable conduct of the men composing the Constabulary force, which, as an independent observer, I desire to record ; their patience and fortitude under hardships and privations was beyond all praise. I desire also to express my thanks to Mr. Gilbert Mair for the great assistance he rendered me on every occasion, and when it is remembered that he was the only other officer connected with a force of 418 Natives, the Government will admit the task was not a light one. I regret that I was not able to go on to Ruatahuna with the force, as it is quite possible I might have prevented a good deal of the annoyance experienced by Colonel Whitmore. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner. 17

A*—No. 10.

66

REPORTS PROM OPPICERS

EFFECTIVE STATE of the ARAWA CONTINGENT.—Te Awa-o-te-Atua.

Enclosure in No. 59. Eangitaiki, Ist Nowema, 1868. Ki a Tiiiera, Kt a Hoera, Ki a Te Eakapia, Ki a Pineaha, — E hoa ma. Tena koutou katoa, to wairua o nga tangata ngaro ote whenua mokai. Tena ra koutou e tiaki i nga kino o te ao. E hoa e Hoera kaua koe e titiro mai ki muri nei, engari me titiro atu koe, ara koutou katoa ki te kupu whakahau ato tatou hoa aTe Kooti. Ko tena hold te mea e taria ana e o tatou ngakau, katahi hoki toku ngakau ka mea ake ae, koia tena te mahi ; Haere katoa koutou ko nga koroheke, waiho ki te kainga ; koutou tai-tamariki haere katoa ko te whakarongo ki ana tikanga, kia tika tonu te whakarongo atu, kia mau tonu te pupuru i ana tikanga, mea iti, mea nui, kia pono tonu ; He Atua hae a Thowa, Haere i te ara i tika ai a Eawiri, ko te mea i he ai ia, whiua atu, me te wahi i tika ai a Horomona, hopukia, ko te wahi i he ai whiua, pena katoa te tikanga a nga Poropiti me nga Kingi. Heoi aku kupu, Ki a Tihera, ki a Hoera, otira, kia koutou katoa, Na Tiopira. Kei Harema, (Ahikereru).

[translation.] Eangitaiki, Ist November, 1868. To Tiiiera, Hoera, Te Eanapta, Pineaiia, — Friends, salutations to you, the spirits of the men who are lost, of the land enslaved. Salutations, may the Lord preserve you from the evils of the world. Friend Hoera, do not you look this way behind you, but rather look all of you to the word of command of our friend Te Kooti. For that is the thing waited for (desired) by our hearts. Now, for the first time, my heart says, yes that is the work. Go all of you, ieave the old men at the kainga, but all you young men go. Listen attentively to his plans, whether small or great. Be true ; Jehovah is a jealous God. Follow in the road David went, but wherein he erred cast it from you. The matters wherein Soloman was good hold them (or catch them), wherein he erred cast it from you, and so with the acts of all the Prophets and Kings. My word ends. From Tiopira.

No. 60. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Clarke to Mr. G. S. Cooper. (D. 253.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir, — Tauranga, sth June, 1869. I have the honor to transmit, for the information of the Government, a communication from Major Mair, E.M. of Opotiki, reporting upon the late alarm at that place occasioned by the alleged firing on Dr. Oliver by the Hauhaus. From this report, I now have no doubt that the information just conveyed to me by "VViremu Maihi was absolutely correct, and I extremely regret that in my letter of the Ist instant (D. 252), that I should have been led into making a statement seriously reflecting upon the Opotiki settlers. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure in No. 60. Copy of a Letter from Major Mair to Mr. H. T. Clarke. Sie,— Opotiki, 25th May, 1869. I have the honor to report that, on the 22nd instant, I returned from the front 1o resume my regular duties at this place. I found that all had been quiet during my absence up to the 17th

Distribution. 00 q i I i | s tr. C f-t i & 02 I & m b P O o ° I o I o O ra I .st Division, Ngatipikiao !nd Division, Ngatiwhakaue ird Division, Tuhourangi Jnattached, fatigues carrying ammunition and supplies, &c. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 4 6 4 4 6 4 90 136 91 103 152 103 3 3 54 60 Total force in field 3 3 2 2 3 17 17 371 418 Lieutenant Gr. Mair was attached to the 2nd Divisio: ., ani \va: also Acting Ac L T. Clai juta: tKE, it of the ative ibrces.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

67

A.—No. 10,

instant, when Dr. Oliver was fired upon by Hauhaus, at the mouth of the Waioeka Gorge. Upon his reporting to Captain Mair, that officer rode out with a few men, and found the tracks of a small party at the spot where Dr. Oliver said that he had seen about five Natives. The next day Lieutenant Bushton examined the ground, and saw footprints leading from the direction of Waiotake and crossing the Waioeka Eiver. Captain Mair called the settlers in and increased the force on pay, to enable him to place night-picquets on the approaches to the town; upon the receipt of the intelligence Colonel Whitmore visited the settlement, and ordered a detachment of Armed Constabulary from Whakatane to occupy the redoubt, and left instructions for me to reduce the Militia to the smallest possible number required for the picquets; I have therefore reduced the local force to thirty men. The Arawa at Ohiwa inform me that, on the 21st instant, they discovered the tracks of a considerable party at Whakarae (Eakuraku's village), and followed them over the hills towards Waiotake; they appeared to be several days old; no return tracks were seen. Yesterday I sent a few Natives out, and they followed the trail for about two miles up the Waioeka, This places it beyond question that a party of rebels have come down the Waimana, and crossed country to Waioeka, retiring up that gorge upon their presence being discovered. In all probability they were some of Eru Te Maikowha's party, and their object the murder of some unwary settler ; happily this design was frustrated by Dr. Oliver's fortunate escape. The Whakatohea and Ngaitai expect a visit to one of their settlements, and are prepared for them. No other event of importance occurred during my absence. I have, &c., W. G. Matr, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner. Tauranga. Eesident Magistrate.

No. 61. Copy of a Letter from Mr. JEL T. Clarke to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. (D. 1-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir,— Tauranga, 6th June, 1869. I have the honor to report, far the information of the Government, that a short time since letters were received by the different hapus of the Ngaiterangi, announcing the intention of several Waikato chiefs to visit Tauranga. I herewith enclose an original letter (with translation) from Akuhata Tupaea on the subject. Several of the Ngaiterangi chiefs view with concern the attempt, as they consider it, of reviving the schemes practised by the King's party in 1860, when Kingism was first introduced into this district. On the 3rd instant, a deputation of Natives, consisting of the chiefs Enoka, Hori Ngatai, Hohepa Hikutaia, Te Kuka, Harawira, and others, called upon me to state their views. Enoka and Hori Ngatai were the principal speakers, and spoke to the following effect: — " We wish you to know what action we have taken with regard to these letters from Waikato. We have replied that we do not wish them to come for two reasons : First, because we are taken by surprise ; and secondly, we desire to know the object, the real object, of their intended visit." They then added, with great warmth : —" Here are Waikato again seeking to trouble us. Are they not satisfied with what they have already done ? Where are the chiefs of Tauranga? All our confusion comes from without, from Waikato. We have no quarrel with Waikato, never had, that they should desire to bring peace and love. It is their old proceeding. Lot them first make peace with the Governor and with the Arawa, then wo shall be glad to see Waikato." I have repeated as nearly as I can remember their exact words, as I was struck with the good sense contained in their remarks. An expression of opinion from Hori Ngatai ought to carry weight, inasmuch as he with his cousin Te Eeweti Manotini were the principal agents of the King's party in Tauranga, and is well acquainted with the schemes of the Waikato party. I view with great anxiety this endeavour to gain over the sympathies of the loyal Natives, and respectfully submit that all attempts of this kind should be narrowly watched. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Department. H. T. Clarke, Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure in No. 61. Copy of a Letter from Aktthata Ttjpaea to Mr. H. T. Clarke. Ki a Henare Karaka, — Eangiwaea, 27 Mei, 1869. E hoa, tena ra koe. E hoa, tenei taku kupu atu ki a koe, kia rongo hoki hoe kua tae mai nga rongo i aim mai i Ohinemuri; otira he pukapuka mai no reira ko Hori Tupaea hoki i rokohina ki reira. Ko nga korero o taua pukapuka koia enei ka tuhia atu na kia kite koe. Ko Waikato ka tae mai ki konei i roto i enei ra ki Tauranga nei. Te take, he kawe mai ite rongo-pai ite aroha, he kawe mai i nga panui a Te Kingi. Heoi ano aku kupu atu ki a koe. Na to hoa, Na Akuhata Tupaea.

[translation.] To Me. Henry Clarke, — Eangiwaea, 27th May, 18G9. Friend, salutations. Friend, here is my word to you, that you also may bo made acquainted that news has reached this ; it came by Ohincmuri in a letter from thence, where llori Tupaca happened

A.—No. 10.

68

REPORTS EROM OEEICERS

to be. The words of that letter are these now sent. "Waikato is coming to Tauranga in these days. The reason of their coming is to bring good news and love, and the proclamations of the King. Enough, my words to you are ended. From your friend, Aktjhata Tupaea.

No. 62. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Claeke to Mr. G-. S. Coopee. (D. 2-2.) Sie, — Civil Commissioner's Office, Tauranga, 7th June, 18G9. I have the honor to transmit, for the information of the Government, Major Mair's original report upon the late expedition to lluatahuna. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Heney T. Claeke, C.E.

Enclosure in No. G2. Copy of a Letter from Major Maie to Mr. H. T. Claeke. Bib,— Opotiki, 27th May, 1869. I have Ihc honor to report upon the late expedition to Ruatahuna. Upon receiving instructions from Colonel Whitmore to raise a JNative force of 180 men, for service with Lieut.-Colonel St. John's column, I wrote to the different tribes along the coast from "Whakatane to Te Kaha, calling upon them to furnish detachments, and after several delays, occasioned by the badness of the roads to the eastward, made worse by heavy rains, I mustered my contingent at Whakatane, on 28th April. It consisted of the following tribes : — Ngatipukeko—Chiefs Hohaia and Kaperiere ... ... 42 strong. Te Patuwai—Chiefs Iharaira and Eewi ... ... 34 „ Ngaitai—Chief Wiremu Kingi ... ... ... 30 „ Whakatohea— Chiefs Tivvai and Eewi ... ... ... 29 Te Whanau-a-Apanui —Chief Tatana ... ... ... 24 „ Ngatiawa —Chiefs Wepiha and Kawakura ... ... 22 „ Making a total of 181 men. On May 3rd we joined ihe Europeans, about 280 strong, at Opouriao ; hero a quantity of biscuit was issued on charge, and 149 serge shirts, it being understood that the remaining number would be supplied on the return of the force to the Coast. The Whakatane Natives undertook to furnish carriers for about 1,000 lbs. of bacon and a large quantity of ammunition. On the 4th, at 7 a.m., the force marched, entering the Euatoki Gorge at 12, and following up the river bed reached Tunanui, a distance of about eighteen miles, at sunset. On the sth we reached Waikare-Whenua, climbing llu Tieke and other high hills on the right bank, a distance of not more than eight miles, but occupying the entire day. The settlements on this part of the river appear to have been abandoned for two years. At 8 a.m. on the 6th we commenced the ascent of the Wharau Mountain, and at 1 p.m. came upon the first cultivations at an elevation of near 3,000 feet above the sea. The huts had not been occupied for some time. Descending rapidly, the advanced guard surprised the village of new Omaruteangl at 4 p.m.; as far as I can judge, there were some half-dozen men and from twenty-five to thirty women and children, of whom three men, two women, and two children were killed, and one woman and three little children captured. Half an hour afterwards a slight skirmish took place in advance, from which it appeared that the enemy were already being reinforced. We found abundance of food, and camped. On the 7th at daylight we fired the village, and resumed the march up the lluatahuna liiver, burning numbers of huts, and met with the first check near the foot of Hukanui. Here Lieutenant White, of the Opotiki Volunteer Bangers, was shot dead, while leading the scouts across the river, and a man of the Armed Constabulary severely wounded. Some delay occurred while Mr. White was being properly interred and Colonel St. John was making the necessary arrangements for carrying Hukanui, on which, as well as another hill on our left, the enemy now appeared in considerable force. At Colonel St. John's request, I succeeded, after a great amount of entreaty, in getting some of the Natives to the front with the advance, and we succeeded, fighting every foot of the way, in effecting our object with only one casualty, Wiremu Maihi, of Ngaitu, mortally wounded. The position was an important one, but finding that they were being outflanked, the rebels retired precipitately. After a halt of an hour we advanced, and in a short time came in view of the Tahora Pa, situated" in a patch of fern country. When within 1,000 yards, a heavy fire was opened upon us from the pa and from some timber upon its left. Colonel St. John halted, and ordered Colonel Fraser with his division, and myself with part of the Native Contingent, to advance under cover of a wood, and occupy some commanding ground on the right of the position. This plan succeeded, and by 4 p.m. we were in possession. The pa was a strong one, and is famous as being the burial-place of Murahioi, the ancestor of the TJrewera. Te Whenuanui and Manihera usually lived about here. At daylight on the Bth, two men of the Patuwai, while out foraging, surprised an armed Hauhau and killed him. After completely destroying the place, we advanced through a wood to Puhirake, the site of Te Whenuanui's great ichare whakairo, which we burnt, and then through open country to Paerau's place, Tatakoata, which was reached at about 11 o'clock. We found the pa, Whakaii, occupied by about fifty men, and there were about half that number in a wood on the right of it. After some skirmishing, and a careful survey of the position, Colonel St. John disposed his force with a view of surrounding the place, but unfortunately the enemy's scouts on the heights could see every move-

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

69

A.—No. 10.

ment, and report to the garrison, and before our plans could be carried out they retreated—a mixed force of Armed Constabulary and Natives rushing into the pa a minute after the enemy abandoned it. In the meantime a heavy fire was being kept up from the wood, on No. 4 Division, Armed Constabulary, under Sub-Inspector Travers, and that officer was killed, and a number of men wounded in the space of a few minutes. Upon seeing that the pa was in our possession, this party also retreated, leaving one man lying dead within twenty yards of our men. Where the Hauhaus returned to I could not tell, they seemed to disappear as if by magic. Upon this occasion the Native Contingent behaved very well, sapping up by the main approach to the pa. About 7 p.m. Colonel Whitmore and his scouts joined us, having left his column at Kakanui, two miles distant. During the night three of the wounded Europeans and the Ngatitai died. On the morning of the 9th we were joined by the other column. Colonel Whitmore assembled the chiefs, and stated his intention of marching on the next day to Waikare-Moana. The Arawa pleaded fatigue, and were informed that two days would be allowed for rest. A foraging party of Ngatipukeko killed an old man said to be an uncle of Te Whenuanui. On the 10th Colonel Whitmore requested me to furnish a party of fifty men to accompany one hundred Arawa to Ahikereru, to bring up ammunition. Upon laying the matter before my people they consented, provided the Arawa went also; the latter, however, urged that if they went to Ahikereru and back, they would not be fit to go to Waikare. The question was left open. In the afternoon Natives were seen on the Maungahatu road; a party of Armed Constabulary and Arawa drove them back. Lieutenant Mair, who was present, estimated their number at sixty. They called out that they had " finished the Wairoa," that they would make " meat of the Arawa," and used other insulting expressions. Pani, of Ngatimanawa, recognized the voice of Hapurona Kohi. No casualties occurred. Colonel Whitmore again asked the Natives to send a party to Ahikereru to join the main body at Oputao on their return, then move to Waikare-Moana, effect a junction with Major Herrick's column, and then march to Maungapowhatu. This plan did not find favour with any of the chiefs. They all argued that to await the return of a party from Ahikereru would be a waste of time, and that to leave the enemy at Ruatnhuna, and attempt to go to Waikare would be a grave error, and suggested that as long as the enemy remained in our vicinity we ought to stay and fight them, sending out columns in every direction, and, if necessary, go as far as Maungapowhatu. The Whakatane people asked that a portion of them should be permitted to return to protect their wives and children, as the Urewera, not bavins: suffered much loss, might take advantage of their absence and send small parties to the Coast. Upon Colonel Whitmore saying that he had left a detachment of twenty Armed Constabulary to take care of their pa, the matter was dropped. The enemy making a demonstration on the Waikare Eoad, about a mile from our position on the morning of the 11th, an attack on the camp was expected, and orders were given to entrench, while a force of Europeans and Natives went out to meet them. A skirmish ensued, and the enemy were driven off" with a loss, it is supposed, of one killed by Pani. On the 12th the Hauhaus again made their appearance in the same place, and apparently in greater force than on the previous day. Colonel Whitmore himself took command, and marched out with Major Roberta's division and Fox's company to attack in front, while Lieutenant Mair's and Henare Te Pukuatua's company turned the right flank. The enemy, driven back by Colonel Whitmore's advance, were surprised by Ngatiwhakaue, and fled precipitately, leaving three dead. There is reason to believe that they lost two more. On our side the only casualty was Matene Huaki, wounded in the ear. Major Roberts's division and the Whakatohea occupied the enemy's position for the ni;;ht. On the 13th, the Arawa having informed Colonel Whitmore definitely that they would not go to Waikare, he said they should not have any pay, and asked me if my contingent would undertake the conveyance of the wounded and sick to Fort Galatea, by the Pukareao road, saying that he would give a bonus of £5 for each of the wounded. The Natives agreed at once, without my having mentioned the money, but I may as well remark here that they have heard of it since, and think that they are entitled to the amount offered by Colonel Whitmore. During the day Major Roberts was withdrawn, from his post, and in the afternoon the Europeans, followed by Fox and Rewi, with about ninety of the Arawa, started for Oputao, leaving me with five disabled, and twenty sick of the Armed Constabulary, with instructions to retire the next morning by the Pukareao road to Fort Galatea. Colonel Whitmore having told me first that he was going to Ahikereru, and afterwards that he intended to go to Waiknre, I did not know for certain what his route would be, but had good reason to believe that he would take the former. At night I saw Henare, who said that he would lead, and Kepa, of Tuhourangi, and others promised that they would form the rear-guard. Colonel Whitmore's fire at Kakanui, and those of the Hauhaus up the gorge on the Waikare road, were visible. On the 14th the pa was set on fire, and at 7 o'clock we moved off", Henare leading, and quickly followed by Tuhourangi and Ngatirangatihi, whom I could not induce to follow the stretchers, which I had distributed thus: — Ngatipukeko, one; Te Patuwai, one; Ngaitai, Te Whanau-a-Apanui, one; Te Whakatohea, one; and Ngatiawa, one. The sick and lame Europeans I formed into a rear-guard. Marching down the valley for a mile we crossed a stream, and half a mile further the Ruatahuna River, and commenced ascending the Maumaupawa Range by the most; fearful track that it has ever been my lot to travel. I may observe here that the Natives had informed the Colonel that this was a better road than the one by Ahikereru. We had just crossed when we heard a heavy volley near the pa, and in a short time the enemy opened fire on us at long range. Matene and a few of his people now formed a rear-guard, and kept them back. The summit was reached at 12.30, and following the range to the right we halted at Tieke at 3 o'clock, and, it being a favourable place to resist an attack, decided to remain here for the night; the enemy halted at Tahuaroa, about two miles distant. The 15th was rainy, and the Natives advised me not to move, as the slippery nature of the track ■would make it dangerous for the wounded. On the 16th the march was resumed down a steep mountain side and the bed of a stream to Pukareao. by which time the Hauhaus might be heard firing vollej's in our camp. After destroying 18

A.—No. 10.

70

REPORTS PROM OPPICERS

this settlement we climbed another high range to Pukahamuti, and having procured some potatoes descended to the Horomanga Stream and camped. Started at dawn on the 17th, and travelling down stream emerged by the Horomanga Gorge on to the Kuhawaea Plain at noon. Here we found Major Roberts's division, and Lieutenant Mair's company of Arawa, they having been sent from Ahikereru by Colonel Whitmore the day before as a support, in the event of our being followed out by the enemy. At 3.30 we handed over the wounded at Fort Galatea. Upon the Whakatane Natives hearing that the detachment of A.C. left at their pa had been withdrawn about the Bth of the month, they were anxious to get home, as they had not left more than ten able-bodied men to protect upwards of 200 women and children. Colonel Whitmore told them that he was about to send another detachment there at once; he informed them, also, that he was satisfied with their behaviour, and had informed the Arawa that they should have their pay, on account of the assistance rendered during the return march. I regret that the Contingent under my command did not do better service in the advance upon Ruatahuna. Their general conduct was very good, and they displayed far greater tractability than the Arawa, but they could not be got to the front. The Whakatane people, of whom great things were expected, made the excuse that they could not fight with heavy packs of ammunition and bacon on their backs ; and the other tribes pleaded their ignorance of the country, and all expressed their fear of being shot from behind by the Europeans. Unfortunately they had witnessed several cases where our men have been shot by their comrades ; but I am satisfied that it was, in a great measure, the dread of this terra incognita that made them hang back. In the attack on Whakari they did very well, and during our stay there they did their share of picquet and other duty cheerfully, and their conduct in bringing out the wounded quite atones for any previous reinissness. lam of opinion that the late expedition has done a great deal towards wearing off their nervous fear of the country, and that better service may be expected of them on a future occasion. That the Urewera have suffered heavily in the late operations there can bo no doubt. They have lost about twenty of their number killed, besides prisoners, and the damage done to property in the shape of houses, cattle, horses, pigs, potatoes, &c, is very great. Added to this is the important lesson now learnt for the first time, that their country, inaccessible though it may be, will not shelter them from punishment. Whether they will remain quiet after their late reverses remains to be seen. The presence of Te Kooti at Ruatalmna Mas not proved. The Arawa were confident about it from their having seen some one among the ranks of the enemy who was evidently an important personage ; but I am of opinion that if he had been among them, the Urewera would have stood their ground better than they did in the last engagements. I have, &c, W. G. Maie, R.M.

No. 63. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Claeke to Mr. G-. 8. Coopee. (D. 3-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, SIE, — Tauranga, 7th June, 18(59. I have the honor to report, for the information of the Government, that there are at this time three Native prisoners detained in one of the redoubts at this place. Two of them (Kawhena and Taiinona) were apprehended at Kokohinau by the Arawas, suspected of being bearers of a message from Te Kooti to the people of Kokohinau. They admit that they were enrolled in Te Kooti's forces, but state that they ran away. This is doubtful, as they also admit having left their wives and children at Ruatahuna. The other man, Ihaia, is a man of some importance in the Ngatitahu hnpu of Taupo. The charge against him is a serious one —his principal accuser is the chief of his tribe. I herewith enclose an extract from Te Reweti Te Kume's letter, in which he accuses him of assisting Te Kooti, Ac. I desire to be instructed in what manner they are to be dealt with. There is very little doubt of their guilt, but it will be very difficult to collect the necessary evidence to convict them in our Courts. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Department. H. T. Claeke, Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure in No. 63. Extract of a Letter from Te Reweti Waikato Te Ktjme to Mr. H. T. Claeke. Orakeikorako, Ist Aperira, 18G9. Ki a Te Kaeaka, Kaiwhakawa Tumuaki, — E hoa tena koe. Tenei ta matou reta ka tukua atu ki a koe. E hoa heaha to putake i katia ai nga pu (mo) matou i tenei takiwa ? Mehemea i rongo koe ki nga korero parau ate tangata ehe ana ta te tangata korero, erangi (kei) a matou ano te korero tika ki a koe. Engari kotahi te tangata Hauhau i tae mai ki a matou, ko Ihaia; ko tana korero tenei i haere mai ai, kia pai atu matou ki ta raua mahi ko Te Kooti, kia tukua mai raua ki to matou takiwa haere ai. Kahore matou i pai ki taua tangata. Erangi, mehomea ka hold mai ano taua tangata ka mau i a matou. Erangi, ko taua tangata no matou, he Hauhau tonu atu ia, tae noa ki tenei ra. Ko te putake tenei o nga korero kino ate tangata mo matou. Ko taua korero ehe ana. He hae tetahi putake ate tangata. Ko matou hoki he tangata Kawana tawhito, tae noa ki enei ra. Na matou nga whawhai ki te Hauhau, aTe Kaokaoroa, aTe Teko, aTe A\va-o-te-Atua ; ko nga riri tena i riri ai au. Ko tena Hauhau hei aha maku ? Te Reweti "Waikato Te Kitme, Na Noatitahtj.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

71

A.—No. 10.

[translation.] Orakeikorako, Ist April, 1869. To Mr. Claeke, Magistrate and Commissioner, —■ • Friend, salutations. Here is our letter which we send to you. Sir, what is the reason the guns are withheld from us at this time ? If you have listened to the false reports of men, these words of men are false. We will declare unto you words of truth. There is one man of the Hauhaus who has been to us, his name is Ihaia. His words which he came to bring arc to induce us to acquiesce in his and Te Kooti's doings, that they should be allowed to come into our district. But we would not consent to that man. Should that man come back, we will apprehend him. But that man is one of us (our hapu), he is a thorough Hauhau even to this day, and this is the reason why men speak evil of us, but it is not correct. Jealousy is also one reason. "We are old Government men, even to these days. We fought against the Hauhaus at Te Kaokaoroa, Te Teko, and Te Awa-o-te-Atua; those are the fights in which I took part. Who has any consideration for these Hauhaus ? Te Eeweti Waikato Te Kume and Ngatitaiht.

D. 1-2, June 6, 1869.

No. 64. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Claeke to Mr. G. S. Cooper. (D. G-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir,— Tauranga, 9th June, 18G9. In continuation of my communication of date and number quoted in the margin, I have the honor to report that I have again been visited by some of the Tauranga chiefs, who came to bring me information just received. Te Kuka, one of our Assessors, produced several letters he had received from the Pirirakau hapu, all of which I read. I compared them with other letters to other chiefs of the Ngaterangi from the same hapu, and have come to the conclusion that we can no longer hope to get any reliable information from that quarter, as the intelligence conveyed is of the most contradictory character, calculated to mislead and perplex. I am informed bv Te Kuka that a meeting is just about being held at Pacngaroa, a village in the ranges about fourteen miles from hence, at which it is said revenge for those killed at Te Eanga is being discussed. The notorious Kcreopa and the murderer Te Tauaro are said to bo the conveners. Peno Taka, of the Pirirakau, has been deputed to represent that hapu. This, I conclude, has reference to the intention expressed by Kereopa at the Ohineroa meeting. This information, together with the expressed intention of the Waikatos to come to Tauranga, is causing considerable excitement and distrust in the minds of the Natives. I have been repeatedly warned to be on the alert, and on no account to relax my vigilance because the disaffected Natives choose to make, apparently, friendly overtures. Mr. Gilbert Mair has just returned from Eotorua. There does not appear to be much information to be gained in that direction. Mr. Mair met Wiremu Bupa, an old chief of the Ngatikereru, who stated that two Natives of the Ngatirangiwewehi hapu (Kereopa's), had come from Patetere to see their relatives, and that they had stated that there is no truth in "the King's" desire to make peace. That Bewi Maniapoto had returned to Waikato from South Taupo; that ho had expressed great dissatisfaction at the interior of the Island being occupied by Colonial troops, and that he had given out that he will " pour the Waikato as water into Taupo." I would remark that the Hauhaus of Oropi, in this district, tell the same story. I have, &c, H. T. Clahke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.

No. 65. Copy of a Letter from Mr. 11. T. Clarke to Mr. G. S. Cooper. (D. 7-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sib,— Tauranga, 11th June, 1869. As the cutter " Bella" is just about to sail for Auckland, I avail myself of the opportunity to communicate the sad intelligence received yesterday morning from Fort Galatea. It would appear that Colonel St. John, and the officers named in the margin, proceeded to Opepe, in the Taupo District, for the purpose of fixing the best site for a redoubt in that locality. On the afternoon of the 7th instant (you will gather from the accompanying letter from Colonel Fraser to Major Roberts) the escort was attacked at Opepe, and it would appear (with the exception of the two men who escaped) wholly destroyed. You will observe that the letter conveying the intelligence gives the impression that it was written in a hurry and under some excitement, so that there is a hope that matters will not be so disastrous as we are at first sight led to suppose. Most of the men composing the escort belonged to the Tauranga cavalry, and are most of them related to people here. This, together with the exaggerated rumours of a threatened attack upon the town, had created a complete panic amongst the European population. After consultation with Colonel Ilarington, the commander of the district, I wrote a letter to Captain Bingham, of H.M.S. " Virago," at present lying at the outer anchorage in this harbour, requesting him if possible to move the "Virago" to the anchorage opposite this town, and give us the moral benefit of his presence. I herewith enclose a copy of my letter to Captain Bingham. I received a note from the senior lieutenant this morning, informing me that preparation was being made for moving the " Virago" up. Colonel Ilarington left this early yesterday for Fort Galatea, there to act as emergency requires. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.

Major Cummings, Capt. Moorsom, Captain George, Lieut. Clarke.

A.—No. 10,

72

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

D. 7-2, Juno 11 1869.

Enclosure 1 in No. 65. Copy of a Letter from Lieut.-Colonel Fraser to Major Roberts. My dear Roberts, — Fort Galatea, Bth June, 1869. We have heard very bad news from Taupo. Two men of St. John's escort have just arrived (in their shirts, almost), and report the surprise of the escort about 4 p.m. yesterday at Opepe. St. John, Cummings, Moorsom, Clarke, George, and an orderly, had left Opepe about 11 in the morning,— they do not know where for —and seventy or eighty armed Maoris came upon them as they were lying in their whares, made pretend to be friendly and then opened fire. Those two who have come in can of course only conjecture the fate of their comrades, but I fear too much they have all been killed. There were twelve of them altogether. I am sending down to Armitage for bandages, as Leslie has none, and some wounded man may come in. I hope to God St. John, Cummings, &c, are all right. Two orderlies whom I sent from here to St. John had not arrived, and I very much fear have met the same fate. I need hardly tell you to look out sharp down the road. Tours, &c, James Fraseh.

Enclosure 2 in No. 65. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Claeke to Captain Bingitam:, R.N. (Gr. 259.) Civil Commissioner's Office, SIE, — Tauranga, 10th June, 1869. I have the honor to acquaint you that, from information received by me from Native sources, I am led to believe that some hostile movement upon this settlement is in contemplation by the disaffected Natives. It appears that a meeting has been convened to take place at Paengaroa, a village in the ranges, about fourteen miles from this town. The subject of obtaining satisfaction for those chiefs who fell at Te Rangi in June, 1864, is one to which the attention of the meeting has been called. The notorious chief Kereopa, the principal actor in the Opotiki tragedy is said to be interested in the result. I have been urged by the loyal Native chiefs to be on the alert, and on no account relax my vigilance. The information brought in from Taupo this morning, involving the safety of several of the officers of the Colonial forces, will, before many hours have elapsed, be in circulation amongst the Natives ■with many exaggerations ; this acting on the excitable minds of a race impulsive to a degree mav precipitate matters, and if the town be attacked in force will be attended with the most appalling results, hampered as we are by so many women and children. I therefore deem it my duty, after consultation with the Officer Commanding this District, to beg of you to extend towards all the assistance you can, and I would suggest that this could best be given by moving the " Virago" up to the anchorage opposite this town. The moral effect of your close proximity may avert altogether the threatened danger, and restore confidence to our small European population. I have, &c, 11. T. Clarke, Captain Bingham, 11.M.5. " Virago." Civil Commissioner.

No. 6G. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Claeke to Mr. G-. Cooper. (D. 8-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir, — Tauranga, 12th June, 1860. Since posting my letter of date and number quoted in the margin, I have the honor to inform you that further intelligence has been received from Taupo. Herewith I enclose a copy of a letter just received from the Brigade-Major. The intelligence received has cast a gloom over this town, as most of those killed have left relatives to mourn their loss. An only son of my clerk, Mr. Gill, is amongst the slain. The officers escaped by a mere accident. They appear to have left the troopers with their tired horses to rest at Opepe, while the Colonel and his officers extended their inspection to the Waikato Eiver. I gather this from private letters. I herewith transmit (with translation) a copy of a letter left by Te Kooti at Opepe. I would respectfully suggest that great caution be used with regard to this document, and the information imparted. It is clear that the writer of the letter has been at some pains to fix the responsibility of the attack on Opepe upon Paora Hapi ; for, after having apparently concluded his letter, he adds another paragraph which contains remarks upon which there can be but one construction. "What could be Te Kooti's motive in thus stigmatizing one of his secret friends ? I think, therefore, that these statements should be received with great caution. On the other hand, if the redoubts intended to be built at Opepo and Runanga are the " Kati" referred to in the letter, the information must have been derived from Taupo Natives. I would also remark, that it will be seen by reference to some of my previous reports, that statements have been made accusing Te Poihipi of encouraging Te Kooti, but no letters were found either at Ahikereru or Ruatahuna implicating any Taupo Chiefs. It is greatly to be regretted that Te Kooti and followers have at last succeeded in crossing over into what may be considered Waikato territory, thus I fear jeopardizing our settlements in the Waikato as well as this place. I put no reliance on promises made by the King party. Matutaera and some few others individually may be desirous of peace, but they cannot control the body of the

A.—No. 10.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

73

people. There are hundreds of wild, restless spirits, who would, T believe, join Te Kooti without hesitation —such men as Kereopa, Tauaro, arid others of a like stamp, will certainly do so, and carry with them their followers and sympathizers. Ido therefore respectfully urge that immediate steps may be taken to ensure the safety of the out-settlements. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure in No. 66. Copy of a Letter from Brigade-Major A. S. BiEcn to Mr. H. T. Clarke. Sir,— Head-Quarters, Field Force, Fort Galatea, 18th June, 1869. I have the honor to acquaint you, by order of Lieut.-Colonel St. John, that he has just returned to Fort Galatea with the officers and men named in the margin.* He, with the detail there named, proceeded during the course of Monday, the 7th of June, to Tapuwaeharuru from Opepe, and returned to the latter place at daylight on the morning of Wednesday, 9th June. Colonel St. John's return to that place was delayed for the purpose of getting a party of Natives to accompany him in addition to his own smail force, on account of a report brought by two surveyors named Hallett, that they had seen two Europeans lying dead at Opepe, and that the whares had been destroyed by fire. On arriving at Opepe, Colonel St. John found a letter (a copy of which is enclosed herewith) and the dead bodies of the men, a return of which is appended.. Colonel St. John stayed upwards of two hours at Opepe, engaged in the search, and " cooeing" for stragglers and burying the dead. I regret to state that Cornet Smith, Opotiki Volunteer Cavalry, is still missing ; but his fate alone, of the troop who left here with Lieut.-Colonel St. John, is yet uncertain. Lieut.-Colonel St. John directs me to inform you that it is his opinion Te Kooti has proceeded to Tauranga, on the shore of Lake Taupo, and that he estimates his force, by the appearance of the tracks, to be between 200 and 300 men, mounted and on foot. With regard to the letter from Te Kooti, Colonel St. John has been careful not to publish it to the Natives, or in any way, except confidentially ; and he requests that you will exercise a similar caution, but he thinks a copy marked " Confidential" should be sent to Auckland to the proper authority, that the settlements on the Waikato may be prepared for any sudden outbreak. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, A. S. Birch, Tauranga. Brigade Major.

Head-Quarters, Field Force, Fort Galatea, 10th June, 1869. Retttrk of Armed Constabulary Officers and Men of Volunteer Cavalry killed at Opepe on the 7th June, 1809 :— Sergeant flattery, Tauranga Volunteer Cavalry; Trooper Lawson (Ensign, Auckland Militia); Troopers Gill, C. Johnston, C. Poitier, J. Bidois, Tauranga Volunteer Cavalry; H. G. Ross, Bay of Plenty Volunteer Cavalry (Lieutenant, Auckland Militia), T. Cook; Trumpeter McGillop. Missing. —Cornet Smith, Bay of Plenty Volunteer Cavalry. Eeturned to Fort Galatea on the Bth and 10th of June. —Trooper Lockwood, Tauranga Volunteer Cavalry ; Sergeant Dette, and Troopers Stevenson and Learey, Bay of Plenty Volunteer Cavalry. A. 8. Biech, Brigade Major.

No. 67. Copy of a Letter from Mr. 11. T. Clarke to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. (D. 12-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sib,— Tauranga, 19th June, ISG9. In my report, of date and number cited in the margin, I had the honor to inform you that a party of Waikato chief's had announced their intention of visiting Tauranga. From Hamiora Tii, Assessor, and Turere and Te Patu, pensioners, I learn that the Native chiefs in connection with the King party named in the inargin,t with their followers came to Katikati on the 9th instant. About twenty of the Ngaiterangi, immediately connected with Hori Tupaea, not wishing to affront the old chief (who it afterwards appeared had encouraged the visit of the Waikato chiefs) by slighting his guests, had previously gone to Katikati to receive them. Takerei and party on arrival expressed their surprise that there were so few Ngaiterangi to receive them. They were asked whether they had not received letters from different " hapus " telling them to remain away. They replied that they had, but only looked upon them as letters written in a hurry to save appearances. Te Patu, of Ngaiterangi, explained all the circumstances, telling them that Ngaiterangi would not meet them unless they first declared their object in coming. Hunia and Takerei expressed themselves disappointed in not finding a larger gathering of people to hear the King's proclamation explained. They slated that they came to seek their own; that they did not wish to interfere with the Queen party, but wished to reclaim their old friends, those who had given in their allegiance to the Maori King, naming llohepa Hikutaia, Hori Ngatai, Wiremu Parere and others; these were the men they desired to meet. They wished to explain to them the purport of the King's proclamation, especially that part of it where he says, " The right hand to the right and the left to the left," the Maori to the Maori and the * liieut.-Colonel St. John, A.C. ; Inspector dimming; Captain Moorsoin, T. V.U.; Captain St. Ueorge; Lieutenant Clarke, T.V.C.; Trooper Young, T.V.C.; Trooper V. Bidois, T.V.C. t Takerei Te Eau, ilunia, Te Pakaroa, lliUi, Tainati Te Tiwlia, Iloia Te Tiuri, Tukukino, Iloliepa, Te Kopara, Reihana, Pinealia. 19

June 6, 1869, D. 1-2.

A.—No. 10,

74

REPORTS PROM OFFICERS

June 15, 1869 D. 8-2.

Pakeha to the Pakeha; that when they had separated they were to wait till eighteen months had elapsed from the time the proclamation was made when the God of their fathers would appear in this holy temple as he did in olden times to Israel. This was the burden of their message. They, after two days' rest, returned to Waihi, and from thence to Ohinemuri. Nothing has yet transpired respecting the decision arrived at by the meeting at Paengaroa, reported in my letter of 9th June, 1869, D. 6-2. I herewith transmit a copy of a letter (with translation) really from Te Hira Tuiri, in which he urges the Ngaiterangi to go inland, in other words to separate themselves entirely from us. I have, &c., H. T. Clarke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure in No. 67. Copy of a letter from Mere Kuurtj to Hikutaia and others. Ohinemuri, Hune 4, 1869. Nau mai, haere atu ra e taku reta ki a Hikutaia, ki a Enoka ki a koutou katoa, ki a Ngaiterangi katoa. Tena ra koutou ote iwi. Na, he ki tenei ki a koutou, kua rite ta koutou nei wahi i a koutou nei ra, ara, i nga ra o muri i tenei turns me aim mai ki uta. Kia rongo mai koutou, ko enei ra na te Atua, ehara ite mea kei te tangata enei ra. Titiro mai, kua kotahi nga iwi, ara nga morehu o te motu nei kua kotahi tonu nga morehu, te kupu ra chara ite kupu tangata he kupu Atua : —" Te maui ki te maui, te matau ki te matau." Ka mutu tena. He kupu ano tenei. Haere mai koutou ki Otawhiwhi, kei kona te huihuinga, kei kona te kupu. Kei whiriwhiri koutou, haere mai kia rongo koutou i te kupu. Na Mere Kuurtj.

[translation.] Ohinemuri, 4th June, 1869. Go forth, 0 my letter, unto Hikutaia, to Enoka, and to all of you, that is, to all the Ngaitcrangi. Salutations to you, 0 the tribe. This is the word to you. The time for living where you do at present is past,* and during the ensuing days you must come inland. Hearken ; these days belong to God, they are not in the hands of men. Look, now ; the tribes have become one, that is to say, the survivors of this island are all united, and this word is not the word of men but rather that of God, which says : —" The right hand to the right hand, and the left hand to the left hand." This is all about that. This is another word. Come hither to Otawhiwhi which will be the place of assembling, and the place where the word will be heard. Don't hesitate, but come hither, so that you may hear the word. From Mere Kuurij.

No. 08. Copy of a Letter from Mr. 11. T. Clarke to Mr. G. S. Coopeh. (D. 16-3.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir,— Tauranga, 20th June, 18G9. In continuation of my Report, of date and number as per margin, I have the honor to inform you that I have received another letter from Te Poihipi Tukairangi and liohepa Tamamutu, pressing for assistance in men and ammunition. I obtained from Colonel Ilarington four kegs of rifle ammunition, with two pack-horses to convey it as far as Kaiteroria for the Taupo Natives. I find from inquiry that the ammunition supplied by Mr. Wilson was for smooth-bore muskets. Captain George arrived here from Fort Galatea on the 18th instant. From him I learn that Colonel St. John had given up, for the present, the idea of moving the force intended to take post at Ruuanga, as the enemy's cavalry were scouring the Taupo Plains, and it was supposed that ho was in force, ready to dispute the advance of our small force under the command of Major Roberts. Under these circumstances Captain George came to report himself to me. I have therefore requested that officer to proceed at once to Taupo, and report without delay the actual position of matters in that district. I herewitli append communications from Captain St. George and Mr. Mitchell, surveyor, in which they urge that support be at once sent to Tapuwaeharuru. Mr. Mitchell is deserving of great praise for his activity and able assistance. From the bearer of Te Poihipi's letters I learn that a party of friendly Natives went from Tapuwaeharuru to Te Hatepe by water, to ascertain, if possible, the fate of the occupants of the pa. He states that they could not find any bodies, but that there were clothes covered with blood lying about, and it was supposed that the bodies had been buried in the trenches of the pa, which had been filled in. There were too few in the party to admit of their making a thorough search. The messenger states that the enemy is in great force, having been joined by most of the Natives from the south of the Lake. 1 am anxious to obtain from Auckland information as to the effect the occupation of South Taupo by Te Kooti is having on the minds of the Waikato Natives. If the Taupo messenger is to be credited, it would appear that the Natives of Te Papa, Hitiri's settlement, and other " kaingas" of the Ngatiraukawa people, are sending out small parties to watch the proceedings of the friendly Natives, with what ultimate intention is not known. lam anxiously looking for information from Taupo. * Referring to their connection with Europeans. —11. T. Clabke.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

75

A.—No. 10.

I am glad to be able to report that Cornet Smith, the missing officer of the unfortunate troopers slain at Opepe, has come in after ten days' absence in the bush without food. He was badly wounded in the foot, which greatly impeded his walking. The telegram sent on the 28th May has not yet reached me. I have, &c. The Under Secretary, Native Department. H. T. Clarke, Civil Commissioner. P.S. —From a letter just received from Mr. Eussell, Acting General Government Agent, I fear that orderlies Eaymond and Hutton have fallen into the hands of the enemy. —H. T. C.

Enclosure 1 in No. 68. Copy of a Letter from Captain St. George to Mr. H. T. Clarke. Sir, — Tauranga, 18th June, 1869. I have the honor to send the following report: —On the 11th instant I started for Eunanga with Major Eoberts and Constabulary. On the 12th we reached Te Arawhatahou, and a party under Lieutenant Thompson rode into camp, saying that they had turned back from carrying telegrams to Napier, as they had come across the tracks of about twenty-five of the enemy's cavalry. They also had heard Maoris talking in a valley near. The place where they saw these tracks was opposite Maniania. Lieutenant Thompson was sent back to Fort Galatea with this news, and Major Eoberts waited for orders. On the 13th I started off three Napier orderlies with telegrams for Napier. They returned, having seen some eight of the enemy's cavalry. On the evening of the 13th, Colonel St. John sent up an order to return at once to Galatea. At midnight on the 13th I again sent oft' orderlies, by a different route, for Napier, and have since heard that they were stopped, and chased to within a few miles of Tapuwaeharuru, so the telegrams have not got through. From information given me by a Taupo Native last night, I find that Tapuwaeharuru is in danger of being attacked at once ; the Native told me that yesterday (17th) was the day that the attack was to be made. I forgot to mention that Major Eoberts returned to Galatea on the 14th, and I immediately came on, and arrived here at three o'clock this morning. I will start back at once, and get to Te Taheke to-night. I take up the force of Arawa that you have got for me. The Taupo Natives have very little ammunition ; they have some smooth-bore, but are armed with rifles.* The Ngatitahu never had any served out to them. The enemy have been opposite Ohaki, so I have no doubt but that they will cross the Waikato there. Mr. H. Mitchell, Surveyor, returned from Taupo yesterday ; he is now at Maketu, rather knocked up. I wish particularly to mention him to the Government. He, on several occasions, has given me assistance. On the last he volunteered to ride to Oruanui, to muster the people there and carry letters for me to other chiefs. At the time he volunteered I could not get any one to go who could be trusted. Since then he has walked the greater part of the way from Taupo, to try and get help. I have, &C, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Tauranga. J. C. St. George.

Enclosure 2 in No. 08. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. W. Mitchell to Mr. H. T. Clarke. Sir,— Maketu, 17th June, 1869. I write to inform you of the position of the friendly Natives at Tapuwaeharuru. When I left, on Friday morning last, at 2 a.m., there were then thirty-three men in the pa, and their ammunition would only last them, in the event of an attack, for two days at the most. I left at the above date intending to proceed to Karamuramu (Fort Galatea) to hasten on support, but could get no horse nor canoe to cross the "Waikato at Ohaki. I then had to go on to Kaiteriria on foot, via Orakeikorako. On arriving there I found Henare to Pukuatua, who had lost his horse. He informed me that Colonel Harington had gone on to Fort Galatea and to Taupo on the Saturday. I therefore depended on his consulting with Colonel St. John, and forwarding support to Tapuwaeharuru. On Tuesday, however, a messenger took a letter from me to the officer commanding at Fort Galatea, describing the perilous position of Poihipi and friends. Yesterday, another messenger arrived at Ohinemutu from Tapuwaeharuru. He left the latter place yesterday morning. To Kooti was still at Tauranga, and To Poihipi says that the 16th instant was the day appointed by Te Kooti to attack Tapuwaeharuru, and he urged the Arawa to push on to his relief. Ngatiwhakaue send fifty men to-morrow, and Ngatitu were to proceed to-day. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Tauranga. H. W. Mitchell.

No. 69. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Clarke to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. (D. 17-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir,— Tauranga, 20th June, 1869. I have the honor to enclose a copy of a letter just received from Colonel St. John, in which he informs me that he is not in a position to afford assistance to the Taupo friendly .Natives. lam therefore justified in the course I took in sending them relief. I have, &c., H. T. Clarke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner. * Four kegs sent.— H. T. Claeke.

A,—No. 10.

76

REPORTS PROM OPFICERS

Enclosure in No. 69. Copy of a Letter from Colonel St. John to Mr. H. T. Claeke. Sib,— Fort Alfred, 17th June, 1869. I have the honor to inform you that a messenger has arrived from Eunanga bearing me orders to move a strong force there. lam accordingly doing so. I fear that the orderlies sent by Major Roberts are i«tercepted,* as no tidings of them had reached Eunanga when McDonald left. It seems to be the impression that the Opepe affair was not perpetrated by Te Kooti. I am, however, confident it was, and I have received information that a great meeting is called at some place at the base of Tongariro. I think there is no danger for the present for Opotiki or Whakatane, and have therefore withdrawn my detachment from Opotiki and Whakatane, as I require them urgently for the protection of my line of posts. I have received a letter from Mr. Mitchell, asking, in the name of the Taupo friendlies, for arms and assistance, neither of which lamin a position to afford. Colonel Whitmore wishes me very much to put Fox at Horuwi, but I have heard nothing of him. I wrote to you about him, and also sent the agreement entered into (which I beg may be returned), but have had no answer from you. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, J. 11. St. John, Tauranga. Commanding Taupo Field Forces. P.S. —Tou will be glad to hear that Cornet Smith returned this night, after having been ten days living on grass, &c, walking with a wound in his foot. He is doing well. J. 11. St. John.

No. 70. Copy of a Letter from Mr. J. A. "Wilson to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. General Government Office, Sir,— Auckland, 21st June, 1869. I have the honor to state that Mr. Commissioner Clarice's report, forwarded by the "Ean^atira," was given by me to the Captain of that vessel only five minutes before her advertised time of departure from Onehunga. The Wellington mail had left Auckland an hour when Mr. Clarke's despatch was received by me. He had been obliged to write after the mail at Tauranga had closed. His letter came by private hands, and hence the slight delay in its receipt. I mention this matter thus particularly because I think it is important at the present time that information and reports should be forwarded punctually, but in this case I had not time to write a line or time even to send to Mr. Mackay's Office for a trustworthy person to take the letters to Onehunga. Mr. Commissioner Clarke's three letters forwarded herewith are prior in date to that which you have already received but they arrived here after that letter, having come by sailing vessel. I think the intelligence conveyed in these letters gives just cause of apprehension, and I quite concur with Mr. Clarke's remarks contained at the end of his letter of the 12th instant. I cannot but think that the recent proceedings of Mr. Firth and other private gentlemen at Upper "Waipa, in regard to the unaurrendered Natives who live at Tokangamutu, will probably have the effect of extinguishing in the minds of those Natives a hope which has, perhaps, paralyzed hostile action on their part hitherto, and enabled the moderate Hauhaus to over-rule the opinions of the more belligerent of their party. If this be so, it can be no matter of surprise if the Tokangamutu chiefs accede to the proposal of Te Kooti, who has frequently solicited their co-operation. But to turn from these speculations to facts with which we have to grapple. We know that Te Kooti, or at any rate, his organized band, under its leaders, has passed into the " King" territory in force. Mr. Samuel Clark, who saw their trail, informs me that Colonel St. John has, in his opinion, made a low estimate of Te Kooti's force. If Te Kooti has gone there uninvited, the danger mentioned by Mr. Clarke, in his letter of the 12th instant, is imminent. With him I fear that wild spirits, dazzled by Te Kooti's prestige, will flock to his standard; while conl. calculating, malignant minds will be encouraged to embark in the venture, having a nucleus like Te Kooti's tried force to rally upon. But if Te Kooti has gone to the Waikato territory by invitation, then there can be no doubt of the danger to the out-settlements in that district. The enemy could far outnumber our scattered population, and Te Kooti never gives warning of his approach. This is one of his stratagems; and sometimes, as at Ohiwa, he says that Ids god requires him to move in a direction opposite to that where he intends to attack. On the present occasion he says he is going to attack Eotorua. I have warned Colonel Moule and Mr. Searancke, and requested the latter to watch for information. I attach copies of all the telegrams received from those officers. Colonel Moule informs me that Rewi with seventy men have been away from Tokangamutu some time; relative to this, see the last paragraph of Mr. Clarke's letter of the 9th instant. A comparison of dates shows that Eewi must have been about Taupo at the time Te Kooti passed from the Urewera country to that district. On the receipt of Mr. Commissioner Clarke's letters, I went to Mr. Whitaker, taking the letters with me, and stated the cause of my coming ; but Mr. Whitaker declined to enter on the subject in any way, as he could not give his mind to it. He said that he had already informed the Government that he could not undertake the supervision of public affairs. I shall therefore rely upon my own judgment in case of an emergency. I have, &c, The Hon. Dr. Pollen, Wellington. J. A. Wilson. * Made their escape to Tapuwaeharuru.—ll. I. Claeke.

A.—No, 10.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

77

No. 71. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Claeke to Mr. G. S. Cooper. (D. 2S-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir, — Tauranga, 25th June, 1869. I have the honor to transmit, for the information of the Government, a copy of a letter (with translation) which I this morning received from Maketu, conveying information said to have been received from Waikato, and setting forth the consequences likely to ensue should Te Kooti join the King party. The man who brought this information is a rebel Tapuika, and one of Hakaraia's adherents. Eruera, to whom the information was given, is supposed to have a leaning to Hakaraia's party, and, from his general bearing and close family connection with the disaffected Natives, a man I do not altogether trust. The information conveyed by Retireti Tapihana is vague, and has been written with some effort. I have, however, desired Retireti, as soon as he is well enough, to give me, in writing, a detailed account of the information brought by Hunia. I have not heard from Dr. Nesbitt or Captain George since the morning of the 21st instant, at which lam a little, surprised. I hope to hear before the " Tauranga " sails to-morrow. At the risk of being considered an alarmist, I would warn the settlers in Waikato to be on the alert, and not suffer themselves to bo lulled into a false security. That Rewi Maniapoto has been in communication with the friendly Natives at Taupo, asking them to allow Te Kooti to go through their district unmolested, wo have ample proof. wonderful influence Te Kooti exercises over all tribes with which ho comes in contact is notorious, and should be borne in mind. His followers, with wild fanaticism, believe that he is " The sent of God to declare His power to the world, and also to the men of sin" (in which category every one possessed of a white skin is included), and are ready to carry out their leader's behests to the letter. Of the fatal error of disregarding warnings given on sufficient grounds, we have too many melancholy instances to deplore, and I, as I have before stated, at the risk of being considered an alarmist, would warn all settlers, both in this and in other out-settlements of this Province, to be prepared for any emergency. No mischief can result from being in a state of preparedness, and much possible evil may be averted. I am led into making the above remarks from telegrams received from Mr. Searancke and Colonel Moule, copies of which are herewith enclosed. I would remark further, that the only dispute between a section of the Ngatiraukawas and a hapu of the Arawas is the supremacy of Her Majesty the Queen in these Islands, and forces upon me the belief that the officers in the Waikato are being misled, and are not fully alive to the present critical state of these districts. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Department. H. T. Claeke, C.C.

Enclosure 1 in No. 71. Ki a Te Kahaka Komitiana, — Maketu, Hune 21, 1569. E hoa, kei konei ano ahau, kihai ahau i tae i tonei mate kino, katahi ano taku ra i maranga akc ai, ko te ope ia kua riro, kia tino pai au ka haere ki te arataki ia ratou. Kati tena. Kia noho matatu kia koutou—tenei tetahi korero ote taha ki Kenana nei. Ko Hunia i tae mai i Waikato, na Eruera i korero ki a matou, e tika katoa ana o au i korero mai na ki au, mehemea kua puta ate Kooti kua whawhai a kona, me tua atu. Otiia taku mohio, he nui te kino o aua korero, tena pea e kohuru ki Waikato its mea kua puta atu aTe Kooti ki tana hoa ki ate Kingi. Nui atu aua korero, kahore ahau e tino kaha ana ki te tuhituhi mei ora ahau kua tino tae atu ahau ki koua. Heoi ano Na Retieeti Tapiiiana.

[translation.] To Mr. CIAEKE, Civil Commissioner, — Makctu, 21th June, 1869. Friend, lam still here, I did not go (to Taupo) because of this bad sickness. I have only this day arisen (from my bed). The war party (Arawas) have gone on (to Taupo), and as soon as I recover sufficiently I will follow them up. Do you be on your guard. This is some news from Canaan. Hunia (a Tapuika Native) has arrived there from Waikato, and Eruera informs us of the news (he brought). It is all true what you told me, and he (Hunia) savs if he, Te Kooti, gets through, fighting will ensue in consequence at Tauranga and elsewhere. My impression is that this news is very bad, and it is quite probable that murders will be committed iu the Waikato before long, because Te Kooti will soon join his friend the King. I am not able to tell you all the news on account of my illness, but I hope soon to go and see you. This is all, Eetieeti Tapihana.

Enclosure 2 in No. 71. Copy of a Telegram from Mr. W. N. Searancke to the Resident Minister, Auckland. (No. 09-62.) 22nd Juni, 1869. No news from the interior. Natives backwards and forwards daily. Settlers in a state of perfect confidence, and do not believe in To Kooti's visiting this district, Reports looked upon as only emanating from Auckland. The Resident Minister, Auckland. "W. N. Seaeancxe, E.M. 20

A.—No. 10.

78

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

Jnnc 25, 1969. D. 28—2.

Enclosure 3 in No. 71. Copy of a Telegram from Lieut.-Colonel Moule to the Acting Resident Minister, Auckland. 22nd June, 18G9. I am not aware of any move on the part of the Waikatos. Rewi attends a meeting at Whatu (Waobuki) on 28th instr.nt; his object is, I believe, to settle a dispute between a section of the Ngatiraukauwas and a hapu of the Arawas. The Acting Resident Minister, Auckland. W. Moule, Lieut.-Colonel.

No. 72. Copy of a Letter from Mr. H. T. Clarke to Mr. G-. S. Cooper. (D. 32-2.) Civil Commissioner's Office, Sie, — Taurauga, 2nd July, 1869. In my communication of date and number quoted in the margin, I expressed myself strongly on the necessity of settlers in out-districts being jirepared for any emergency in the present critical state of affairs amongst the Natives, having been impelled thereto by the apparent perfect confidence felt by the settlers in the Waikato, as represented by Mr. Searancke. I have the honor to transmit, in support of my opinion, an extract from a lecture delivered by the Rev. J. Buller in Auckland, on the 25th June last (a remarkable coincidence), the day upon which my letter above referred to was written, warning the Aucklaud public in the same terms. The opinion of a gentleman of Mr. Buller's experience and knowledge of Maori character, formed after a long residence amongst the Natives, ought to carry weight, and 1 trust that every effect will bo given to the judicious warning given. I have, &c, 11. T. Clakke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.

Enclosure in No. 72. Extract from a Lecture delivered by the Rev. J. Bullee, in Auckland, on the Evening of the 25th June, as reported by the Southern Cross of 28th June, ISO9. A section of the Maori youth have developed into reckless desperadoes, under the training they have received from early boyhood in combat with our own troops ; they will now shoot Pakehas with the same zest with which they formerly hunted pigs. They will never yield. Their blood is up. Moulded by savage warfare, they have become, according to St. Peter, " as natural brute beasts made to be taken and destroyed." Sharp, precocious children are springing up, who with their mother's milk imbibe the spirit of hatred and contempt for the alien race, and may be expected, tinder the present state of things, to acquire a settled enmity towards the whites. These evils are germinative. They will grow with their growth. If we look beneath the surface, we see the seed of future troubles. To our young men then, and most of all to our Christian young men, I would say, " Think on these things." No temporizing, no vindictiveness, no rashness. Let the errors of the past be the beacons for the future. " Quit you like men : be strong." Prepare yourselves for emergencies, and you will overcome them. Be not lulled into a false security by specious appearances. In town and country every young man should be self-reliant. lam not recommending a war spirit, but that decision which is necessary to peace. If the Maoris believed that every Pakeha was well armed, had strong nerves, and was a dead shot, it would fill them with unbounded respect for him.

No. 73. Copy of a Letter from Mr. R. Paeeis to Mr. Gr. S. Coopee. (No. 185.) Sie,— New Plymouth, 26tli June, 18G9. In further reference to my letter of the 25th instant, reporting intelligence which I had received of 200 Natives being expected at Ngatimaru, fVom Taupo or Upper Wanganui, I have now the honor to report that, after I had written my letter hurriedly, to get it off by the " Airedale," after the mail was closed, I had a conversion with Nepe, who brought in the intelligence, which throws considerable doubt upon the movements of the party of Natives above referred to, who Nepe informed me, were Upper Wanganui Natives, headed by Nikorima, a brother of the late chief Wiremu Korowhiti. The messenger referred to in my letter of yesterday, who had arrived from Upper Wanganui, brought with him what is called " a mirimiri," an old Maori custom when one tribe appeals to another for support or co-operation in any particular movement, but generally of a hostile nature. A mirimiri is composed of something consumable, and if the people to whom it is sent partake of it, they are considered to have pledged themselves to co-operate with the party which sent it. The mirimiri in this case was a roll of tobacco, which was delivered by the messenger to the Ngatimaru Natives living at Pukemahoe. It would appear that nothing had been elicited from the messenger as to what they really meant, but Nepe assured me that if on their arrival it should prove that they mean hostilities, that Ilapurona and Wiremu Kingi will refuse to sanction it in the Ngatiawa District, but should their object be to take Titokowaru out of the district, either to Tokangainutu or elsewhere, that they will not interfere. I have, &c, R. Parris, Civil Commissioner. P.S.—I have sent Major Brown a copy of my letter of yesterday, aud will also send him a copy of this.—R. P. The Under Native Secretary, Wellington.

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS

79

A.—Ko. 10.

No. 74. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. M. Williams to Mr. G. S. Coopee. Sir, — Resident Magistrate's Office, Waimate, 6th August, 1569. I have the honor herewith to transmit a letter addressed by Ngapuhi to His Excellency the Governor, also one to the Honorable Mr. McLean, with translations of the same. Prom the letter to His Excellency it will be seen that Ngapuhi are desirous of negotiating with the Waikatos for terms of peace. This idea has been suggested to their minds by remarks said to have emanated from Matutaera, to the effect that he would allow none but Ngapuhi to interfere between himself and the Government, and encouraged by the Prince's reply to the Ngapuhi address, which was presented to His Royal Highness in Auckland. Ido not presume to offer any suggestions respecting this letter, further than to recommend it to the consideration of the Government, in the hope that, should it be deemed advisable to sanction any negotiations between Ngapuhi and the Waikatos, good may result therefrom. The chiefs will not await the answer from the Government, which it is necessary for me to observe should be carefully worded, and whilst avoiding any cause for offence, the views of the Government be clearly laid before them. Mr. Mailing, the Judge of the Native Lands Court in this district, who is at the present time in Wellington, would, I feel certain, be ready to give any information the Government might wish to obtain respecting the Natives of this district,, with most of whom he is well acquainted. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Office, Wellington. Euwd. M. Williams, R.M.

Enclosure in No. 74. Waimate, Pewhairangi, sth Akuhata, 18G9. Ki Tana Ekiharana Ta Hori Pakiiiajta Poexe, Kawana o Xuitireni, — Kia ora tonu koe. Kua huihui matou ki te Waimate i teuei ra. Ko nga take i huihui ai matou koia enei: 1. He rapurapu i nga whakaaro a Ngapuhi ki te taha Kawanatanga. 2. He rapu whakaaro mo nga kupu a te Piriniha ki te iwi o Ngapuhi mo te rongo o ta korua whawhai ko te Maori kia man to,rongo ki nga iwi e rua e noho nei i tenei inotu. Kia rongo mai koe e Kara ko te otinga tenei o te kupu tuatahi, ko Ngapuhi katoa puta noa, kei a koe tenei Iwi, e hara i naianei tenei whakaaro, man hoki e matau mai, ki enei tau maha ka mahue ake nei i naianei e penei ana te kupu, ko Ngapuhi kei te Kawanatanga. Koia matou ka kaha ai te hapai i te tuarua o nga kupu, ara, i ta te Piriniha koia tenei ko ta matou kupu atu ki a koe. Kua rapurapu matou mo te kupu poroporoaki ate Piriniha kua tukua mai nei ki a matou. Ko tana kupu tenei: Kanui toku hiahia kia mau te rongo o (enei whawliaia o te Maori raua ko te pakeha Ida tuturu te maunga rongo puta noa te motu nei. Heoi kua whakaaetia e matou e Ngapuhi kia mau te rongo ota korua whawhai tatcmea hoki he reo Kingi tenei reo. Tenei ano hoki te whakatauki ate Maori: "Ka tahia e Atutahi ka rere Matariki." Tona ritenga o Atutahi ko te Tamaiti ote Kuini ko Matariki ko Ngapuhi. Koia matou ka patai atu ai kia koe mehemea he pai tou kia pa Ngapuhi ki te mahi i tenei raruraru e kore ranei koe e pai kia tukua mai te ki o Waikato ki a matou tatemea hoki mate ki ano ka taea ai te raka. Na ko ta matou whakaaro tenei, ko Waikato whenua kia whakatikaia, ara i nga ra i mate ai te tangata ka mate te whenua, tena ko tenei ka kiia nei kia mau te rongo ki te tangata kia mau ano hoki ki te whenua katahi ka tika tenei maunga rongo. Hcoi ano a matou kupu atu ki a koe he tatari kau atu tenei ki tau ki a matou kia tae mai. Na matou katoa na Ngapuhi na nga ingoa e rnau ake i raro nei. Ma Te Atua koe e tiaki. Haee Hojsga Hika. [Here follow ninety-one signatures.]

[teaxslattox.] Waimate, Bay of Islands, sth August, 1869. To His Excellency Sir George Feugtjsox Bowen, Governor of New Zealand, — Long may you live. We have this day assembled at Waimate: the objects for which we have met are these : 1. To ascertain the feeling of Ngapuhi towards the Government. 2. To think over the Prince's words to the Ngapuhi people, respecting the fighting between yourself and the Maoris, that peace may be established between the two races who live on this Island. Listen, oh, Sir. This is the result of the first question in reference to Ngapuhi, the whole of this people are with you. This is not a thought of to-day, as you may judge by the many years which have already passed ; and to-day the word is, Ngapuhi are with the Government. Therefore we make bold to take up the second question, namely, the Prince's word; and this is our word to you. We have been considering the Prince's parting word forwarded to us. His word is this : I have a strong desire that peace should be established between the Maori and the Pakeha —a permanent peace throughout the Island ; and we, Ngapuhi, have agreed that peace shall be established between you, because the voice was the voice of a King. Here also is a Maori proverb: "Venus paves the way, Pleiades follows after." The simile is this: Venus is the Queen's Son, Pleiades the Ngapuhi. Therefore we put the question to you. If it be your pleasure that Ngapuhi should take part in adjusting this trouble, will you not intrust us with the key of the Waikato, inasmuch as it it is only by the key that the lock can be opened. Our opiuion is this, that the Waikato land should be adjusted ;

JL—No. 10.

80

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

that is, in tlie days wlicn man came to grief, the land also came to grief; and now that it is proposed to make peace with man, let peace also be made with the land —then will this peace be a lasting one. These are all our words to you; we shall now await your answer to us. May God protect you. [Here follow the signatures.]

No. 75. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. M. "Williams to Mr. G. S. Coopeu. (No. 85.) Sin, — Resident Magistrate's Office, Waimate. 6th August, 1869. I have, the honor to report, for the information of the Government, that a meeting of the Ngapuhi, which was to have taken place during the month of May, and of which I had given notice to the Hon. the Resident Minister at Auckland, but which, from unavoidable circumstances, had been delayed beyond the time originally fixed, came off on the 3rd and 4th instant. Circulars having been issued to the heads of the various hapus, the Natives, to the number of about 300, assembled at the Court House, Waimate, the district being well represented by the number of chiefs who were present. This meeting was suggested by Moses Tawhai and other chiefs anxious to learn, the real state of the Ngapuhi feeling towards the Government, and first "postponed in consequence of the arrival of the Duke of Edinburgh in Auckland, in the hope that His Royal Uighness might possibly extend his visit to the Bay of Islands, in which case it was intended the meeting should have taken place in his presence. Representatives from Ngapuhi having been invited to meet the Prince in Auckland, the meeting was again postponed until after their return with His Royal Highness's reply to the Ngapuhi address, when i1 was decided that this reply should be read and discussed at the meeting, which was then convened to take place on the dates above named. The subjects proposed for discussion were, first, the nature of the Ngapuhi feeling towards the Government; and, secondly, what steps should be taken by Ngapuhi to further the wishes expressed by the Prince, that peace might be established between the two races throughout the Islands of New Zealand. A letter addressed by the Hon. Mr. McLean to the Ngapuhi, received two days previous, was also read to the meeting, and well received, several natives formerly acquainted with Mr. McLean expressing much pleasure at hearing that he was Minister for Native Affairs. Speeches were delivered by several influential chiefs, all expressive of loyalty towards the Government, and a desire that peace might be established between the Government and the Natives. Towards the close of the day it was decided that a letter should be addressed to His Excellency the Governor, embodying the Ngapuhi views respecting the peace question, also one in answer to that received from Mr. McLean ; and in the evening a Committee appointed by themselves met in the Court House to prepare these letters, which, on the following morning, were read and approved of by the meeting. It will be observed that Ngapuhi, in their letter to Hi3 Excellency, propose the restoration of the confiscated land, either in whole or part, as may be agreed upon, but not unconditionally. The Maori King movement is to be put down, Waikato to acknowledge the Queen's Government, and, like Ngapuhi, to live on friendly terms with the Pakeha. The chiefs have decided that nothing shall be done without the sanction of the Governor, and should their proposals not meet the approbation of the Government, they will abandon the idea of any interference in the question. A question of another character was mooted at this meeting, and is, I believe, being discussed generally throughout the Island at the present time —that of raising subscriptions sufficient to defray the expenses of a deputation, to consist of seventy chiefs selected from the various friendly tribes north and south of the Island, to wait upon the Governor and lay before him certain propositions; amongst others, that of establishing a Maori Parliament. The idea, it is said, originated with TeRauparaha, and was discussed by the chiefs assembled in Auckland on the occasion of the Prince's visit, when each promised to exert himself within his district in raising the nccessaiy funds. Collections have already been made in some parts of this district, though as yet the amount realized is but small. Judging from the general demeanour of the Natives of this district, and the tone of the speeches delivered at the meeting of the 4th instant, I see no reason to doubt their loyalty. All the speakers advocated the support of the law ; some alluded to the necessity of having a gaol at AVaimate, a question which I noticed was not opposed as on former occasions, the reply of some of the chiefs being, " Do not hurry matters ; wait awhile, and all will be accomplished." Ngapuhi I believe to be sincere in their professions of friendship, and under a wise and judicious Government will continue the faithful subjects of the Queen. I have, &c, The Under Secretary, Native Office, Wellington. Edwd. M. Williams, R.M.

Enclosure in No. 75. E noA E Te Makakini, — "Waimate Peowairangi, sth Akuhata, 1869. Tena koe. Kua tae mai to reta milii mai ki a matou otels o nga ra o Huraei te ra i tu ai te hui a Ngapuhi ki te Waimate rokohanga mai e tail reta e rapurapu ana Ngapuhi i te tikanga o te kupu poroporoaki a te Piriniha ki nga iwi Maori me ana kupu rnihi mai ano hoki ki a matou a kau tuhonoa mai nei ano hoki e tau reta aroha kia matou ki ou hoa Maori o nga iwi o Ngapuhi o noho ana ki te pito wakararo oto tatou motu. Ka nui ta matou whakapai atu mo tau pukapuka aroha kua tukua mai nei ki a matou koia ta matou kupu ka tukua atu nei kia ora tonu koe hei wbakahaere tikanga mo te (aha Maori kua rongo nei hoki matou kua tu koe hei Minita whakahaere tikanga mo te taha Maori. E hoa, kia kaha koe ki te whakahaere tikanga pai mo iwi Maori e noho mai ua i roto ite

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

81

A.—No. 10.

raruraru. Tctahi ko to kupu mai e haere mai ana koe ki konei kia kite koe i a matou ; heoi e pai ana me haere mai koe a te wa e tika ai kia haero mai koe kia kite i a matou, kia kite hoki matou i a koe. Heoi ano, na o hoa aroha atu ki a koe. Na Hongi Hika. [Here follow 71 signatures.]

[translation.] Feiexd Mr. McLean, — Waimate, Bay of Islands, sth August, 1869. Salutations to you. Your letter of the 15th July, expressive of good feeling towards us, reached us on the day of the Ngapuhi meeting at Waimate, and found Ngapuhi considering the Prince's parting word to the Maori people, also his expressions of good feeling towards us, to which is now added your letter of affection to us your Maori friends of the Ngapuhi people, residing at the northern end of this our Island. We are much pleased with the letter you have sent us, and now forward our word to you. Long may you live to conduct the Maori affairs, for we have heard that you are now Minister for the Maoris. Friend, be energetic to devise some beneficial measure for those Maori people now in trouble. Also, with regard to your word that you are coming here to see us ; it is good. Come when you think you can, and visit us, that we may also see you. This is all, from vour affectionate friends. [Here follow the signatures.]

No. 76. Copy of a Letter from the Resident Magistrate, Hamilton, to the Hon. Mr. Richmond. Sir,— Hamilton, 19th June, 1569. I have the honor to report, for your information, on the present unsettled state of the Natives in this district, resulting from the great disappointment at not being allowed to visit Ngaruawahia to meet H.R.H. the Duke of Edinburgh and His Excellency the Governor; the causes of this disappointment are, I believe, the natural results of the jealousy between Tamati Manuhiri and Rewi Manga. It appears clear that the latter and the Ngatimaniapoto Tribe have, from the visit of the kupapas to Hangatiki, stated that they would come to Ngaruawahia when invited to do so, but Tamati objected, saying that he would go himself; but Eewi decidedly objected to this, stating that if he went to Ngaruawahia there could be no object in either Tamati or Tawhiao remaining behind. A " tautohe" then took place between them, which was only ended by Tawhiao himself saying that nothing could be decided on until Te Paea returned from Hauraki. On her return, she objected in toto to the visit. For this result Tamati is very generally condemned, not only by the kupapas, but also by the Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos, and a bad feeling has sprung up between these two tribes. They now all see too clearly that they have allowed an opportunity of settling matters on an amicable footing to slip past them — an opportunity that, as they now say themselves, can never occur again. Of the 400 Natives who accompanied Te Paea to Hauraki, not more than one-half have returned; the rest have remained to dig gum. Rewi Manga, in whose sincerity I have the utmost confidence, and who 1 firmly believe is most anxious to put an end to the present state of affairs, has gone to Te Tapapa, Ilakaraia's place, accompanied bv about seventy followers. It is said that he is on his way to fetch the Arawas, but I have reason to believe that he has merely gone to get out of the way; that he and his tribe are intensely disgusted with Tamati, and disappointed, I need hardly say. Possessed as he is with this feeling, I look forward with some anxiety to hear farther of his proceedings, or of his return. Another meeting is now projected to take place at Taupo, at which it is said that all the tribes are to be represented, to talk over the present unsettled state of the country, and, if possible, to come to some definite determination as to the future ; but, after late events, I believe that this meeting must be a failure. The utmost sympathy is now expressed by the great majority of the King's party for William Te Wheoro, for the way in which he, as they allow, has been deceived by them, in being led to believe that they would come to Ngaruawahia on his invitation ; and several parties of Natives, with leading and influential men amongst them, are now coming down from Tokaugamutu and the settlements thereabouts, to personally convey that sympathy to him. I am therefore in hopes that the projected meeting may yet result in a better feeling being established amongst the Natives, gradually embracing the settlers of this district. I have, &c, The Hon. Mr. Richmond, Wellington. Wtlliaii N. Seahancke, R.M.

No. 77. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. IS. Seakancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. So,— Hamilton, 22nd June, 1869. I have the honor to inform you that I have made inquiries respecting the information contained in Mr. Wilson's telegrams to Colonel Moule and myself, and have not been able to ascertain from the numerous parties of Hauhaus daily visiting the Waikato that they are even awaro of Te Kooti and followers' movements at Taupo ; but from the remarks made by the Waikatos I believe that should he come into or near the district occupied by Tawhiao and the Waikatos and Ngatilnaniapotos, that he will be stopped, quietly if possible, but that he will be stopped I feel confident. Rewi's last remark to Te Heuheu at liangatiki was to this effect: "If Te Kooti comes your way (Taupo), and comes peaceably, lot him pass ; but should he come on a hostile purpose, shoot him." 21

A.—No. 10,

REPORTS PROM OFFICERS

82

I cannot believe that the King Natives will allow To Kooti or any other Natives to make an attack on the "Waikato, after their constant asseverations that peace is to be maintained in this district. I will proceed to Alexandra and Te Kopua this week, and make such further inquiries as can be done without creating an alarm. . I have, &c., "William N. Seaeancke, The Hon. Dr. Pollen, Auckland. Eesident Magistrate.

No. 78. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeris to the Hon. the Native Mixistee. (No. 149.) Snt,— New Plymouth, 17th June, 1869. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of 25th May, No. 95-2, in reference to the Tangahoes who came in to Oeo, and to report that on the 10th instant I left this to go to visit them, taking with me Eopata Ngarongomate and Patara Eaukatauri. Hone Pihama and Manaia, with five of his young men, having come in to see me a few days before, waited to accompany us. "We stopped the first night with "Wiremu Kingi Matakatea, at ITmuroa, where we had a long discussion about turning the enormous quantity of flax in that district to account, by the introduction of the newly-invented machine for working it. The next day, the 11th instant, we went on to Opunake, where I was detained a few hours settling cases in dispute among themselves, and from thence we got to Oeo in the evening. I found the new arrivals were very unhappy, not knowing what was to be their fate. Some of them came to me to shako hands, which I refused, telling them they had been guilty of an offence which must be investigated. The next morning I warned them to appear before me, which they did, when I gave them as severe a reprimand as I could administer in Maori style. I explained to them the views of the Government in reference to their conduct in joining Titokowaru after the liberality bestowed upon them in giving them back 10,000 acres of the best land in the district, which I told them they had forfeited, and must now trust to the Government for land in future. They behaved very civilly, and were very humble, and in explanation said that their position was a very disagreeable one, after the attack on Turu Turu Mokai, when the Pakehas became very uncivil to them, and were always accusing them of being implicated in that affair, and other atrocities of Titokowaru. That Titokowaru's party had the same feeling towards them up to the time they surrounded their kainga at Taiporohenui, and coerced them by force to join them. I asked them why they did not do as Ngahina and his people did—refuse to go. In answer, they stated that had Ngahina and party been living at Taiporohenui instead of at Matangarara they could not have got away. I called upon them to give up their arms, which they said they were willing to do—all they had. Eleven stand of arms were brought and laid down before me, as per list appended. They declared that was all they had ; that nineteen stand of arms were taken from them at Pokaikai, and three stand at Matangarara. That when they joined Titokowaru they had only eight guns, and that they obtained three breech-loaders afterwards. I took a roll of their names, amounting altogether to 117, as per list below. Of these, 13 men, 14 women, and 9 children have gone to Pariaka, and the remainder agreed to remain at Oeo. I brought in the three breech-loaders with me, and have this day delivered them to the Militia Office and taken a receipt for them. The remainder of their arms I left in charge of Hone Pihama. I explained to them that those who had been guilty of murder and man-eating must not expect to pass unpunished for such atrocities. They declared that the Tangahoes had not been guilty of it; that they steadily refused to be committed to such work, although they were tempted by the Ngaruahine when any unfortunate Europeans fell into their hands ; that at Okutuku two bodies were sent to their camp to be cooked, which they refused to do, and took the bodies and buried them immediately. That if their statement is doubted, they are ready to go and point out the place where they buried them. I left Oeo on Monday, the 14th instant, and came so far as "Wiremu Kingi Matakatea's place at Nukuteapeape, in the bush inland of Umuroa, where we stopped that night. There were some Natives there whom I have not seen for two years before, as the place is some distance from the coast road, and I have never before called there; but as "W. Kingi expressed a wish for me to do so on seeing him at Umuroa, on our way to Oeo, I promised him to visit them on returning. My visit appeared to give them satisfaction, for they made the most they could of it, by talking all night upon different subjects —confiscation, introduction of machines for working flax, the presence of some of Titokowaru's followers at Pariaka. "With regard to the first, confiscation, I told them they had no cause of complaint, as it was but a very small portion of their land that had been taken for a township at Opunake. In reply, a man called Komene asked me whether, if a man lost a leg or an arm, the whole body would not be distressed. I told him the two questions bore no resemblance, but would have the very opposite effect; that if a man lost a leg or an arm, the body was for ever disabled. That by the establishment or a town at Opunake, at the expense of others, the other part of their land would be enhanced in value. "With regard to the second subject, introduction of machinery for working flax, the question is one which is being very much discussed at the present time by Europeans who are anxious to get a footing in the Taranaki District (where flax is in great abundance) by introducing the newly-invented machine. On this subject they rose no opposition themselves, but, on the contrary, said that they should be glad to see the work commenced, if there was a definite understanding arrived at with the Pariaka Natives for the future tranquillity of the district. As regards the last question, the presence of some of Titokowaru's followers at Pariaka, they stated that they were opposed to their remaining there, but that Te "Witi was encouraging them in the view that he was doing right, so long as they do not commit themselves in his district by any acts of violence or otherwise, and submit to his authority. I told them that Te Witi must not arrogate

A No. 10.

authority for condonation of offences and crimes committed against others ; that by so doing he would bring trouble upon the district himself. The day I left this, on the 10th instant, when I was about three miles beyond Warea, I met a lot of Titokowaru's Natives on the beach, having come from Pariaka for shellfish. They saluted me, but I refused to return the compliment. Patara stopped and had a conversation with three Taranaki Natives, who asked him where I was going, and on being told that I was going to see the Tangahoes, they asked why I did not go to Pariaka, to see the Ngaruahines. Patara told me afterwards that he explained to them my objection to going to Pariaka was on account of the presence of men-eaters there, and that so long as they remained there it was no use for them to expect either me or any of the kupapas to visit Pariaka. With reference to the future final location of the Tangahoes, although they have been told that they have forfeited their right to the reserve which was made for them, which includes Wareroa (Taiporohenui) and Ohangae, I sincerely hope the Government will still retain that reserve for their future location, for the sake of Hone Pihama and Ngahina, it being what is called the " papatipu" of the Tangahoe Tribe. The eight stand of arms which T have left with Hone Pihama will, I hope, meet with your approval, although I am aware that some would say they should be taken from them ; but I doubt the justice or propriety of entirely disarming Natives who surrender, when you leave them in a district beyond your protection, where they are liable to be menaced by the enemy. I had thought of a scheme of concentrating the Natives under Manaia at Kaupokonui, and those at Oeo, and any others that may like to join them, at Opunake, pending further operations against Titokowaru, the beforementioned Natives being themselves afraid that if Titokowaru returns to Te Ngutu-o-te-manu, hostilities will thereby be brought into their district; but on finding that the Tangahoes had put up several very nice houses at Oeo, I agreed to their remaining there at present. They have all consented that if I wish them to concentrate at Opunake at any time, they will do so; and should any operations hereafter against Titokowaru render it desirable, I presume you would have no objection to their cultivating, for a season or two, upon the Opunake township. I feel it my duty to mention specially the valuable assistance I received from Patara Baukatauri during my journey through the district, which, upon the whole, I consider a.very satisfactory one. List of Tangahoes who came in on the 14th May, 1869: —43 men, 41 women, 33 children. List of arms surrendered: —4 double-barrel fowling-pieces, 2 flint muskets, 1 single-barrel fowlingpiece, 1 rifle, 3 breechloaders. I have, &c., The Hon. the Minister for Native Affairs, E. Paeeis, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 79. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to the Utoee Native Seceetaet. (No. 218.) Sir,— New Plymouth, 21st August, 1869. I have the honor to report, for the information of His Excellency's Government, that I have received intelligence from Ngatimaru to the effect that Te Kooti, on returning from the Tokangamntu District, went to the Upper Wanganui District, and on arriving at the river near Topine's place called for a canoe, which was supplied without Topine's people knowing who thev were; but on discovering it was Te Kooti and his party, they closed their pa against them. The report goes on to say that Te Kooti had assumed a hostile attitnde and was investing Topine's pa, and that the Wanganuis were assembling to reinforce Topine. The impression here is that Te Kooti will join Titokowaru if he gets away from Upper Wanganui, and that the two will then in all probability visit Pariaka for the same purpose as Te Kooti visited Tokangamutu, to try and induce To "VViti to surrender his authority to him ; but the opinion is that he has no more chance of success with Te Witi than he had with Tawhiao. I have, &c., E. Paeeis, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 80. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeeis to the Usdee Native Seceetaet. (No. 185.) Sib — New Plymouth, 19th July, 1869. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 13th instant (No. 185-2), in reference to the relinquishment by Lieut.-Colonel Lyon of the proposed expedition against Titokowaru, and the reason assigned for it. With reference to the number of Hauhaus alleged by Lieut.-Colonel Lyon to be at Pariaka (300), my latest information from that quarter is that there are not more than fifty men of Titokowaru's followers at Pariaka, but perhaps Lieut.-Colonel Lyon included Ahitana's people, a section of the Ngatiruanuis, who when they were removed from Keteonetea went to Pariaka, having for a long time professed allegiance to Te AViti and refused to join Titokowaru, and all the Taranakis, to make up that number. There are some restless spirits amongst the Taranaki tribes, who without doubt would rush into hostilities if Te Witi onlv gave the order, but for a long time past he has given substantial proofs of a

83

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A.—No. 10.

84

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

very different line of action. From the time of the renewal of hostilities by Titokowaru in the Patea District he has steadily refused to sanction any of the Taranaki tribes joining him in the prosecution of hostilities ; but where he has erred is by allowing Titokowaru's people to join him, in the superstitious delusion that he has a perfect right, when they secede from the arch-perpetrator of atrocities, to receive them under his " mana," an assumption the Government may not be likely to sanction, yet difficult to prevent without using force, the expediency of which must rest with the Government. In consequence of the reports mentioned in my letter of the 6th instant, that Pariaka was to be attacked, there lias been considerable uneasiness manifested by the Taranaki Natives ; and about a week ago two Natives of the Titahi hapu, Taikomako and Tautahi (the latter has been with Titokowaru and is implicated in his worst atrocities) came from the Otumatua District to Pariaka with a proposal to resume hostilities (kia ara tc patu), when Te Witi is reported to have taken their guns and broken them to pieces, to signify his entire disapprobation. This appears to be the state of Te Witi's mind up to the present time, but I wish to guard myself against leading the Government to believe that it is anything like a substantial guarantee for the future. It is my duty to report what takes place from time to time, without committing myself to positive opinions as to the future, because of the influences that are working in so many quarters. Te Witi's influence is very considerable, quite equal to Tawhiao's, with whom he has been closely allied for many years, and by whom he has been applied to for counsel and advice ; but as with Tawhiao in the case of the White Cliffs murders, which were committed by his professing subjects, so with Te Witi, his professing followers might disregard his injunctions to keep quiet, and be glad of a pretext for doing so, such as the case of the firing upon Wm. King's Natives whilst at sea fishing, as reported by this mail. The position of things at Pariaka is very similar to that at Tokangamutu —the effect of a deeprooted desire for self-government, a state of tilings very difficult to deal with, inasmuch as the ordinary course of law is utterly impracticable with them. With regard to Mr. Booth's report that the whole of the Tangahoes have gone over and joined Te Witi, he must have been misinformed, for when the overland mail came in last week the bearer thereof informed me that they were all at Oeo when he left on Tuesday, the 13th instant, and so far as I know they have never expressed any intention to join Te Witi. They are however very short of food, and it is a very great trial for Hone Pihama and the others who have so long proved faithful, and done great service for the Government, as they will sutler in the same proportion as the others in the scarcity of food, as that which they had provided for themselves is being consumed in common by all, a limited portion daily. I have, &c, E. Paeris, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner. P.S.—Karira, who has just come in from Oeo, assures me that the whole of the Tangahoes who came in with Tukino, as reported in my letter of the 17th June, are still at Oeo, and have never been away therefrom since I visited them. ' 20th July, ISG9. E. P.

No. 81. Copy of a Letter from Mr. E. Paeris to the Under Native Secretary. (Xo. 170.) Sir,— New Plymouth, Gtli July, 1869. I have the honor to report that a special messenger (Ngahina) arrived last evening with a letter from Lieut.-Colonel Lyon to Major Brown, informing him that in consequence of the swollen state of the rivers he had for the present abandoned the expedition in which Major Brown was to cooperate with him with the forces from this district, to march into the Ngatimaru country against Titokowaru, and that he should not move until he had communicated with the Government. Major Brown left the town for Waiiti about 2 o'clock p.m. yesterday, intending to move therefrom with his force to-day; but the letter was sent off by two mounted constables about 8 o'clock last night, and would get to Waiiti about midnight, before the force could have moved. The messenger who brought Lieut.-Colonel Lyon's letter from Patea to Oeo (Patohi) stated that he was told by the Ngatiporou's that the force from the Patea District was coming on to Taranaki to attack Pariaka, inland of Warca, where there are some of Titokowaru's followers, as I have already reported, taking shelter under Te Witi, who professes to be a peace man. There is another report being actively circulated in this district to the effect that, on the arrival of the last partv of Ngatiporous in Wellington from the East Coast, they told some Wellington Natives that they should not respect Kupapas in the Taranaki District, but should treat them all as rebels. Whether Ngatiporou ever did so or not I am not in a position to prove, but some of the Wellington Natives have written to the Taranaki Natives to that effect, and the intelligence is causing some excitement among the Taranaki Natives ; and the statement of the messenger from Patea, before referred to, is considered confirmatory of the report from AVelliugton, so much so that I have been told this evening that the Taranaki Natives deem it necessary to prepare for defence. Whatever the intention of the Government may be in reference to such place as Pariaka (which I presume the Natives in the Field Force would not be aware of long beforehand), where offenders think to shelter themselves from punishment, the effect of such threats as those said to have come from Ngatiporou is to produce excitement among Natives so threatened, and cause them to assume a defensive attitude, which is very likely to merge into an offensive one, without necessary warning for the protection of out-settlers. As yet I have received no further intelligence relating to the information communicated to the Government in my letter of the 27th ultimo in reference to the expected arrival of 200 Whanganui

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

85

A.—No. 10.

Natives at Ngatimaru, but it would seem evident that whatever might bo going on at Ngatimaru, "William King's followers are not mixed up with it, from the fact that about ten of them, who have never before since 1860 been in, arrived at Urenui yesterday, and among them William King's wife and grandson, the future Ngatiawa chief. lam informed that they are coming into town and going on to Pariaka. It is however very probable, that if they hear of the rumours about that place they will not go there. Although William Kiug's people cannot be said to have actually returned to their former allegiance to the Government, still their behaviour for the last three years entitles them to some consideration. They have never in any way interfered witli the settlers on the confiscated land, and have steadily refused to sanction hostilities being brought into the Ngatiawa District. If William King and Hapurona chose to go in for active hostilities, they could command the support of all the surrounding disaffected tribes ; and the effect of such a rising would be that this settlement would once more be laid desolate, and the out-settlers, who are now recovering from past misfortunes, would be irretrievably ruined, with no hope of compensation, as in the former case. In this view of the position of the settlement, I was moved to give the advice I did when Major Brown was called upon to co-operate with Colonel AVhitmore by marching a force through the very district where the Ngatiawas were living, and at the very time when the Puketapu section of the Ngatiawas were making arrangements to come in, which, as I have already reported, they have done, which fact in some measure lessens the danger of the expedition about to be undertaken, in reference to which however I feel considerably relieved in mind to know that Lieut.-Colonel Lyon intends to refer to the Government for further instructions before moving. I have, cfee., E. Paeeis, The Under Native Secretary, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.

No. 82. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. N. Searancke to the Hon. the Native Minister. (No. 149.) Sie, — Alexandra, Gth August, 1869. I have the honor to inform you that, by information received this day, I hear that Te Kooti and his followers (reduced to seventy men) were to leave Wharerata, where he has been staying since leaving Te Kuiti, either on this day or to-morrow for Taupo via Tuhua. His women and children, amounting to about one hundred, left Wharerata yesterday. I believe his departure has been accelerated by his supplies of food being stopped, by his followers being daily seduced away from him, by his guns and horses being stolen from him—the latter more particularly, three or four only being left to him—and by the firm and uncompromising attitude of the Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos. Of this I feel assured, that not the slightest sympathy or friendly feeling by either of the above-named tribes has been shown him during his stay in their district. He lias not been allowed to sec Tawhiao or have any communication with him, and lately all the roads have been guarded by strong parties of armed Natives, save the road to Taupo via Tuhua. His proposal to proceed to Taranaki and the West Coast has been peremptorily refused, not only by the Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos, but by Titokowaru himself, represented by a Native named Hapurona, said to be his brother, but I have now r reason to believe a Maori connection only. I have also reason to believe that the Arawas and Natives under Pohipi, who sent to Tawhiao for leave to come to Tokangamutu to attack Te Kooti, but were met with a refusal, are not at Taupo awaiting his arrival. In this case To Kooti will most probably try to avoid them, by proceeding direct to the East Coast to more favourable recruiting grounds. I regret to say that I fear Eewi Manga's polie\' in keeping with Te Kooti while in this district, and in now going away with him to Taupo, is perfectly misunderstood by both the Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos, and will, I fear, tend to foster the jealous feelings now existing between these tribes at no distant date. I have, &c, William N. Searancke, The Hon. the Native Minister, AVellington. E.M., Waikato and Eaglan.

No. 83. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. N. Seaeancke to the Hon. the Natiye Minister. (No. 150.) Sie, — Alexandra, 7th August, 1869. Herewith I have the honor to hand to you original letter of Tainati Manuhiri to Mr. Lewis Hettit, in reference to Natives apprehended at Ngaruawahia on Sunday, the 25 th July, with arms and ammunition in their possession, and by me remanded to Auckland. Mr. Hettit was requested by Tamati to proceed at once to Alexandra to see me on the subject, and to hand his letter forwarded herewith to me. After communicating with the Hon. the Eesident Minister in Auckland, I sent reply (copy herewith). I have, &c, William N. Seaeancke, The Hon. the Native Minister, "Wellington. Eesident Magistrate. 22 •

A.—No. 10,

86

REPORTS EROM OEEICERS

Enclosure 1 in No. 83. E iioa E Manuhiri, — Arekanara, 6 o Akuhata, 1859. Kua korero a Euihi to kupu ki au mo nga tangata kua here herea kei Ngaruawahia. Etama he Ture ano ta koutou he aukati ano hold kei Orahiri, kei etahi atu wahi, me ta matou hoki he Ture ano, he Aukati hoki kei Ngaruawahia kei etahi atu wahi. Ko nga tangata kua here herea kua takahia ratou i ta matou ture aukati ara kua haeruro ratou i te pu, te paura, te tingara iroto i o matou kainga. Na he takahi tenei ito matou ture ahakoa Pakcha ahakoa Maori. Inai anei kua tukuatu mote kai whakawa kei Akarana e rapu ite ratou he. Ma te Atua, ma ratou ano ratou e whakaora. He oi naku, Na Te Herangi, Kia Tamati Manuhiri, kei Te Kuiti. Kai whakawa tuturu.

[translation.] O friend Manijiiihi,— Alexandra, 6th August, 1569. Euihi has told me your word respecting the men who have been imprisoned at Ngaruawahia. O son, you have a law of your own, and you have an aukati at Orahiri and at some other places ; and we also have a law and an aukati at Ngaruawahia and at other places. Those men who have been imprisoned have trodden upon our law and our aukati; that is, they have carried guns about in our villages, and also powder and caps, and this is an infringement of our law whether it is European or Maori (who does these things). Now they have been sent to Auckland, and the Magistrate there will have to deal with their offence. May God and themselves deliver them. Na Te Heranoi.

Enclosure 2 in No. 83. E Eui ,— Te Kuiti, 3 Akuhata, 1866. Kua paoho tenei reo, kua mate nga Maori ki Ngaruawahia. Tokotoru, e kite ora tuku amo a ratou taonga. Kia tere. Kia Euihi kei Otorohanga. Na Manuiiiri.

[translation.] 0 Eui,— Te Kuiti, 3rd August, 1869. This voice has sounded, and the Maoris at Ngaruawahia are dead (or have been killed, or have got into difficulties or trouble). If (they) are spared, send them here with their property. Make haste. To Euihi, at Otorohanga. Na Manuhiri.

No. 84. Copy of a Letter from Mr. AY. N. Searancke to the Hon. the Native Minister. (No. 139.) Eesident Magistrate's Office, Sir,— Hamilton, 3rd August, 1869. I have the honor to inform you that I have this day forwarded by steamer to Auckland, to the care of the Hon. D. Pollen, the greenstone " heitiki " presented by Te Kooti to Tawhiao and Waikato, as a peace-oifering. By the Waikatos it was handed to Eopata and Biria of the Ngatiteata Tribe, and by them presented to me at Alexandra, on their arrival there on Saturday last. I believe that I express the sentiments of the Natives that this greenstone should be handed to His Excellency Sir George F. Bowen, &c. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, William N. Searancke, Wellington. Eesident Magistrate.

No. 85. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. N. Searancke to the Hon. the Native Minister. (No. 138.) Sir, — Alexandra, 31st July, 1569. I have the honor to inform yon, that the Ngateata Natives have this morning arrived here on their way home to Waiuku. They were accompanied by Tawhiao and about 100 of the Waikatos as far as Otorohanga; their reports merely confirm what I have stated in my previous letters, that Tawhiao and the "Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos are determined to, if possible, compel Te Kooti and his followers to return to Taupo by the same road that they came. It appears that on Sunday morning, previous to Te Kooti leaving Te Kuiti, a message was sent to him from Wetere and Titokowaru's brother (Nuku or Hapurona) to leave To Kuiti at once, and also that on their approach to the settlement, that Te Kooti did leave hurriedly, having previously sent his women and children on. Wetere and Titokowaru's brother immediately mustered a party of 200 men to follow and attack Te Kooti, but were stopped by Tawhiao. They were subsequently allowed to go, to stop Te Kooti should he attempt to carry out his intention of going to New Plymouth, and they are now encamped at a place named Mongawhanga, about three or four miles from Mongarata, where Te Kooti is, I hear, building a pa. Mongarata is about ten miles south-west from Tokangamutu, and

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

A—No. 10.

87

near the Mokau River. There are, I believe, about 300 men watching his movements, and these men being now unrestrained by the presence of Tawhiao, will I am convinced, if Te Kooti gives them an opportunity, attack him at once, weakened as he is by the desertion of the whole of the Ueweras and a great number of his own followers. I regret to say that Te Kooti is still accompanied by Rewi Manga and Te Heuheu, thereby embarrassing very much any direct action by Waikato. Hakaraia of Patetere still refuses to allow Te Kooti to pass by either Patetere or Maungatautari to the East Coast, and has or had a large number of Natives collected together to oppose him if necessary. On the whole it is very difficult to understand the present policy of the Natives, or the reason of the great forbearance of the Waikatos in the face of the impudent demands and constant insults of Te Kooti and his followers ; these insults are now rankling in the minds of the Waikatos, and will, I believe, without any other cause, prove an effectual bar to the establishment of any friendly feeling in the future between them. Neither does there appear to be the slightest possibility of any alliance being formed between Te Kooti and Titokowaru. Of this latter Native the reports are contradictory, but I believe that he will shortly visit Tawhiao and the Waikatos. Taking into consideration the present unsettled and uncertain state of the Natives (king) by the presence in their midst of Te Kooti and Titokowaru's brother, I consider that precautionary measures are necessary; but judging also by all the information I have received both from Waikato and Ngatimaniapoto, I am not of opinion that any attack or raid will be made on or allowed in this district at present. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, William N. Searancke, Wellington. Resident Magistrate.

No. 86. Copy of a Letter from the Hon. Dr. Pollen to the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. (No. 351.) General Government Offices, Sir,— Auckland, 30th July, 1869. I have the honor to transmit enclosed letters of the 23rd and 25th July, 1869, from Mr. Searancke; also, copies of telegraphic messages received and sent by me relative to aft'airs in Waikato since the date of my last report (No. 333, 22nd July, 1869). Te Kooti and his followers have left Tokangamutu, but according to the latest report, received this day, he is building apa at Pukeruhe, about ten miles from that place. This requires confirmation. The action of Rewi, as reported, is not easily explicable. As however there seems no immediate danger of an attack by a large Native force being made upon the Waikato settlements, the Militia force assembled at Mercer has been discharged, excepting a guard of twenty-five men; and immediately upon the arrival of the detachment of Armed Constabulary, now hourly expected from Matata, the Volunteers from the Thames and Wairoa now in Waikato will be withdrawn and discharged also. I have, &c, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary, Wellington. Daniel Pollen.

Enclosures in No. 86. Mr. W. N. Seabancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Alexandra, 23rd July, 1869. Mati eks at Te Kuiti rapidly approaching a crisis. Tawhiao still refuses to either see or have anything to do with Te Kooti. Tawhiao talks of leaving Te Kuiti, and in this case the Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos, who have only been withheld by him, will immediately attack Te Kooti and his party. The Waikatos offer to escort Te Kooti out of the district if he will go away quietly. Warning should be sent to Tauranga and the Kupapas about to be on the look-out. W. N. Seabancke, Resident Magistrate.

Mr. ~W. N. Seakancke to the Hon. Dr. Polled. Alexandra, 26th July, 1869. Te Kooti still at Te Kuiti, awaiting revelations from his " Atua "to tell him what to do. The Urewera Tribe left Te Kooti and joined Tawhiao. Waikatos urgent for Te Kooti's leaving. Matters looking well on the whole. Tauranga, Waihou, still mentioned as Te Kooti's destination. "W. N. Searancke, Resident Magistrate.

Captain Eicn to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Alexandra, 26th July, 1869. Yesterday morning Te Kooti left Tokangamutu with the intention of recruiting at Kareo, Mangawhanga, on the Mokau. He wants to get Wetere, Te Kao Kao, and Reihana to join him. If he can get 600 men, which is the present strength of the King party, he publicly states he will return, depose the King and establish his religion. He then intends to attack Waikato. The King party fired a volley of contempt on his departure. Rewi has gone with him ; they say he is mad. This morning 100 of Rewi's men went after him to try and bring him back. A. Rich, Captain.

A.—No. 10.

88

REPORTS PROM OPPICERS

Mr. W. N. Searancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Alexandra, 26th July, 1869. The Natives of Tamahere, Maungatautari and Karakariki, besieging me witli applications for arms and ammunition. Will the Government supply them with arms under present circumstances ? W. N. Seaeancke, Resident Magistrate.

Mr. W. N. Seaeancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Alexandra, 28th July, 1869. Te Kooti, accompanied by Manga, Te Heuheu, and about 300 men, women, and children, left Te Kuiti on Monday morning for Otararaki, a settlement about six miles from Tokangamutu, on the road to Mokau. Te Kooti's followers sold all their horses and saddles, save about twenty, to Natives at Te Kuiti. As he was leaving Te Kuiti, Titokowaru's brother, accompanied by Reihana, Wetere, and about fifty men of the Mokau Natives, arrived; they proposed to Tawhiao to pursue and at once drive Te Kooti back to Taupo. Tawhiao refused consent, but Ngatimaniapoto are determined that he shall not stop in their district. Manga is said to be mad. W, N. Searancke, Resident Magistrate.

Mr. W. N. Searancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Alexandra, 28th July, 1869. I hate now been informed by messenger that Te Kooti and followers are on their road back to Taupo via Tuhua. Natives about here reassured and gone back to their settlements. The Ngatitiata, from Waiuku, are on their road down from Te Kuiti. Tawhiao's large house not burned down. W. N. Searancke, Resident Magistrate.

The Hon. Dr. Pollen to Mr. W. N. Seaeancke. Auckland, 30th July, 1869. Get from some reliable source an accurate personal description of the man named Te Kooti, who was recently at Tokangamutu. Daniel Pollen.

Mr. W. N. Searancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Alexandra, 30th July, 1869. Repoets arrived that Te Kooti is building a pa at Pukerahe, about ten miles beyond Tokangamutu. I have sent iip last night a special messenger to obtain authentic news. W. N. Searancke, Resident Magistrate.

No. 87. Copy of a Letter from the Hon. Dr. Pollen to the Hon. the Colonial Secbetaey. (No. 352.) General Government Office, Slß,— Auckland, 30th July, 1869. I have the honor to forward herewith copies of telegraphic messages received and sent by me relative to the arrest and detention at Ngaruawahia of three Natives, in whose possession were found concealed arms and a large quantity of gunpowder and percussion caps. These Natives were examined before Mr. Searancke, R.M., at Ngaruawahia on Tuesday last, but as there is not any person here authorized, in terms of clause 59 of " The Arms Act, 1860," to proceed against an aboriginal native for infraction of that law, 1 advised Mr. Searancke to remand the Natives to Auckland, as well with the view of ascertaining, if possible, from whence the arms and ammunition were obtained, as to save them from danger of violence in the excited condition of the people in Waikato. I regret to have to report that an outrage was committed against these Natives whilst in custody at Ngaruawahia, at the instance of Captain Leslie, the particulars of which are given in the telegram from Lieut.-Colonel Moule, copy of which is annexed. I have directed that an official inquiry into the facts shall be made, and will send the report when received. Captain Leslie has not any connection with the Armed Constabulary or Militia, and the only excuse for his conduct will probably be found to be that he is subject to occasional attacks of insanity, and was so afflicted on this occasion. I have, &c, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary, Wellington. Daniel Pollen.

Enclosures. Mr. A. Sheath to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Ngaruawahia, 25th July, 1869. Four Maoris stopped at punt this morning on suspicion of carrying ammunition ; 24 canisters powder, 14 boxes caps, and 4 double guns found in swags. They were bound for Tokangamutu. Are kept here prisoners till Mr. Searancke arrives. Puntman Maguire deserves great credit for reporting them. Alfeed Sheath.

A—No. 10.

Mr. A. Boaedman to Mr. A. Sheath. Auckland, 25th July, 1869. De. Pollen is absent. Detain prisoners till you hear again from me. Make every effort to ascertain where they got the powder and ammunition, and, if bought in Auckland, where and by whom. A. Boaedman.

Mr. A. SnEATH to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Ngaruawahia, 26th July, 1869. Totte men, supposed to be Jews, have supplied the ammunition. It was collected on the road near Onehunga and Otahuhu at various times. Maoris sent down to purchase, and arranged with their men to supply in small quantities. Maoris belong to tribe Te Aua. A. Sheath.

Mr. A. Boaedman to Mr. A. Sheath. Auckland, 26th July, 1869. Let the prisoners be dealt with by the authorities. I have communicated with the police. Could not the Maoris be examined separately as to how they got the powder and arms ? A. Boaedman.

Mr. A. Sheath to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Ngaruawahia, 26th July, 1869. At Otahuhu, one double gun and five pounds powder, purchased from short man, with sandy hair and whiskers; wore French cap, blue serge coat, and moleskin trousers. At Onehunga, two guns, ten boxes caps, five hundred in each; sold by tall man, no whiskers, light woolly suit, probably tweed, looked a gentleman. At Rcmucra, one gun from a young man, bad-looking in appearance, out shooting, whiskers just growing; sold his gun for £10; black slouch hat, black cloth coat and trousers, light waistcoat: also at Remuera, nine pounds of powder and rest of caps from tall young man, dark beard and whiskers, stouter than Captain Hay, light grey tweed coat, moleskin trousers and yellow gaiters ; not gentlemanly looking. G-uns —One marked " Browne," one " Tipping and Lawdon," two no visible name ; red powder flasks, F. I\ P. 8 marked thereon. Alfeed Sheath.

Mr. A. Sheath to Mr. J. Mackat. Ngaruawahia, 26th July, 1869. Names of Maoris—Paraihe Piripi, Mohi Noahia, Rihari, Timoni, left Tokangamutu in May ; went to Piako, then to Taupo, Wairoa ; then to Paul's, Orakei; then to Kaipara, to visit the dead ; then back to Orakei, stopped there for days ; then removed into neighbourhood of Otahuhu, Remuera, and Onehunga to collect arms and ammunition ; left Auckland a fortnight ago, went to Piako ; then to Miranda Redoubt; then returned to Mercer; and thence, on Saturday, to Mangawara, where they slept; and thence here, on Sunday, when crossing Perry about 11 o'clock, arrested about noon. Captain Hay sent puntrnan Maguirc at daybreak to reconnoitre, together with letter to Te Wheoro, informing him of arrest. A. Sheath.

Captain Hat to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Ngaruawahia, 27th July, 1869. The man I sent to Rangiriri returned last night without having seen any Maoris travelling. Te Wheoro reports having two Hauhaus in custody ; searched them, but found nothing contraband of war. They admit being of the same party as prisoners under my charge. Wishes to know what he is to do. Mr. Searancke will be here at 10. J. B. Hat, Captain, Commanding Ngaruawahia.

Mr. W. N. Seaeancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Ngaruawahia, 27th July, 2869. Theee Natives were stopped here on Sunday morning and searched, and 26 canisters powder, 14 boxes caps, and 4 guns, found. lam at some loss how to proceed against them on account of section No. 59. Would you consult with Naughton and advise me how to act ? I await your answer. W. N. Seaeancke, Resident Magistrate.

Hon. Dr. Pollen and Mr. W. N. Seaeancke. 27th July, 1869. Dr. Pollen.' —Have you had the Natives before you as Resident Magistrate ? Mr. Searanclce. —Yes. Case adjourned till after dinner. Dr. Pollen. —Remand them to Auckland. Let them know that it is for inquiry. Mr. Searanclce. —I will do so. Dr. Pollen. —Te Wheoro has two men prisoners ; if no ammunition or arms found, they should not be detained. Mr. Searancke. —Detention only temporary. Dr. Pollen. —See that the others are fed and well treated. Do not let them be frightened. 23

89

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS

Ai—No. 10.

90

REPORTS FROM OFFICERS

Hon. Dr. Pollen to Mr. AV. N. Searancke. If the Native prisoners are coming down to-day, I think Te "Wheoro should take charge of them and send them on, with an escort of his own people. See to this at once. Daniel Pollen. .

Mr. "W. N. Searancke to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Alexandra, 30th July, 1869, 10.40. Your telegram about Native prisoners is too late; they have left Ngaruawahia under charge of Militia escort. "VV. N. Seahancke, Eesident Magistrate.

Captain Hat to the Hon. Dr. Pollen. Ngaruawahia, 30th July, 1569, 10.45. Barton has just seen Native prisoners ; they now say all they told Mr. Searancke was untrue, and that the Native who supplied the ammunition is Taiawhio (whom Paul knows well) ; he has been gumdigging at Henderson's Mill. They state that the European who sold Taiawhio the ammunition lives near St. Mary's, Parnell, and has been before the Court for that offence once. The prisoners are about to start under escort. J. B. Hay, Captain, Commanding at Ngaruawahia.

Eesult of the Examination of the three Maoris stopped at Ngaruawahia on Sunday, 25th July, 18C9. Men examined by Sergeant McG-overn, of Auckland Police, Hamilton, on Monday, 26th. The men stated that the ammunition was purchased from four different persons at Otahuhu, Onehunga, and Bcmuera. One double gun and 5 lbs. powder were purchased at Otahuhu ; the gun for £11, the powder for £2 10s. The person from whom it was purchased was short, with sandy hair and whiskers ; he wore a french cap, blue serge coat and moleskin trousers. Two double guns and ten boxes of caps were purchased at Onehunga, one gun for £11, the other for £15 ; the caps cost ss. per box of 500. The person from whom they were purchased was as tall as Captain Hay, had no whiskers, and wore a light woollen suit (probably tweed) ; his appearance was that of a gentleman. They met him first casually in the road, near Bycroft's mill, at AY'aihi. He afterwards used to meet them with the articles in the ti-tree, at Onehunga, till they had collected the quantity as stated. One double gun was purchased at Eemucra for £10 from a young man with whiskers just growing. He was not very good-looking ; he was out shooting when Maoris asked him to sell his gun. He wore black wide-awake, black cloth coat and trousers, and a light waistcoat. Purchased also at Eemuera, from a young man with dark beard and whiskers, tall, and stouter than Captain Hay, 9 lbs. of powder at 10s. per lb., and the remainder of the caps at ss. per box. He wore a light grey tweed coat, moleskin trousers, and gaiters ;he was not a gentleman in appearance. The Maoris had been two months at Pukaki and Auckland; they gave their names as Paraihe Piripi, Mohi Noahia, Eihari, Timoni. They left Tokangainutu about May, went to Piako, Taupo, AVairoa, Paul's Oraki, Kaipara to visit the dead, returned to Oraki, where they remained for four days, and then went to Auckland to obtain ammunition. They left Auckland a fortnight ago, went to Piako and Miranda Eedoubt, returned, and went to Mercer. Left Mercer on Saturday, the 24th July, passed Eangariri in the night, and slept at Mungawaru. One gun is marked " Browne," London ; one Tipping and Lawdon ; two without names ; caps in Eley's boxes ; powder mostly in red canisters marked 1\ F. F. 8. One cartridge they say they picked up near Eemuera and filled themselves. There was a package of blasting powder which they stated at first to be a present from Paul at Oraki, but they afterwards corrected themselves by saving they stole it when staving at Paul's. Auckland, 30th July, 1869. * Alfred Sheath.

Lieut.-Colonel Moule to the Civil Commissioner. Te Awamutu, 28th July, 1869. The following telegram was received by me last evening from Captain Hay, commanding at Ngaruawahia: —" Captain Leslie here last night about 11.30, proceeded to guard-room, ordered gnard to turn out the Maori prisoners ; Corporal refused, men obeyed, and by the time I was called he had them paraded with an escort with fixed bayonets, hands tied, and a rope round one of their necks. Ho expressed himself to the men as District Adjutant, seemed quite sober. He was here on Saturday night when we arrived, and informed me that he had been sent to see detachment quartered. He disappeared when I arrived at the guard-room, and this morning went to Hamilton. Has he an appointment on your staff?" Mr. Leslie, junior, is a settler near Hamilton, and in no way connected with the Constabulary Force. lam informed that he is occasionally a little queer. It is advisable that his father, in Auckland, should be communicated with. "W. Moule, Lieut.-Colonel.

No. 88. Copy of a Letter from Mr. "W. IS". Searancke to the Hon. the Native Minister. Sib,— Alexandra, 23rd July, 1569. I have the honor to inform you that, from information received by mo last night, I find that Te Kooti is still at To Kuiti. On Tuesday last, late at night, he had all his horses saddled and his mounted men ready for a start (not known where), but was stopped by the "Waikatos. On AVednesday

IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

91

A.—No. 10.

morning a " panui" was issued by Tawhiao, and read aloud by Tumuhuia to Te Kooti and party, to the following effect: that they were to " Kati te pakiki," cease asking or bothering; also that they were to return at once to their own district, Taupo ; and, farther, it was notified to them that they would not be allowed to move without an escort, to consist of all Waikato and Ngatimaniapoto. I should observe that both these tribes had at this time collected at and around Te Kuiti all their available fighting men from all parts, and all fully armed. Te Kooti and his followers objected to Tawhiao's proclamation, and said it was not their intention to return to Taupo, that they proposed proceeding (on leaving Te Kuiti) via Wharopapa to Turanga, as they had some matters to settle with the Natives there. I may here remark that not only Te Kooti, but all his followers, in all their conversations, not only with Mr. Hettit but also with the Natives themselves, expressed the most bitter hostility and hatred to all " kupapas," and of their determination to exterminate them wherever met. The Waikatos for some time objected to the proposed route via "Wharepajm, but eventually withdrew their opposition, but clearly gave him to understand their intention of escorting him beyond the boundaries of this district with their whole force. The Natives were still talking on these subjects yesterday, but nothing definitely settled. I have reason to believe that the Waikatos, by their passive resistance to Te Kooti's views, by their wonderful forbearance under the repeated insults they have been subjected to by him and his followers, and by the firmness of Tawhiao, have to some extent cowed Te Kooti, and shown to him the fallacy of any attempt on his part to coerce them. The Waikatos have not on any one point conceded anything to Te Kooti, and from the position assumed by them towards him, I believe that all questions at issue between them must be settled within forty-eight hours, by one of two courses, either an appeal to arms or by Te Kooti's quietly leaving the district. I incline to this latter opinion, both himself and followers being so much more quiet and subdued in their manner for the last day or two. It must not be forgotten that it has been with the greatest difficulty that Tawhiao has withheld the Waikatos and Ngatimaniapotos from firing a volley into Te Kooti and his followers. Tawhiao has also never had less than eighty policemen patrolling round his house and "Te kau ma rua," his body-guard, inside the large house at Te Kuiti, all these men being fully armed, and guns always kept loaded. One proposal to Te Kooti by the Waikatos I regret to hear. It is to this effect, to detain and locate himself and followers at Mokau inland. I mentioned in my last Te Kooti's visit to Mr. Hettit's house at Otorohanga. He spent two days there, and was accompanied by Eewi Manga, also Te Heuheu. The latter, I have every reason to believe, has joined Te Kooti, as at Te Kuiti he spoke violently in his favour, and danced about like a madman, with a brace of revolvers stuck in his belt. Te Kooti, in his confession to Mr. Hettit, speaking of the massacre at Opepe, acknowledged that it was his doing; that he himself first came out of the bush on to the party, and shook hands with the unfortunate men ; and, as an indirect proof of his being there, gave Mr. Hettit, in payment of the goods taken by his followers, a bill of exchange, No. 8-110, in favour of Mr. Ernest H. Lawson, for £25, drawn in London, and payable in Auckland, at the Bank of New Zealand; date, 25th February, 1569. Mr. Hettet told Te Kooti that this bill waa valueless, but was as powerless to obtain other money from him as he was to prevent his goods being taken. lam well aware that had Mr. Hettit raised the slightest difficulty to Te Kooti's demands, that notwithstanding their apparent good understanding, he would have been immediately shot; as it is, Mr. Hettit saved his life but lost his goods. In reference to the Matawhero massacre, Tc Kooti stated that Major Biggs was the cause of the war; that, on his landing from the Chatham Islands, if he had been left alone he would not have interfered with any one; also, it would appear from Te Kooti's remarks that there was some old personal dispute between himself and Major Biggs. In reference to Te Kooti's intention to proceed to Tauranga via Wharcpapa, it must be remembered that this route will bring him within a few miles of Cambridge and the south-eastern boundary of the confiscated territory. As it is unknown when he starts, I have informed the Commanding Officers, both at Te Awamutu and Cambridge, to caution the settlers to be on the look-out and on their guard; and as the Waikatos have not yet risen, and Te Kooti has openly expressed his intention of going to Tnuranga, it will be necessary to apprise Mr. Commissioner Clai-ke of the same. I proceeded this morning to the Kopua, but found that all the Natives had removed, some into Alexandra, others on to the Pirongia Ranges, taking all their horses and cattle with them. The name of Te Kooti appears to strike the utmost terror on the minds of all the Natives, and I am of opinion that had Te Kooti been a little less bounciblo and a little conciliatory on his arrival at Te Kuiti, and at once taken decisive action, that from the (at that time) terror of his name, and the almost state of paralysis of the Waikatos, he would most probably have carried all before him. Happily the Waikatos have had time to recover, have now assumed a bold attitude, and thereby lost to Te Kooti an opportunity which, for the peace of the whole Island, it is to be trusted he may never have again. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. William N. Seaeancke, E.M.

No. 89. Copy of a Letter from Mr. W. N. Seaeancke to the Hon. Native Minister. Sie, — Alexandra, 28th July, 1869. I have the honor to inform you that, by information received on Sunday evening, I understand that Te Kooti and his followers, amounting to about 200 men and 100 women and children, left Te Kuiti on Sunday morning. Te Kooti was also accompanied by Bewi Manga, of the Ngatimaniapoto Tribe, and Te Heuheu, of the Ngatituwharetoa Tribe. The former chief is said to be mad or foolish, and has gone away against the wishes of his tribe and friends, and unaccompanied by one of them (his wife excepted).

A.—No. 10.

92

REPORTS PROM OPPICERS IN NATIVE DISTRICTS.

I have now every reason to believe that Te Kooti and followers left in an exceedingly crestfallen condition. It is true that threats of returning were made by Te Kooti, but not openly, the idea of his doing so is simply ridiculed by the Waikatos. Tawhiao left Te Kuiti yesterday for Kawhia, and I believe within a day or two the Waikatos and Ngatimamapotos will have dispersed to their several homes. Simultaneous with the departure of Te Kooti was the arrival at Te Kuiti of a younger brother of Titokowaru ; he was accompanied by Reihana, To Wetere and others of the Mokau Natives, about fifty in all. These men, lam informed, on their arrival at once proposed to follow and attack Te Kooti, but were stopped by Tamati Manuwhiri; and so far as I can hear, I do not believe that the slightest sympathy exists at the present time either between the Waikatos and Te Kooti, or between Te Kooti and Titokowaru; but between the Waikatos and Titokowaru I believe there to be now, as previously, a certain friendly understanding. Titokowaru is said to be still in his own district, and has no intention of visiting the Waikatos. It appears that on Tc Kooti's leaving Te Kuiti it was not generally known where he was going; he went away towards Mokau, by the principal road over Otanaki, and, so far as I can hear, stopped at some old Native cultivations near Heihana's settlement, Whakatimoetumu; from here the road to Taupo via Tuhua branches off, so he may have encamped there simply for a day or two. I cannot place any belief in the reports that Te Kooti was going to recruit and return and attack the Waikatos, inasmuch as there are no Natives to recruit from nearer than Taupo, and I believe but few there. Several of Te Kooti's followers deserted him, and have remained at Te Kuiti; also several of his horses were sold there. Of the eight kegs of gunpowder brought by him from Taupo he has now five only remaining, and is very badly off for caps for his breech-loaders. I am now awaiting further information of Te Kooti's movements, but whether he goes on to Taupo at once or not, I believe we have now but little to fear from him in this district. I have, &c, William N. Searancke, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Eesident Magistrate.